U.S. equities finished the week modestly higher, but the gains were again concentrated in the largest companies. The S&P 500 rose 0.5% and the Nasdaq Composite 0.9%, yet the equal-weighted S&P 500 fell 0.5%. The style breakdown showed the same split: large-cap growth advanced 0.9%, while every mid- and small-cap segment declined. The Magnificent 7 gained 2.5%, adding more than $560 billion in market value compared with roughly $335 billion for the S&P 500 as a whole. That marked a clear reversal from the broader participation seen earlier in August.

Nvidia was the week’s main test of the AI trade. Its fiscal Q2 results were exceptionally strong: revenue rose 106% y/y to $96.2 billion, Data Center sales reached $89 billion, and management projected roughly 70% revenue growth for fiscal 2028. The shares initially jumped 8.7% after the report but finished the week only 1.3% higher after Friday’s hawkish rate repricing erased most of the post-earnings gain. Demand remains broad, with Nvidia saying supply continues to lag customer requirements. The harder question is financing the next stage of the buildout. Nvidia is increasingly helping customers and partners secure capital and backstop infrastructure projects, supporting near-term demand but also making the economics of the AI cycle more complex and reviving concerns about “circular” financing.

The macro backdrop added a second source of tension. In his first Jackson Hole speech as Fed chair, Kevin Warsh said the recent improvement in inflation was not enough to alter the Fed’s priority on price stability. Markets responded by lifting the probability of a September hike to 57.0% from 39.9% and bringing forward expectations for a second 25 bp increase to December from next summer. Stocks nevertheless absorbed the hawkish repricing relatively well, helped by resilient growth and earnings.

Six months into the U.S.-Iran war, the conflict appears to be exerting less influence on day-to-day equity trading than it did in the spring. Brent remains well above pre-war levels but has fallen substantially from its March peak as producers and shippers adapted. RBC still estimates that roughly 8 million barrels per day of Middle East supply is disrupted, yet traders largely looked through another week of stalled diplomacy. Iran has increasingly become a background inflation and energy-cost risk rather than the dominant daily catalyst for U.S. equities.

Globally, country ETFs were mostly lower, with the global ex-U.S. equity index declining 0.4%.

Crypto assets generally retreated, with Bitcoin falling 0.6% and total market capitalization declining 0.9%. The pullback was modest, and Bitcoin continued to receive support from institutional demand, with weekly inflows totaling $925 million despite the failure to break above $80,000.

According to CME data, the implied Fed funds rate curve over the next 18 months shifted higher by an average of 12 bp, leaving the implied policy rate for January 2028 around 14 bp above the prior week. The move was concentrated at shorter maturities, consistent with markets pricing a greater likelihood of near-term tightening after Warsh’s speech. Futures now imply around 39 bp of tightening by year-end, bringing a second increase into play as early as December rather than next summer.

The Treasury market reflected that shift through a pronounced flattening of the yield curve rather than a uniform rise in yields. The 1-year yield rose 12 bp to 4.13% and the 2-year climbed 10 bp to 4.34%, while the 10-year slipped 1 bp to 4.72% and the 30-year fell 6 bp to 5.21%. Part of the divergence may reflect investors taking Warsh’s inflation commitment seriously: tighter near-term policy could reduce the risk that inflation remains elevated for longer, limiting the premium demanded on long-dated bonds. Large fiscal deficits, heavy debt issuance and persistent inflation risk nevertheless remain unresolved.

For comprehensive insights and deeper context, please refer to the full article.

US Stock Market

U.S. equities finished the week modestly higher, but the gains were again concentrated in the largest companies. The S&P 500 rose 0.5% and the Nasdaq Composite 0.9%, yet the equal-weighted S&P 500 fell 0.5%. The style breakdown shows the same split: large-cap growth advanced, whereas every mid- and small-cap segment declined. The Magnificent 7 gained 2.5% in aggregate, adding more than $560 billion in market value compared with roughly $335 billion for the S&P 500 as a whole. That is a clear reversal from the broader participation seen earlier in August.

Nvidia was the week’s main test of the AI trade. Its fiscal Q2 results were exceptionally strong: revenue rose 106% y/y to $96.2 billion, Data Center sales reached $89 billion, and management projected roughly 70% revenue growth for fiscal 2028, far above previous expectations. The shares initially jumped 8.7% after the report but finished the week only 1.3% higher after Friday’s hawkish rate repricing erased most of the post-earnings gain. Demand itself still looks broad and unusually strong, supported by hyperscalers, neoclouds, enterprises and newer large customers such as SpaceX, with Nvidia saying available supply continues to lag customer requirements. The harder question is how the next stage of the buildout will be financed. Nvidia is increasingly helping customers and partners secure capital, reserve supply and backstop infrastructure projects, which strengthens near-term demand but also makes the economics of the AI cycle more complex, raising concerns about “circular” financing.

Kevin Warsh added a different source of pressure on Friday. His first Jackson Hole speech as Fed chair pushed the probability of a September hike above 50% and lifted short-term Treasury yields after he made clear that recent improvement in inflation was not enough to change the Fed’s priority. Stocks nevertheless absorbed the hawkish repricing relatively well, as resilient growth and investment still support corporate earnings despite the Fed’s reduced tolerance for inflation remaining above target.

Six months into the U.S.-Iran war, the conflict appears to be exerting less influence on day-to-day equity trading than it did in the spring. Brent remains well above pre-war levels, but crude has fallen substantially from its March peak as producers and shippers have adapted through naval escorts, ship-to-ship transfers and so-called dark crossings. RBC still estimates that roughly 8 million barrels per day of Middle East supply is disrupted, yet traders largely looked through another week of stalled diplomacy and political threats. For U.S. equities, Iran has increasingly become an inflation and energy-cost risk in the background rather than the dominant daily catalyst.

The week was notably weaker beneath the surface, with only three of eleven sectors posting gains. Technology still rose 1.3%, helped by Microsoft (+6.3% w/w), Apple (+3.4%) and Nvidia (+1.3%). Microsoft extended its longest winning streak in ten months as strong Azure growth and improving confidence in AI monetization helped ease earlier concerns over software disruption and heavy spending. Nvidia’s modest weekly gain masked much larger swings: the stock surged 8.7% on Thursday after strong earnings and a bullish long-term revenue outlook, before giving back part of the move on Friday as higher rate expectations and renewed weakness across semiconductors triggered profit-taking. Communication Services gained 1.4%, supported mainly by Meta (+5.1%) after an up-to-$18 billion settlement of youth social-media litigation removed a potentially far larger legal overhang. Financials added 1.1% on relatively broad strength across banks and payment names. Most other sectors declined. Health Care fell 2.0%, reversing part of the prior week’s rally as Eli Lilly (-6.4%), AbbVie (-3.6%) and Merck (-2.8%) retreated, and Industrials lost 1.7% on widespread weakness across machinery and aerospace names. Energy dropped 1.5% as crude prices fell sharply, while Real Estate, Materials, Consumer Staples and Utilities also slipped.

The Fear & Greed Index was little changed at 54, versus 55 a week earlier, and remained in Neutral, but the underlying indicators became more divided. Options positioning improved from Fear to Greed and market breadth stayed in Greed, while junk-bond demand remained in Extreme Greed, suggesting investors were still willing to take risk and were not rushing to buy downside protection. At the same time, market momentum and stock-price strength remained in Fear, and safe-haven demand deteriorated from Greed to Fear as bonds outperformed stocks over the preceding 20 trading days. This combination looks more like a market losing momentum than one moving into outright risk aversion: the index’s medium-term breadth and credit components remain supportive, even though this week’s gains were narrowly concentrated. The divergence also leaves the market more dependent on earnings and macro data to revive momentum, rather than on sentiment alone.

SPY retreated from its record high near 780 but found buyers around the rising 20-day moving average at 762, keeping the pullback orderly rather than signaling a deeper reversal. The ETF remains above its 50-, 100- and 200-day averages, so the broader upward trend is still intact. RSI fell to 54 from the mid-60s, showing that momentum has cooled to a more balanced level without turning weak. Holding the 760–762 area would preserve the recent breakout, while a break below it could shift attention to the 50-day average near 752. On the upside, SPY would need to reclaim 770 before challenging the 778–780 record zone again.

With the earnings season nearly complete, this will be the final update on quarterly results. According to LSEG I/B/E/S, 483 companies in the S&P 500—representing 96.6% of the index—have reported Q2 2026 results so far, up from 93.0% a week earlier. Of these, 85.7% have exceeded analysts’ EPS expectations, up from 85.2% the previous week and still above both the long-term average of 67.5% and the four-quarter average of 80%. Reported earnings are running 8.5% above estimates in aggregate, up 0.1 pp w/w and above both the long-term average surprise of 4.4% and the recent four-quarter average of 7.5%.

Against this backdrop, consensus expectations for S&P 500 Q2 EPS growth were once again revised higher to 53.0% y/y, or 49.2% excluding the Energy sector, from 51.9% and 48.0%, respectively, a week earlier.

Global Markets

Globally, country ETFs were mostly lower, with the global ex-U.S. equity index declining 0.4%.

ACWX remained capped near 78 and slipped back toward its rising 20-day moving average at 77.4, suggesting the rally has lost some momentum without breaking down. The ETF is still above its rising 50-, 100- and 200-day averages, leaving the broader trend firmly positive, while RSI fell to 55 as buying pressure cooled to a more moderate level. The 77–77.4 area is the first line of support; a break below it could bring the 50-day average near 76 into play. On the upside, ACWX still needs to clear 78–78.4 convincingly before the 80–80.5 area becomes a realistic next target.

Cryptocurrency Market

Crypto assets generally retreated in line with other risk assets, with Bitcoin falling 0.6% and total market capitalization declining 0.9%. Despite failing to climb above $80,000, Bitcoin was supported by robust institutional inflows, which totaled $925 million over the week.

Economic Indicators, Statistics and News

Several important macroeconomic indicators and economic news were published during the week:

US

· US economic growth held at an annualized 1.5% in Q2, down from 2.1% in Q1, but the revised composition showed stronger domestic demand than the headline implied. Consumer spending increased 3.4%, up from the initial 3.2% estimate, and nonresidential fixed investment advanced 8.5%. Final sales to private domestic purchasers, which exclude inventories, net exports and government spending, were revised from 3.9% to 4.2%, the fastest growth in more than three years. Inventories and net exports subtracted 0.72 and 1.14 percentage points, respectively, while government spending fell 1.0%, led by a 13.2% contraction in federal nondefense outlays. Real GDI rose 2.2%, and the average of GDP and GDI increased 1.8%.

US corporate profitability reached new highs in Q2. Profits from current production increased by $400.9 billion, and pre-tax earnings reached an annualized $4.8 trillion, equivalent to 18% of national income. As Bloomberg reported, a separate measure of after-tax domestic corporate profits relative to gross value added climbed from 18.2% to a record 19.4%, following a quarterly profit increase of nearly 10%. Pricing power, resilient consumer demand, AI-related earnings and stronger energy-sector margins contributed to the increase. Higher cash generation also supported capital spending beyond AI and helped lift equity prices and investment income, although the domestic-profit measure excludes earnings generated by US companies abroad. Regions Financial’s Richard Moody argued that strong profits are generating cash for business investment beyond AI-related projects, making the earnings surge a broader support for capital spending.

US PCE inflation remained above the Fed’s target in July despite a moderate monthly increase. Headline and core prices each rose 0.2% m/m, leaving headline inflation at 3.7% y/y and core inflation at 3.3%. Services inflation excluding energy and housing increased 0.3%, partly because portfolio-management and investment-advice prices jumped 5.6%, their largest monthly increase in a year. The Q2 data were also revised higher: headline PCE inflation reached an annualized 5.3%, and core PCE inflation was raised from 3.4% to 3.6%. The latest monthly figures suggest that underlying pressure is no longer accelerating sharply, but inflation remains well above the Fed’s 2% objective.

Consumer spending lost momentum in July after a strong second quarter. Nominal PCE increased 0.2%, but inflation-adjusted spending was essentially unchanged following a 0.4% gain in June. Real spending on core goods declined 0.8%, partly reflecting the movement of Amazon’s Prime Day from July to June, whereas real services spending rose 0.3%, supported by transportation, restaurants and accommodation. Household income provided some relief: personal income increased 0.4%, disposable income rose 0.5%, and real disposable income gained 0.4%, its strongest increase since January. The personal saving rate climbed to a four-month high of 3.0%, although gasoline prices above $4 per gallon and the fading support from unusually large tax refunds remained constraints on future consumption.

US consumer confidence weakened in August as households became more concerned about future business and labor-market conditions. The Conference Board index slipped from 90.2 to 89.4, its lowest reading since January, as the Expectations Index fell 5.8 points to 68.2. The Present Situation Index moved in the opposite direction, rising 6.8 points to 121.2, and the labor-market differential improved from 2.7% to 7.5% as more respondents described jobs as plentiful. The University of Michigan sentiment index fell from 55.2 to 51.7, with particularly sharp deterioration among lower- and middle-income households, older consumers and people without stockholdings. Michigan’s one-year inflation expectation eased from 4.2% to 4.0%, but remained elevated, while the five-to-ten-year measure held at 3.3% for a third month.

· Fed Chair Kevin Warsh used his first Jackson Hole speech to establish a hawkish policy standard without committing to an immediate rate increase. He reaffirmed that the 2% PCE inflation objective is a “firm, fixed target” and argued that better summer CPI and PCE readings had not yet produced a meaningful improvement in underlying inflation. With employment near full capacity, economic activity resilient and financial conditions still supportive, he said the Fed’s immediate priority should be prices. His conclusion—“committed to a discipline, not to a decision”—left the September meeting open, with the September 11 CPI report likely to carry substantial weight.

Warsh also outlined a narrower view of the Fed’s role. Short-term interest rates will remain the primary policy tool, with unconventional measures reserved mainly for genuine crises. He wants less routine forward guidance, arguing that detailed signals can constrain future decisions and create a feedback loop in which markets react to the Fed and policymakers then treat those reactions as economic information. Warsh separately described AI as a potentially important new factor of production that could reshape productivity, investment and employment, but stressed that the Fed’s research into these longer-term effects would not influence current rate decisions.

Markets interpreted the speech as a meaningful hawkish turn. On Friday the two-year Treasury yield rose more than 10 bps to above 4.3%, the 2-to-30-year curve flattened by about 10 bps, and futures lifted the probability of a September hike from roughly 36% to above 50%. The dollar strengthened and gold declined. Barclays and Société Générale said the remarks increased the likelihood of 25-bp hikes in September and December, and former Cleveland Fed President Loretta Mester argued that officials favoring unchanged rates now bear the burden of making their case. Other analysts were more cautious: James Clouse said Warsh had established a hawkish bias without revealing the timing of any move, and Wolfe Research kept the September probability slightly below 50%. The sharp response also exposed tension in Warsh’s communication strategy—despite his preference for markets to follow economic fundamentals rather than Fed commentary, his public appearances have become major drivers of Treasury volatility.

Eurozone

· Germany’s economy expanded 0.3% q/q in Q2, above the preliminary estimate of 0.2%, and grew 1.0% y/y. Net exports contributed 0.2 percentage point to quarterly growth as exports rose 2.0%, led by a 2.6% increase in goods shipments, compared with a 1.5% rise in imports. Domestic demand remained subdued: household and government consumption each increased 0.1%, total fixed investment fell 0.2%, and spending on machinery and equipment dropped 1.4%. Manufacturing value added nevertheless rose 0.9% q/q, with chemicals and electrical equipment among the stronger industries. Bloomberg survey consensus raised Germany’s 2026 growth forecast from 0.6% to 0.8%, and KfW lifted its projection from 0.7% to 1.1%, although low Rhine water levels and weak investment could interrupt the recovery in Q3.

German private-sector activity expanded for a second month in August, although the Flash Composite PMI slipped from 51.3 to 51.0 as manufacturing strength only narrowly offset another decline in services. New business increased for a second consecutive month, backlogs fell at their slowest pace in six months and total employment stabilized after 26 months of contraction. Expectations for activity over the coming year reached their highest level since before the Middle East conflict began in February. Input costs continued to rise at a historically elevated pace, but inflation eased in both manufacturing and services, and average selling-price growth slowed to a five-month low.

Manufacturing recorded its strongest performance in more than four years, with Germany’s Flash Manufacturing PMI jumping from 52.2 to 54.1 and the output index rising from 54.7 to 56.7, their highest readings in 51 and 55 months, respectively. Production, new orders and exports grew at their fastest rates since February 2022, supported by inventory building, higher defense spending and investment in data centers. Outstanding factory work increased again, and job cuts moderated to their weakest pace in more than a year. Manufacturers also became markedly more confident about future production, though persistent supply risks and continued dissatisfaction with order books leave some uncertainty over whether the current pace can be maintained.

Germany’s services sector remained the principal constraint on growth in August. The Services PMI fell from 49.8 to 48.5, a three-month low, as activity contracted for a fifth consecutive month and at its fastest pace since May. Forward-looking details were less weak than the headline: new business increased marginally for a second month, outstanding work declined more slowly and employment rose for the first time in eight months. Business confidence was unchanged and remained above manufacturing sentiment, while slower increases in prices charged by service providers accounted for most of the moderation in economy-wide selling-price inflation.

German business sentiment improved substantially in August. The Ifo Business Climate Index rose from 86.7 to 88.8, with the current-conditions measure climbing to 88.5 and the expectations index reaching 89.1, above the 87.5 forecast in a Bloomberg survey. Expectations improved for a fourth consecutive month, the longest such run since 2023, and economic uncertainty continued to decline despite another increase in energy prices. Sentiment strengthened across manufacturing, services, trade and construction: companies expected higher industrial production, retailers reported better current conditions, and construction firms became less pessimistic even though their assessment of present activity deteriorated slightly.

German export expectations posted their sharpest improvement in more than six years in August. The Ifo balance surged from -2.8 to +9.6, its highest level since February 2022, as companies became more optimistic about sales to EU markets despite continued weakness in demand from China. Producers of data-processing equipment, electronics and electrical machinery reported particularly favorable prospects, supported by digitalization and AI investment. Export confidence also recovered in the automotive and fabricated-metals industries, whereas paper producers and basic-metal companies continued to expect shipments to decline.

· France’s economy stagnated in Q2 after contracting 0.2% q/q in Q1, leaving output below its end-2025 level but narrowly avoiding a technical recession. Household consumption rebounded 0.3% and government consumption rose 0.4%, but fixed investment declined for a second quarter, falling 0.3% after a 0.8% drop. Exports recovered 2.9%, led by aeronautics, against a 1.1% increase in imports, giving net trade a 0.6 percentage-point contribution to growth. A 0.7-point drag from inventories erased that support. Insee estimated a 2026 growth carryover of only 0.3%, and the government’s 0.7% full-year forecast would require growth of roughly 0.5% in each remaining quarter. Agricultural losses linked to extreme heat may continue to weigh on Q3, although household consumption increased a stronger-than-expected 0.5% m/m in July.

France’s private-sector downturn deepened slightly in August, with the Flash Composite PMI falling from 49.4 to 48.8, below the 49.5 consensus estimate and marking an eighth consecutive month of contraction. New orders declined for a ninth month, with export demand weakening particularly sharply, and companies reduced outstanding work at the fastest pace in a year and a half. Business confidence dropped from July’s four-month high to its lowest since May as international and domestic political uncertainty weighed on expectations. Overall input-cost inflation eased to a five-month low, but selling-price growth was broadly unchanged because lower factory inflation was offset by renewed pressure in services.

Manufacturing provided the only clear improvement in August. The Flash Manufacturing PMI rose from 49.8 to 51.5, returning above the expansion threshold, and the output index increased from 48.5 to 50.7 as production grew for the first time since April’s inventory-driven boost. Factory employment recorded its strongest increase in a year, even as companies continued to reduce backlogs. Cost and selling-price inflation eased markedly, extending the goods sector’s disinflationary trend, although the wider decline in private-sector demand and exports limited the strength of the recovery.

Services accounted for the entire contraction in French business activity, with the Services PMI dropping from 49.6 to 48.4 in August. Extreme temperatures reduced activity and demand at some companies, contributing to falling new business, workforce cuts and a faster clearance of outstanding orders. Unlike manufacturing, service providers reported stronger operating-cost inflation as higher global oil prices raised fuel expenses. Prices charged increased at their fastest pace since May, showing that firms were passing part of those additional costs to customers.

France’s fiscal position became more difficult as weaker growth reduced the scope for deficit reduction. The public-sector borrowing requirement remained at 5.1% of GDP in Q2, with higher VAT and social-security revenue offset by rising interest payments and social benefits. The government had aimed to lower the full-year deficit from 5.1% in 2025 to 5.0% in 2026, but officials acknowledged that even this modest improvement may be difficult. Public debt stands near 117% of GDP, and Allianz Trade estimates that the 2027 deficit could reach 5.6% without additional measures. If parliament fails to approve a budget before the presidential election, the General Inspectorate of Finance estimates that extending existing tax and spending rules would add at least 0.5 percentage point to the deficit, before accounting for the economic effects of prolonged uncertainty.

The government is trying to reconcile fiscal consolidation with greater predictability for companies. Prime Minister Sébastien Lecornu has ruled out new taxes in the proposed 2027 budget and intends to rely on structural spending savings, but Finance Minister Roland Lescure said it may be difficult to remove the temporary levy on large-company profits introduced in 2025 and extended into 2026. The government plans to preserve the research tax credit and inheritance relief under the Dutreil regime, while proposing enhanced depreciation allowances for robotics investment. These measures face an uncertain passage through a divided parliament, where opposition parties have resisted both spending cuts and existing business-tax preferences.

The presidential campaign is widening disagreement over France’s economic direction ahead of voting on April 18 and May 2, 2027. Marine Le Pen and Jean-Luc Mélenchon both support lowering the retirement age for some workers, while Mélenchon also favors substantially higher taxation and public spending. His proposal to cancel or freeze government bonds held by the central bank has drawn warnings about France’s financial credibility. Business confidence in the political alternatives is low: an Opinionway survey of 65,872 executives found that 82% were pessimistic about the next president’s economic policies, and more than 70% would advise a young entrepreneur to establish a company abroad or not start one.

French sovereign debt has become a central concern for European bond investors. The 10-year yield moved above 4% for the first time in almost two decades, and its spread over German debt widened to about 86 basis points, close to its highest closing level since 2012. French yields have also traded above Italian equivalents for much of the summer, reflecting divergent fiscal trends: France’s debt ratio has risen from 114% in 2020 to 117%, whereas Italy’s has fallen from 154% to 139% and Rome now runs a primary surplus. Investors have reported reallocating funds from France to Italy, and further fiscal slippage could renew pressure on France’s credit ratings and borrowing costs.

French equities have substantially lagged the rest of Europe as political and fiscal risks increased. The CAC 40 had gained 3.1% in 2026 through August 28, compared with an 10.5% rise in the Stoxx Europe 600, and a net 56% of managers in a Bank of America survey named France as their least-preferred European equity market. CAC 40 companies generate less than one-fifth of their revenue domestically, limiting direct exposure to the weak economy, but banks, utilities, telecoms and industrial groups remain sensitive to widening sovereign spreads. Luxury companies have faced separate pressure from the Iran war and weak Chinese demand, with LVMH and Hermès falling 29.0% and 24.7%, respectively.

Asia

China’s industrial expansion slowed in July, with value added among larger enterprises rising 4.5% y/y and only 0.11% m/m, leaving growth for January-July at 5.3%. The headline concealed a wide sector gap: high-technology manufacturing expanded 16.9%, and output of computers, communications and other electronic equipment increased 19.1%. Integrated-circuit production rose 20.7% and industrial robots 30.2%, supported by global AI-related demand. Traditional industries were considerably weaker, with mining output down 4.2%, cement production falling 11.6% and crude-oil processing dropping 15.8%. Industrial export delivery value increased 10.4%, showing that external demand remained more supportive than the domestic economy.

Chinese consumer spending lost further momentum in July. Retail sales rose only 0.6% y/y to 3.9 trillion yuan, although sales excluding automobiles increased 2.5%. Motor-vehicle sales fell 17.0%, household appliances declined 1.9% and building-material sales dropped 14.2%, offsetting a 20.4% increase in telecommunications equipment. Catering revenue grew 1.4%, modestly faster than the 0.5% rise in goods sales. For the first seven months, total retail sales increased 1.2% to 28.8 trillion yuan, compared with 4.6% growth in online goods sales, indicating that the weakness was more pronounced in traditional and property-related consumption.

China’s fixed-asset investment contracted 6.7% y/y to 26.0 trillion yuan in January-July and fell 1.42% m/m in July. Non-government investment declined 9.4%, infrastructure spending fell 3.6% and manufacturing investment decreased 1.7%, with the broad pullback extending across all regions and ownership groups. Spending on construction and installation dropped 9.2%, but purchases of equipment and instruments increased 9.0%. Technology and advanced transport remained notable exceptions: investment in railway, shipping and aerospace-equipment manufacturing rose 18.7%, electronics investment gained 7.8%, and intellectual-property investment increased 9.1%.

China’s property downturn intensified in the first seven months of 2026. Real estate development investment fell by a record 19.2% y/y to 4.3 trillion yuan, including a 19.1% decline in residential projects. New construction starts dropped 24.0%, completed floor space fell 23.2% and the area under construction contracted 12.7%. New-property sales declined 11.8% by floor area and 13.1% by value. Developers’ available funding dropped 20.3%, with domestic loans down 32.1% and individual mortgage financing falling 23.5%, leaving the sector a major drag on investment, construction materials and household demand.

Industrial profit growth moderated for a third consecutive month, slowing to 11.2% y/y in July, its weakest pace of 2026. Earnings for January-July rose 17.6% to 4.58 trillion yuan, below Bloomberg Economics’ 18.1% estimate, as revenue increased 6.5% and the profit margin reached 5.66%, up 0.54 percentage point from a year earlier. Electronics profits surged 110% and contributed 9.3 percentage points to total growth, but automaker earnings fell 20.4%, ferrous-metals profits declined 51.2% and furniture manufacturers recorded a 58.2% drop. Private-company profit growth slowed from 13.0% in the first half to 10.9% in January-July, while earnings at foreign-invested businesses rose only 1.2%.

Overall, China’s near-term growth outlook deteriorated at the start of Q3. BNP Paribas estimated that the July data were consistent with GDP growth of around 4.1%, below the roughly 4.3% pace needed in the second half to reach the 4.5% lower bound of the government’s target. Extreme weather temporarily disrupted factories, ports and electricity supplies, but the simultaneous slowdown in production, consumption and investment suggests that weakness was not solely weather-related. Advanced manufacturing and exports remain strong, yet their scale has not been sufficient to offset the contraction in property and infrastructure investment or the stagnation in household demand.

Chinese policymakers adopted a more supportive tone in July but did not immediately announce additional stimulus. Officials said they would expand domestic demand, improve the balance between supply and demand and introduce new measures when appropriate. Options cited by economists include additional quotas for special sovereign and local-government bonds and extra policy financing if the existing 800 billion yuan facility is exhausted. BNP Paribas economists said support could arrive by the end of September if growth appears likely to fall below the 4.5% lower bound of the official target.

Foreign Exchange Markets

The U.S. dollar strengthened over the week, with the DXY index rising 0.9%. Most of the advance came after Warsh’s Jackson Hole speech, as the sharp repricing toward higher Fed rates increased the dollar’s expected interest-rate advantage.

Commodities and Energy Markets

The commodities complex ended the week with mixed performance.

Debt and Fixed Income Markets

According to CME data, the implied Fed funds rate curve over the next 18 months shifted higher by an average of 12 bp, leaving the implied policy rate for January 2028 around 14 bp above the prior week’s level.

Almost all of the repricing came after Kevin Warsh’s first Jackson Hole speech as Fed chair. Although he stopped short of signaling an imminent hike, Warsh described the 2% inflation target as firm and argued that the recent improvement in inflation was not yet sufficient to change the Fed’s priorities. With employment still strong, economic activity resilient and financial conditions supportive, markets interpreted the speech as establishing a distinctly hawkish bias. As a result, the implied probability of a September hike surged to 57.0% from 39.9% a week earlier, while the expected timing of a second 25 bp increase moved forward to December from next summer. In total, futures now imply around 39 bp of cumulative tightening by year-end 2026, up from 26 bp a week earlier.

The Treasury market reflected that shift through a pronounced flattening of the yield curve rather than a uniform rise in yields. Short and intermediate maturities moved higher as investors priced a greater likelihood of Fed tightening: the 1-year yield rose 12 bp to 4.13%, while the 2-year climbed by 10 bp to 4.34%. Longer maturities moved in the opposite direction, with the 10-year yield slipping 1 bp to 4.72% and the 30-year falling 6 bp to 5.21%. Part of that divergence may reflect the market taking Warsh’s inflation commitment seriously: a more restrictive near-term policy path reduces the risk that inflation remains elevated indefinitely, limiting the compensation investors demand at the long end.

You can find more articles in our Telegram channel at https://t.me/atranicapital_eng

U.S. equities pulled back, with the S&P 500 falling 1.4%, the Nasdaq Composite 2.1% and the Dow 0.9%. The weakness was broad across size and style, although value held up better than growth. Health care, energy and materials still advanced, but the market had a distinctly defensive tone. The sharpest pressure fell on semiconductors and the broader AI complex, where the move looked more like profit-taking in a crowded trade than a clear deterioration in demand.

Even within semiconductors, flows were mixed. SMH recorded $1.7 billion of outflows, while SOXX attracted about $670 million. BofA’s August Fund Manager Survey showed the same tension: long global semiconductors remained the market’s most crowded trade, but the share identifying it fell to 53% from 82% in July, while 71% of managers still did not expect a major hyperscaler to cut capital spending this year. That points to de-risking within AI rather than an outright exit from the infrastructure cycle.

Morningstar expects Nvidia to deliver another beat-and-raise quarter, while Stifel and Oppenheimer also expect results and guidance to exceed consensus. The question has shifted from whether AI demand exists to whether future revenue and cash flow can justify the scale of spending already committed. The roughly $3 trillion of future obligations discussed in our recent article is therefore better viewed as a source of greater market sensitivity than as the direct trigger for this week’s decline. With expectations already high, Nvidia’s Wednesday results may hinge less on the headline beat than on China guidance, gross margins and the product roadmap.

Macro headlines added pressure but never produced a consistent market reaction. Higher oil prices and long-term yields weighed on equities early in the week, while the Treasury’s bond-buyback announcement produced only a brief rebound. Overall, the week looked more like an orderly reset in stretched positioning than a response to one decisive catalyst.

Globally, country ETFs were mixed, with the global ex-U.S. equity index broadly flat. Chip-heavy Japan, Taiwan and South Korea declined, offset by gains elsewhere.

Business activity across the G4 strengthened further in August, with the average Flash Composite PMI rising to 53.5 from 52.9, a 39-month high. The US led at 56.0, driven mainly by services. The eurozone and UK improved to 52.1 and 52.5, while Japan climbed to 53.4. The recovery broadened toward services and final demand, although inflation remained uneven and business confidence subdued.

Crypto assets staged a sharp rebound, with Bitcoin gaining 24.3% and total market capitalization rising 22.3%. The move was helped by a sudden improvement in the policy backdrop: the SEC proposed its Regulation Crypto Assets framework, President Trump renewed pressure for passage of the Clarity Act, and the Treasury’s buyback announcement briefly pushed yields and the dollar lower. In a market heavily positioned for further weakness, that was enough to trigger a sharp reversal.

According to CME data, the implied Fed funds curve shifted higher by about 4 bp over the next 18 months as stronger economic data reinforced the case for restrictive policy. The probability of a September hike rose to 39.9% from 33.1%, while futures now imply around 26 bp of cumulative tightening by year-end 2026, up from 24 bp.

Treasuries moved only modestly on the week despite a sharp midweek swing. The 1-year yield rose 5 bp to 4.01%, the 10-year 4 bp to 4.73%, and the 30-year 1 bp to 5.27%. The Treasury’s decision to at least double long-bond buybacks briefly pushed yields lower. Investors remain focused on inflation, uncertainty over the Fed path and large fiscal deficits. With public debt above $40 trillion, the buyback program looks more like temporary relief than a solution to pressure on the long end.

For comprehensive insights and deeper context, please refer to the full article.

US Stock Market

U.S. equities pulled back, with the S&P 500 falling 1.4%, the Nasdaq Composite 2.1% and the Dow 0.9%. The weakness was broad across size and style: every segment lost ground, although value held up better than growth. It was not an indiscriminate flight from equities—health care, energy and materials still advanced—but the market had a distinctly defensive tone. The sharpest pressure fell on semiconductors and the broader AI complex. With no clear deterioration in demand, the move looked more like a crowded trade running into profit-taking and a much higher bar for further gains.

Even within semiconductors, however, the flow picture was mixed. SMH recorded $1.7 billion of outflows, while SOXX attracted about $670 million, arguing against a straightforward exit from the sector. BofA’s August Fund Manager Survey captured the same tension: long global semiconductors remained the market’s most crowded trade, but the share identifying it fell to 53% from a record 82% in July. At the same time, 71% of managers still did not expect a major hyperscaler to cut capital spending this year. Investors therefore appear to be trimming concentration rather than abandoning the AI infrastructure cycle. Thin August trading probably exaggerated the decline, with Mizuho’s Jordan Klein attributing part of the move to machine trading in an unusually low-volume market.

Near-term industry forecasts also remain constructive. Morningstar expects Nvidia to deliver another beat-and-raise quarter, while analysts at Stifel and Oppenheimer likewise expect results and guidance to exceed consensus. The concern has shifted from whether AI demand exists today to the economics of the next stage: how long spending can keep growing, how much additional debt and leasing will be required, and whether future revenue and cash flow will justify the commitments already made. The roughly $3 trillion of future obligations discussed in our recent article is therefore better viewed as a source of greater market sensitivity than as the direct trigger for this week’s decline. Nvidia’s results on Wednesday will provide the next important test, but with expectations already high, a routine earnings beat may not be enough. Guidance on China, gross margins, the product roadmap and the company’s growing role in financing AI projects may matter more than the headline figures.

The week’s macro headlines added pressure but never produced a consistent market reaction. Higher oil prices and long-term yields weighed on equities early in the week, while the Treasury’s bond-buyback announcement produced only a brief rebound on Wednesday and did little to help chipmakers. The week therefore looks less like a response to one decisive catalyst and more like an orderly reset in a market where positioning and expectations had become stretched. The AI trade remains intact, but investors are becoming less willing to reward every company tied to it simply because spending continues to rise.

Sector performance deteriorated over the week, with only three of eleven sectors posting gains. Health Care was the clear leader, rising 4.3%, as a breakthrough in Moderna and Merck’s personalized mRNA cancer vaccine triggered a broad biopharma rally. Merck jumped 12.3% after the Phase 3 melanoma trial met its key endpoints, while Eli Lilly (+6.4%), AbbVie (+6.2%) and Amgen (+5.8%) also advanced as investors rotated toward large drugmakers. Energy gained 2.8% as WTI and Brent rose about 5-6% over the week amid persistent U.S.–Iran tensions and continued uncertainty around the Strait of Hormuz, supporting Exxon (+3.1%), Chevron (+2.6%) and ConocoPhillips (+6.4%). Materials also finished higher, while weakness was concentrated in Technology, Utilities and Industrials. Technology fell 3.5% as the recent semiconductor rally reversed, with Nvidia (-4.6%), Broadcom (-6.2%), AMD (-8.0%) and Intel (-12.1%) all declining amid renewed concerns over AI valuations and persistently high bond yields. Utilities dropped 3.5% as Treasury yields moved higher over the week, while Industrials fell 3.4% amid broad weakness in aerospace and defense names including Boeing, RTX, Lockheed Martin and GE Aerospace. Overall, the week showed a pronounced rotation away from technology and other rate-sensitive areas toward Health Care and Energy rather than a uniform market selloff.

The Fear & Greed Index fell sharply to 55 from 65, moving from Greed back into Neutral. The deterioration was fairly broad: market momentum shifted from Greed to Fear as the S&P 500 pulled back from recent highs, while options positioning also moved from Greed to Fear, indicating a renewed demand for downside protection. Safe-haven demand cooled from Extreme Greed to Greed, although market breadth remained in Greed and junk-bond demand stayed in Extreme Greed, suggesting that risk appetite has weakened rather than disappeared. Stock-price strength remained in Fear and volatility stayed Neutral. Overall, the mix points to a meaningful cooling in the optimism seen over the previous two weeks, but not yet to a broad risk-off shift, with credit conditions and market breadth still relatively supportive.

SPY retreated from its record high near 780 but found buyers around the rising 20-day moving average at 762, keeping the pullback orderly rather than signaling a deeper reversal. The ETF remains above its 50-, 100- and 200-day averages, so the broader upward trend is still intact. RSI fell to 54 from the mid-60s, showing that momentum has cooled to a more balanced level without turning weak. Holding the 760–762 area would preserve the recent breakout, while a break below it could shift attention to the 50-day average near 752. On the upside, SPY would need to reclaim 770 before challenging the 778–780 record zone again.

The earnings season is gaining momentum. According to LSEG I/B/E/S, 465 companies in the S&P 500—representing 93.0% of the index—have reported Q2 2026 results so far, up from 90.6% a week earlier. Of these, 85.2% have exceeded analysts’ EPS expectations, slightly up from 84.8% the previous week and still above both the long-term average of 67.5% and the four-quarter average of 80%. Reported earnings are running 8.4% above estimates in aggregate, unchanged w/w and above both the long-term average surprise of 4.4% and the recent four-quarter average of 7.5%.

Against this backdrop, consensus expectations for S&P 500 Q2 EPS growth were once again revised higher to 51.9% y/y, or 48.0% excluding the Energy sector, from 51.9% and 47.7%, respectively, a week earlier.

In the upcoming week beginning August 24, 18 S&P 500 companies are scheduled to report, including the world’s largest company – Nvidia on Wednesday. Market attention will be particularly focused on the following high-profile earnings releases:

Global Markets

Globally, country ETFs posted mixed performance, with the global ex-U.S. equity index broadly flat. Chip-heavy markets in Japan, Taiwan and South Korea all declined, while gains in Europe, China and Brazil offset those losses.

ACWX spent another week pressing against 78 but has yet to establish a clear foothold above it. The price remains comfortably ahead of all four rising moving averages, so the broader trend is still positive despite the recent pause. RSI eased to 60, suggesting demand remains healthy while some of the earlier intensity has faded. A firm move above 78–78.2 would revive the advance and bring 80–80.5 into focus, while the rising 20-day average near 76.5 offers the first support, followed by the 75–76 area around the 50- and 100-day lines.

Cryptocurrency Market

Crypto assets staged a sharp rebound, with Bitcoin gaining 24.3% and total market capitalization rising 22.3%. The initial catalyst was a sudden improvement in the policy backdrop. The SEC proposed its long-awaited Regulation Crypto Assets framework, creating a tailored offering regime for certain crypto-related investment contracts, while President Trump renewed pressure for passage of the Clarity Act and the Treasury’s bond-buyback announcement briefly pushed yields and the dollar lower. In a market already heavily positioned for further weakness, those developments were enough to trigger a sharp reversal.

The scale of the rally was amplified by positioning. Crypto markets had become heavily skewed to the downside after months of selling, leaving a large short base vulnerable to any positive surprise. More than $1 billion of Bitcoin shorts were liquidated within about an hour on Wednesday and billions more across the broader market over the following days. As Bitcoin broke above its 20- and 50-day moving averages and then cleared the 100- and 200-day averages as well, forced covering likely fed on itself, turning an initially news-driven rebound into a powerful technical squeeze. That helps explain why the move was so abrupt: the market was positioned for further weakness and was poorly prepared for an upside break. Importantly, the rally was not driven by short covering alone. U.S. spot Bitcoin ETFs attracted about $1.9 billion of net inflows over the week, the strongest since October, indicating that institutional spot demand also returned alongside the squeeze.

Economic Indicators, Statistics and News

Several important macroeconomic indicators and economic news were published during the week:

Global

Business activity across the G4 economies accelerated further in August, with the simple average of flash composite PMIs rising to 53.5 from 52.9 in July, a 39-month high. The improvement was broad-based, with all four economies remaining in expansion, while S&P Global’s aggregate G4 measure showed activity growing at the fastest pace since April 2022 and putting the major developed economies on course for their strongest quarter since Q2 2022. Importantly, the composition of growth has changed: the manufacturing-led rebound of the second quarter, which was partly driven by precautionary stockbuilding, is fading, while services have taken over as the main engine as lower energy prices and improved confidence revive discretionary demand. G4 manufacturing output growth slowed to its weakest since March, while services expanded at the fastest pace since May 2023.

The United States remained the clear growth leader, with the Flash Composite PMI jumping to 56.0 from 54.5, a 52-month high. The acceleration was driven by services, which reached a 20-month high, while manufacturing output slowed sharply to a 13-month low as precautionary inventory building faded and supply shortages constrained production. Demand remained robust, however, and employment rose at the fastest pace since January 2025, accompanied by stronger confidence and growing order backlogs. Chris Williamson described US business activity as “booming,” with the survey pointing to annualized Q3 GDP growth approaching 3%, up from around 1.5% in Q2. Price pressures also eased, with selling-price inflation falling to its lowest since November, although elevated energy costs and persistent supply delays leave the inflation picture vulnerable.

The Eurozone Flash Composite PMI edged up to 52.1 from 52.0, a nine-month high, with manufacturing rather than services providing the main lift. Factory output grew at the fastest pace in four-and-a-half years, led by Germany and supported not only by residual stockbuilding but also stronger demand for AI-related technology and equipment linked to defense spending. Services continued to expand modestly, while new orders reached a 40-month high and employment rose for the first time this year. Williamson said the readings were consistent with around 0.3% q/q GDP growth in Q3. Inflation pressures continued to ease, including in services, although S&P Global argued that stronger activity, renewed hiring and still-elevated prices mean the ECB is likely to retain a hawkish bias.

The UK Flash Composite PMI rose to 52.5 from 52.2, a four-month high, as stronger services activity more than offset a pronounced slowdown in manufacturing. Improved domestic spending, sunny weather and technology investment supported the expansion, while reduced precautionary stockbuilding weighed on factory growth. The survey remained consistent with roughly 0.3% q/q GDP growth in Q3, and business confidence reached its highest since the Middle East war began, while the pace of job losses moderated. Cost pressures, however, re-accelerated after three months of easing, reflecting fuel, transport, raw-material and wage costs. Williamson therefore expects the Bank of England to maintain a hawkish bias but remain cautious about tightening until the direction of growth and inflation becomes clearer.

Japan also remained strong, with the Flash Composite PMI rising to 53.4 from 52.7, the highest since February and the second-highest reading since May 2023. Unlike the other major economies, Japan’s expansion remained manufacturing-led, with factory production close to its strongest pace since 2014 and manufacturing orders and exports rising at their fastest rates since early 2018. Semiconductor and AI-related demand provided an important tailwind, while services also gained momentum on solid domestic demand. S&P Global estimates that the PMI readings are consistent with around 0.8% q/q GDP growth in Q3, roughly double the Q2 pace. Annabel Fiddes noted that cost inflation continued to ease, but selling prices remained close to record highs, leaving the Bank of Japan under pressure to consider further tightening.

Taken together, the August readings provide the clearest evidence yet that the G4 economies have moved beyond the war-related slowdown of the second quarter, with growth broadening and the engine of expansion shifting from precautionary manufacturing activity toward services and final demand. But the strength of the summer rebound should still be treated cautiously. S&P Global highlighted unusually severe supply delays, the risk of renewed energy and food inflation, potentially tighter financial conditions and geopolitical uncertainty as key threats. It also noted that the surge in activity has not been matched by an equivalent improvement in 12-month business confidence, while sunny weather and one-off events may have temporarily boosted consumer activity. The near-term picture has therefore improved substantially, but the durability of the rebound will depend increasingly on whether stronger demand can persist as these temporary supports fade.

US

US industrial production increased 0.2% month on month in July following an upwardly revised 0.3% gain in June and stood 1.1% above its year-earlier level. Manufacturing output also rose 0.2%, or 0.4% excluding motor vehicles, while mining and utilities advanced 0.2% and 0.5%, respectively. The composition pointed to continued strength in capital spending: business-equipment production increased 0.8%, defense and space equipment rose 1.8%, and computer and electronic products gained 1.9%. Construction supplies advanced 0.8%, while motor-vehicle output fell 2.1% and consumer-goods production declined 0.4%. Overall capacity utilization edged up to 76.3%, still 3.1 percentage points below its long-term average, while manufacturing utilization reached 76.0%.

US leading indicators improved modestly in July, adding to evidence that the economy should continue expanding at a moderate pace. The Conference Board’s LEI rose 0.2% to 99.5 after a revised 0.1% decline in June, while its six-month change turned positive at 0.2%, reversing a 1.3% contraction in the preceding six months. This was the first positive six-month reading in more than four years. Most components supported the index, including building permits and jobless claims, although consumer expectations remained a significant drag. The Coincident Economic Index increased 0.2% to 114.8 and was up 0.5% over six months, with payroll employment the only one of its four components making a negative contribution. The Lagging Economic Index also rose 0.2% to 120.4.

The S&P Global Flash US Composite PMI rose from 54.5 in July to 56.0 in August, its highest level since April 2022, as faster services growth outweighed weaker factory production. Demand remained strong across both sectors, employment increased at its fastest pace since January 2025, and expectations for future activity reached a nine-month high. Input-cost inflation eased to its slowest rate since February, while prices charged rose at the weakest pace since November, although both measures remained elevated. Based on historical relationships, S&P Global said the Q3 readings were consistent with annualized economic growth approaching 3.0%, compared with 1.5% in Q2.

The S&P Global Flash US Manufacturing PMI declined from 53.9 to 53.2 in August, a five-month low, while the manufacturing output index fell more sharply from 53.9 to 51.9, its weakest reading in 13 months. New orders continued to expand but at the slowest pace since March, as fading precautionary inventory accumulation and shortages of raw materials restrained production. Input purchases fell for the first time since February, while delivery delays remained among the most severe of the past four years and caused unfinished work to accumulate. Factory employment recorded its strongest increase since May, and both input- and output-price inflation moderated, with selling-price growth easing to a six-month low.

The S&P Global Flash US Services PMI climbed from 54.6 to 56.8 in August, reaching a 20-month high and becoming the main driver of the broader acceleration in business activity. New business growth strengthened, while outstanding work increased at its fastest rate since May 2022, prompting service providers to add staff at the strongest pace since the beginning of 2025. The expansion was supported by consumer demand and financial services activity, although its increasing importance also made overall growth more dependent on household spending. Services input-cost inflation fell sharply from July’s 14-month high, and prices charged rose at their slowest rate in 10 months, providing some evidence that earlier energy-related price pressures were easing.

US GDP growth expectations improved as consumer spending and AI-related investment proved stronger than previously assumed. Bloomberg survey consensus raised its forecast for third-quarter annualized growth to 2.5% from 2.0%, while projections for subsequent quarters remained between 2.0% and 2.2% through the end of 2027. S&P Global’s August PMI data indicated a somewhat faster third-quarter pace approaching 3.0%. The Conference Board maintained its calendar-year forecasts at 1.9% for both 2026 and 2027. Business capital expenditure remains concentrated in technology and AI, with Bloomberg Industry analysts estimating related investment could exceed $1 trillion in 2026 and $1.5 trillion in 2027, while consumer growth continues to depend disproportionately on higher-income households.

US core PCE inflation is expected to moderate gradually rather than return quickly to the Fed’s target. Economists surveyed by Bloomberg project that the core PCE price index will average 3.2% in 2026 before slowing to 2.5% in 2027, still above the central bank’s 2% objective. The easing in PMI input and selling-price measures supports the view that the earlier energy shock is fading, but tariffs, supply-chain constraints and the possibility of another increase in oil prices remain upside risks. An extended escalation in the Iran conflict could therefore slow the disinflation process while simultaneously weakening economic growth.

The Fed is expected to remain on hold as policymakers balance stronger activity against gradually moderating inflation. Bloomberg survey consensus indicates no change in interest rates through July 2027, while market pricing assigns a probability of less than 50% to a September increase. Faster output and employment growth in the August PMI would normally support a tighter stance, but softer labor-market and inflation data have reduced the urgency for an immediate move. The policy outlook remains sensitive to energy prices: renewed escalation in the Middle East could revive inflation and strengthen the case for higher rates, while a continued decline in price pressures would give the Fed more scope to wait.

Eurozone

The Conference Board’s Euro Area LEI fell 0.1% to 102.7 in July, its sixth consecutive monthly decline, following a 0.2% decrease in June. The index contracted 1.4% between January and July, compared with a 0.6% decline over the preceding six months, indicating continued pressure on near-term activity. Weak consumer expectations, subdued demand expectations among services companies and low order-book volumes were the main drags, while financial components provided some support. The Coincident Economic Index offered a firmer assessment of current conditions, rising 0.1% to 110.5 and increasing 0.4% over six months. Although the LEI’s breadth triggered a warning signal, its decline remained above the Conference Board’s recession threshold.

Euro-area private-sector activity expanded slightly faster in August, with the Flash Composite PMI rising from 52.0 to 52.1, above the 51.7 consensus forecast and its highest reading in nine months. New-order growth accelerated to a 40-month high, while export business increased for the first time in four and a half years. Employment rose for the first time in 2026, although business confidence declined to a three-month low and remained below its historical average. Germany recorded modest overall growth despite strong factory production, France remained in contraction, and the rest of the euro area achieved its fastest expansion since April 2022.

Euro-area manufacturing strengthened materially in August, with the Flash Manufacturing PMI rising from 51.9 to 52.8, its highest level in 51 months, while the manufacturing output index increased from 52.9 to 53.4, a 54-month high. Germany led the improvement, recording its fastest production growth since January 2022, supported by AI-related technology demand, defense equipment spending and some precautionary inventory activity. Manufacturing export orders returned to growth, while employment increased marginally and ended 38 consecutive months of job losses. Supply-chain disruption remained a constraint, however, with sharply longer delivery times, falling inventories of inputs and finished goods, and only a modest increase in purchasing activity.

Euro-area services activity remained in moderate expansion, with the Flash Services PMI unchanged at 51.7 in August. Tourism spending supported demand, particularly outside France and Germany, and service providers increased employment more quickly. Germany’s services sector contracted for a fifth consecutive month, while France remained weak, leaving the broader improvement concentrated in other euro-area economies, where services growth was the fastest in more than three years. Services input-cost inflation accelerated slightly from July, but selling-price inflation eased to its joint-lowest rate of 2026, indicating that firms were passing through a smaller share of their higher costs.

The euro-area growth outlook remained mixed across business indicators and household surveys. S&P Global’s August PMI was consistent with GDP growth of around 0.3% quarter on quarter in the third quarter, while the Conference Board maintained its forecast for 1.3% growth in 2026. Consumers remained much more pessimistic, although their expected change in economic activity over the next 12 months improved to -1.2% in July from -1.4% in June. The contrast suggests that current business activity is holding up better than household perceptions, while geopolitical uncertainty, weak confidence and disruption to European transport and energy production continue to threaten future momentum.

Euro-area consumer inflation expectations declined across the shorter horizons in July. Median expectations for the next year eased from 3.0% to 2.9%, while the three-year measure fell from 2.8% to 2.7% and the five-year estimate remained at 2.4%. Perceived inflation over the previous year also moderated from 3.6% to 3.5%. Uncertainty about near-term inflation remained above its pre-war level, and lower-income households continued to report higher perceived and expected inflation than higher-income respondents. The improvement was consistent with the August PMI, which showed input-cost growth at its weakest since February and output-price inflation at its lowest since March.

The ECB received mixed policy signals from the latest surveys. Lower consumer inflation expectations and slower PMI selling-price growth reduced some concern that the Middle East energy shock was becoming entrenched. However, the Composite PMI remained consistent with solid third-quarter growth, businesses returned to hiring and price pressures were still elevated by historical standards. S&P Global therefore judged that a hawkish policy bias was likely to persist and that further near-term rate increases could not be excluded.

UK

UK CPI inflation increased to 2.9% year on year in July from 2.6% in June, while prices rose 0.3% month on month, compared with 0.1% a year earlier. CPIH inflation, which includes owner-occupier housing costs, accelerated from 2.8% to 3.1%. The increase was concentrated in goods and household energy rather than underlying domestic services: core CPI remained at 2.6%, services inflation eased from 3.6% to 3.4%, and goods inflation rose from 1.7% to 2.2%. Housing and household-services inflation jumped from 2.7% to 4.1% after gas prices rose 14.7% and electricity prices increased 3.6% during the month following the adjustment to Ofgem’s price cap. The estimated annual dual-fuel bill increased by £221 to £1,862. Food inflation slowed from 1.7% to 1.3%, while transport inflation declined from 5.7% to 3.6% as annual motor-fuel inflation eased from 21.3% to 15.5%.

UK retail sales volumes fell 0.5% month on month in July after increases of 0.7% in June and 1.3% in May, as earlier promotions and warm-weather purchases shifted some demand into the preceding months. Non-food store sales dropped 1.3%, with weakness in clothing, household goods and department stores, while nonstore retailers also declined. Food-store sales increased, supported by the weather and World Cup demand, and fuel volumes recovered modestly but remained below February levels. The broader trend was firmer than the monthly headline: volumes rose 1.1% in the three months to July, were 3.0% higher than a year earlier and stood only 0.1% below their February 2020 level. Online spending values fell 3.9% during July, reducing online retail’s share of total sales from 29.2% to 28.3%.

UK consumer confidence improved in August despite higher inflation and geopolitical uncertainty. The GfK headline index rose 3 points to -14, its strongest reading in two years and a marked recovery from -25 in April. Expectations for personal finances over the next year increased 3 points to +4, while the outlook for the general economy improved 5 points to -23, its best result since August 2024. The major-purchase index also rose 5 points to -7, the highest since December 2021, indicating a greater willingness to make discretionary purchases. However, assessments of the economy over the previous year weakened slightly to -40, and the savings index declined 5 points to +22, showing that the improvement in confidence was focused mainly on future conditions.

UK private-sector activity strengthened in August, with the Flash Composite PMI rising from 52.2 to 52.5, its highest level in four months and its second consecutive reading above the 50 expansion threshold. Total new business increased at the fastest pace since February, supported by firmer domestic business and consumer spending, although export demand remained weak. Business expectations improved for a third month to their highest since February as order books and confidence in the domestic outlook recovered. S&P Global estimated that the survey was consistent with GDP growth of around 0.3% quarter on quarter in the third quarter. Input-cost inflation accelerated for the first time in four months, however, while selling-price growth also increased from July’s five-month low.

UK manufacturing momentum softened in August as the benefits from precautionary inventory building began to fade. The Flash Manufacturing PMI declined from 51.9 to 51.5, while the manufacturing output index fell more sharply from 52.9 to 51.2, with both measures reaching five-month lows. Factory production and new orders continued to increase, but at slower rates, while export-order growth was marginal and the weakest recorded in 2026. Supply-chain delays remained widespread despite easing from their April peak, and factory input-cost inflation stayed higher than at any time since 2022. Companies attributed the pressure to energy and raw-material costs, steel tariffs and continuing disruption associated with the Middle East conflict.

UK services growth accelerated in August, with the Flash Services PMI rising from 52.1 to 52.8, its highest level in six months. New business increased at the fastest pace since February, led by technology, consumer-facing services, travel and transport, with warm weather supporting leisure activity. Overseas services demand remained weak, however, falling at the second-fastest rate since March. Services employment declined for a 23rd consecutive month, the longest sequence since the survey began in 1996, although the pace of job losses was the mildest since October 2025. Higher fuel, transport, wage, food, technology and utility costs pushed both input and selling-price inflation moderately higher.

The BOE’s policy outlook remained finely balanced between improving activity and renewed price pressure. The rise in CPI to 2.9%, stronger service-sector growth and accelerating PMI cost measures support a continued hawkish bias. However, lower services inflation in the official CPI data, persistent private-sector job losses and uncertainty over whether the energy shock will spread more broadly argue against an immediate rate increase. S&P Global’s policy indicator was consistent with rates remaining unchanged in the near term, with future tightening becoming more likely only if supply disruption produces wider price increases while economic growth continues to recover.

Asia

Japan’s real GDP increased 0.3% QoQ, equivalent to an annualized 1.1%, in Q2, extending the expansion to a third quarter but slowing from a revised 1.9% annualized pace in Q1 and missing the 2.0% consensus forecast. Domestic demand subtracted 0.2 percentage point from growth as private consumption was unchanged and business investment fell 1.2%, against expectations for gains of 0.4% and 0.5%, respectively. Private inventories added 0.3 percentage point, while net exports contributed 0.5 percentage point, supported by a 0.5% rise in exports and a 1.5% decline in imports. Final sales of domestic product nevertheless advanced 0.5% QoQ, indicating that the headline expansion was broader than inventory accumulation alone, although household and corporate demand remained weak.

Japan’s consumer inflation strengthened in July. Headline CPI rose 1.9% YoY and 0.5% MoM, while CPI excluding fresh food accelerated to 1.8% YoY from 1.6% and increased 0.4% MoM. The measure excluding both fresh food and energy advanced 1.9% YoY and 0.4% MoM, showing that the increase was not confined to fuel. Energy prices returned to growth at 0.6% YoY, services inflation edged up to 1.2%, and processed-food prices increased 3.0%. Rice prices provided substantial relief, falling almost 12% after rising 91% a year earlier, but higher prices for snacks, dining out and other food products kept underlying cost pressures present.

Japan’s private-sector expansion accelerated in August, with the Flash Composite PMI rising to 53.4 from 52.7, its highest reading since February and its second highest since May 2023. Business activity has now increased for 17 consecutive months, supported by stronger total orders across both manufacturing and services. Employment rose for a 35th month, at a pace above its historical average, while confidence for the coming year reached its highest level since February. Input-cost growth eased to a five-month low but remained strong, and average selling-price inflation stayed close to the survey record, suggesting that improved activity has not yet removed pressure on corporate prices.

Manufacturing remained the main source of PMI strength, with the Flash Manufacturing PMI rising to 55.1 from 54.5, while the output index eased only slightly to 56.1 from 56.3. Production therefore remained close to July’s pace, which had been the strongest since February 2014. Total new orders and export demand increased at their fastest rates since January 2018, helped by semiconductor, AI and other technology-related demand as well as the weak yen. Manufacturers also expanded employment and purchasing activity. Supplier delays remained more widespread than at any time since 2022, but had eased substantially from Q2, while factory input-cost inflation slowed to a five-month low.

Services activity gained momentum in August, with the Flash Services PMI rising to 52.3 from 51.2, indicating the strongest expansion since March. Domestic demand supported one of the strongest increases in new business since February, offsetting a marked deterioration in external demand. New export business fell at its fastest rate since 2020, showing that the weaker yen provided less support to services than to manufacturing. Service providers continued to hire, although employment growth was only marginal and the weakest in a year. Cost inflation moderated, but prices charged remained close to their record pace, pointing to persistent domestic services inflation despite the uneven demand profile.

The BOJ faces conflicting signals ahead of its September 18 decision. Faster CPI, near-record PMI selling-price growth and continuing cost pass-through support further normalization, while flat consumption and a 1.2% contraction in business investment weaken the domestic-growth case for an immediate move. The BOJ expects inflation excluding fresh food to move clearly above 2% during the second half of the fiscal year, and SMBC Nikko Securities projects a rise to 2.8% late in 2026. Overnight swaps assign about an 80% probability to a September rate increase, suggesting that markets view inflation and currency weakness as more important for the decision than the softer GDP composition.

Foreign Exchange Markets

The U.S. dollar weakened over the week, with the DXY index declining 0.9%. Almost all of the move came on Wednesday, when the Treasury’s surprise decision to at least double buybacks of 10- to 30-year securities drove long-term yields sharply lower and pushed the dollar to its weakest level in three months. Citigroup and Deutsche Bank both viewed the move as negative for the dollar, arguing that attempts to suppress long-term yields effectively shift some of the adjustment from bonds into the currency.

The deeper concern is that the buyback program may mark a broader shift toward more active management of borrowing costs. Andrew Canobi of Franklin Templeton described the dollar as the likely “relief valve” if policymakers try to keep term yields contained, while Deutsche Bank’s George Saravelos characterized the recent Treasury and FX actions as a form of soft financial repression. Citi subsequently turned bearish on the dollar in the near term, cutting its three-month DXY forecast to 98.34 and citing both lower yields and growing concern that Treasury activism could undermine confidence in the currency.

Commodities and Energy Markets

The commodities complex ended the week mostly higher, led by rising crude oil prices amid continued escalation in the Middle East.

Debt and Fixed Income Markets

According to CME data, the implied Fed funds rate curve over the next 18 months shifted higher by an average of 4 bp, leaving the implied policy rate for January 2028 around 8 bp above the prior week’s level.

The repricing was driven mainly by stronger-than-expected economic data, reinforcing the case for keeping policy restrictive and revived some probability of additional tightening. As a result, the implied chance of a September hike rose to 39.9% from 33.1% a week earlier, while the expected timing of the next full 25 bp increase continued to point to December. Expectations for an additional hike next summer also returned. In total, futures now imply around 26 bp of cumulative tightening by year-end 2026, up from 24 bp a week earlier.

The Treasury market was more complicated. The 1-year yield rose 5 bp to 4.01%, the 10-year increased 4 bp to 4.73%, and the 30-year edged up 1 bp to 5.27%. The small weekly moves mask a sharp midweek intervention by the Treasury, which unexpectedly announced that it would at least double buybacks of 10- to 30-year securities. The announcement initially pushed the 30-year yield down by as much as 10 bp, but most of that move was reversed within a day as investors questioned whether the program could materially change the forces driving long-term borrowing costs.

That skepticism is understandable because the pressure on long-term yields is coming from several different directions. As Luis Alvarado of Wells Fargo Investment Institute put it, the buybacks may provide only short-term relief while three larger issues remain unresolved: inflation, uncertainty over the monetary-policy outlook and very large fiscal deficits. The fiscal side is especially difficult to ignore after U.S. public debt surpassed $40 trillion and interest costs reached $1.17 trillion so far this fiscal year. JPMorgan also warned that the Treasury’s increasingly opportunistic approach to debt management could itself raise the term premium if investors conclude that the longstanding “regular and predictable” framework is weakening.

The episode therefore looked less like a successful attempt to reset long-term yields and more like a temporary interruption of the existing trend. Goldman Sachs argued that cooling inflation, rather than debt buybacks, remains the most credible route to sustainably lower yields, while the market’s rapid reversal after the announcement suggests investors reached a similar conclusion.

You can find more articles in our Telegram channel at https://t.me/atranicapital_eng

Average cash holdings fell to 3.5% of assets from 3.6% in July. This was the sixth-lowest reading since the survey began in 1998 and kept BofA’s contrarian Cash Rule on a “sell” signal, which is triggered at 4% or below. Cash allocation also moved to a net 2% underweight from neutral in July and a net 5% overweight in June. Low cash does not imply an immediate market decline, but it leaves managers with less liquidity to deploy during a correction and shows that much of their optimism is already reflected in portfolios.

BofA’s latest broader Bull & Bear Indicator offered the same warning. The gauge stood at 9.3, comfortably above the 8.0 sell threshold, although slightly below July’s 9.5. Neither signal predicts an immediate decline, but both point to an increasingly one-sided market: with cash already depleted and equity exposure near a five-year high, there may be fewer buyers available if the news disappoints.

The clearest sign of that conviction was the surge in global equity allocation to a net 56% overweight from 42% in July, the highest since November 2021 and the 14th consecutive month of overweight positioning. The combination of record-low cash and the strongest equity exposure in almost five years explains why BofA recommends rotating or reducing risk rather than adding more: investors may be right about the economic outlook, but positioning offers little protection if that outlook disappoints.

Yet managers reported taking only a net 4% more risk than normal relative to their benchmarks, down from 6% in July. This is less contradictory than it appears. The risk measure is benchmark-relative, so portfolios can remain close to increasingly equity-heavy benchmarks even as the whole market becomes more exposed to a reversal.

The economic outlook remained constructive but stopped improving. A net 14% expect stronger global growth over the next 12 months, down from 21% in July but well above June, when a net 1% expected weaker growth.

At the same time, a record 56% expect a “no landing,” up from 54% in July, while only 4% see a hard landing. With 90% expecting either no landing or a soft landing, economic resilience is now an overwhelming consensus rather than a potential source of positive surprise.

Confidence in corporate earnings strengthened even more. A net 37% expect global profits to grow by at least 10% over the coming year, the highest share since August 2021. Avoiding recession may therefore no longer be enough to support further gains: companies increasingly need to deliver the strong profit growth already embedded in investor expectations and positioning.

The survey’s economic scenarios reveal where the uncertainty has moved. Some 43% expect a “boom,” combining above-trend growth and inflation, while 49% choose stagflation, where inflation remains high and growth stays below trend. These answers may come from different respondents, but they share one assumption: inflation stays elevated. The main debate is no longer about recession, but whether growth can remain strong despite persistent price pressures.

Inflation expectations moved slightly higher after July’s abrupt improvement, with a net 3% now expecting global CPI to rise over the next year, compared with a net 4% expecting it to decline in July, although concerns remain far below June, when a net 45% anticipated higher inflation. Oil expectations also rebounded, with the average end-2026 forecast rising to $76 per barrel from $71.

Expectations for Fed policy became somewhat less dovish. Some 72% do not expect a rate increase before the November midterms, down from 83% in July, while 22% now expect a hike. Ahead of the Jackson Hole Economic Policy Symposium, 53% anticipate a neutral message from Fed Chair Kevin Warsh, compared with 31% expecting a hawkish tone and only 7% a dovish one. Managers still see no immediate tightening as the base case, but they are less confident about it than they were a month ago.

Politics presents another possible blind spot. Some 47% expect the midterms to produce a Democratic House and Republican Senate, while only 23% anticipate a Democratic sweep. At the time of survey, however, Kalshi and Polymarket put the probability of a sweep near 50%. That gap matters because 37% of fund managers believe such an outcome would push bond yields higher and stocks lower, potentially forcing portfolios to adjust before the vote if market probabilities continue to rise.

August’s allocation changes show where investors expressed their optimism. Managers added most heavily to energy, equities and commodities, while also rebuilding positions in technology and consumer stocks. They cut industrials and bonds.

After these moves, global equities, emerging markets and technology were the largest overweights, while bonds, UK equities and consumer staples remained the largest underweights. Managers are positioned for continued investment and revenue growth, but also for inflation and interest rates to stay relatively high.

U.S. equity allocation increased for a second consecutive month to a net 27% overweight from 24%, its highest since December 2024. Eurozone exposure rose to a net 6% overweight from 2%, while emerging markets increased to 34% from 32%. UK positioning improved slightly but remained deeply negative at a net 33% underweight, while Japan slipped to a net 1% overweight from 3%. Investors added to nearly every major region except Japan, suggesting that August’s increase in equity exposure was broad rather than confined entirely to the U.S.

The separate European survey was more bullish than these modest allocation changes suggest. Some 97% expect Europe to avoid recession, the highest share since 2007, while 47% expect regional equities to outperform the U.S. and 76% believe further gains will be driven by earnings upgrades. Managers forecast 7.4% EPS growth over the next year, indicating that the European case is shifting from cheap valuations toward better profits. Confidence remains conditional, however: a net 42% of European managers are overweight cash, 65% expect rates to stay higher for longer, and energy prices are seen as the main swing factor for both growth and inflation.

Asia showed a much sharper divide. Taiwan and Japan remained the preferred markets, reflecting their exposure to AI and advanced manufacturing, while India became the least favored at a net 32% underweight because of limited direct AI exposure, weaker growth, slow reforms and high valuations. That pessimism persists despite more than $4 billion of foreign inflows this quarter and 18% earnings growth among Nifty 50 companies. Indonesia improved to a net 27% underweight after its market rallied more than 20% from its June low. The regional ranking suggests that investors currently value direct participation in the AI cycle more highly than improving earnings alone.

Bonds moved in the opposite direction. Allocation deteriorated to a net 39% underweight from 34% in July, even as a disorderly increase in yields became a much more prominent concern. Commodity exposure rose to a net 24% overweight from 11%, nearly returning to June’s 25%, while real estate improved sharply to a net 7% underweight from 17%. The bond underweight offers some direct protection against rising yields, but the broader portfolio remains vulnerable through its heavy equity exposure and renewed move into rate-sensitive real estate. BofA consequently identifies long bonds against short commodities as one of the main contrarian trades implied by the survey.

Consumer positioning also improved substantially, although it remained defensive in absolute terms. Consumer discretionary moved to a net 12% underweight from 22%, while staples improved to a net 19% underweight from 32%. Combined consumer exposure therefore recovered from July’s extreme low but was still its weakest since February 2026. Managers are mainly covering extreme underweights rather than expressing confidence in household demand; their portfolios remain centered more heavily on corporate investment, technology and commodities.

Style preferences show that the move into equities was selective rather than indiscriminate. A net 71% expect high-quality earnings to outperform, up from 56% in July, while preferences for value and high-dividend stocks strengthened sharply. Managers still want equity exposure, but increasingly prefer companies with dependable profits, stronger balance sheets and cash returns rather than relying solely on momentum.

Long global semiconductors remained the most crowded trade, although the share identifying it fell sharply to 53% from July’s record 82%. Short the Japanese yen ranked second at 12%, followed by long Magnificent Seven stocks at 11%. The decline suggests that the recent semiconductor correction reduced crowding anxiety without undermining the AI thesis.

Confidence in AI spending strengthened further. Some 71% do not expect a major hyperscaler to cut capex in 2026, up from 61% in July, while only 21% anticipate a reduction. Another 58% do not expect AI to disrupt labor markets before 2028. Investors may worry about valuations, but they still expect the infrastructure cycle to continue and its wider economic effects to emerge gradually.

That confidence coexists with growing concern about financial stability. An AI bubble remained the leading tail risk for a second month, although the share citing it declined to 32% from 45%. A disorderly rise in bond yields followed closely at 27%, with a second inflation wave at 25%. The risk landscape is therefore becoming broader: AI still leads, but rates and inflation are now almost equally important.

The five largest hyperscalers are expected to spend about $2.3 trillion over the next two years, in addition to more than $800 billion this year, after borrowing roughly $250 billion globally during the past 12 months. That helps explain why 38% identify hyperscaler capex as the most likely source of a systemic credit event, ahead of private credit and government debt. The same investment cycle is supporting semiconductor demand today while increasing leverage and refinancing risk for the future.

A net 19% now describe corporate balance sheets as excessively leveraged, up from 7% in July and the highest since March 2023. Yet only 22% want companies to devote more free cash flow to capex. Managers expect hyperscalers to keep spending, but few believe companies generally should invest more. They are willing to own the beneficiaries of the AI boom while questioning whether its current scale is the best use of corporate capital.

Gold stands apart from the survey’s crowded risk positions. A net 16% regard it as undervalued, the most favorable assessment since March 2023. That shift follows a roughly 20% decline from January’s peak, although gold remains about 125% higher over three years. Sentiment has reset after the correction, but the reading measures perceived value rather than evidence of renewed institutional buying.

Overall, investors are positioned for a resilient economy, strong earnings and continued AI spending, with little cash set aside for setbacks. Yet the assumptions supporting that stance have become harder to reconcile: oil is trading above managers’ forecasts, inflation remains central to both the boom and stagflation scenarios, and AI investment is supporting earnings while adding leverage. The survey remains bullish, but the margin for error has narrowed.

You can find more articles in our Telegram channel at https://t.me/atranicapital_eng

The difference consists mainly of $1.2 trillion in leases for facilities that have not begun operating and $1.9 trillion of commitments to purchase chips, equipment, energy and other services. Alphabet alone disclosed $811 billion of purchase and contractual obligations, up from $332 billion three months earlier. Meta reported $347 billion of future lease commitments.

J.P. Morgan Asset Management estimates that the full data-center buildout, including developers and semiconductor investment, could cost roughly $5 trillion through 2030, with about $2 trillion financed in investment-grade credit markets. The estimates use different scopes and should not be added together, but both show that the financing cycle is far larger than current capex figures imply.

These amounts are not current debt and will be paid over many years. However, they are generally difficult to cancel and become financial liabilities as equipment is delivered and leases commence. Today’s commitments will therefore become tomorrow’s cash payments. If AI revenue disappoints, companies could still be paying for infrastructure that no longer earns adequate returns.

That transition has begun. Alphabet and Amazon recently reported negative free cash flow, while technology companies have become frequent issuers of bonds. Nomura estimates that the largest tech groups have borrowed roughly $200 billion this year, equivalent to about 25% of the US Treasury’s net issuance of notes and bonds to private investors and five times their share in 2025.

The acceleration is striking. J.P. Morgan calculates that hyperscaler bond issuance rose from $17 billion in 2024 to $109 billion in 2025 and reached $194 billion in the first half of 2026. It expects $279 billion for the full year and another $220–$300 billion in 2027. At that pace, the group could approach 10% of the US investment-grade market by 2030.

More bond supply requires a higher yield when investor demand does not rise equally fast. Investors buying highly rated technology bonds may fund some of those purchases by reducing Treasury holdings. Alphabet’s recent 30-year debt yielded almost 6.4%, approximately 115 bp above comparable government bonds. Meanwhile, a $12.5 billion bond issued to finance a Meta-linked data center yielded 7.53%, with a spread of 287.5 bp over Treasuries—the widest for an A-rated or better bond in three years and roughly 200 bp wider than comparable debt. Barclays expects net corporate-bond issuance to increase by $474 billion this year, much of it because of Big Tech.

The widening is becoming visible in broader credit indices. The additional yield on AAA US corporate bonds over Treasuries increased from 32 bp in May to 41 bp in August, while the AA premium rose from 47 bp to 58 bp. Spreads for lower-rated A and BBB debt moved much less. This pattern is consistent with the market absorbing an unusually large volume of highly rated technology bonds, although it does not prove that AI issuance was the only cause.

A hyperscaler-specific comparison provides clearer evidence. Penn Mutual Asset Management estimates that bonds from Microsoft, Amazon, Alphabet, Meta and Oracle traded about 20–25 bp wider than the broad investment-grade index in early 2025. The gap reached almost 50 bp during the first half of 2026 and remained around 35 bp in July. Their wider spreads reflect relentless supply and the expectation that another large deal may soon follow.

Investors are also distinguishing between individual borrowers. Bloomberg’s Nir Kaissar notes that Meta and Oracle bonds offer roughly half a percentage point more than comparable debt. The companies are still viewed as reliable borrowers, but investors want greater compensation for their large leases, financing commitments and AI spending relative to internally generated cash.

The reported debt can also understate the economic exposure. In February, Moody’s warns that lease accounting may omit the cost of renewing a data-center lease or compensating investors if a company walks away and the facility loses value. Meta could face up to $28 billion under one residual-value guarantee, although no liability has been recorded because payment is not currently considered probable. Rating agencies may therefore treat part of these structures as debt even when accounting statements do not.

Moving a project outside the corporate balance sheet does not eliminate its risk; it redistributes it. The $14 billion Meta–BlackRock data center in Texas reportedly lacks insurance against a complete loss because full coverage has become prohibitively expensive. S&P rated the project’s debt A+, slightly below Meta’s corporate rating, partly because lenders lack a direct claim on the physical assets and the lease contains cancellation provisions. In effect, lenders are relying more on the durability of Meta’s lease payments than on the resale value of the facility itself.

The pressure is spreading overseas as hyperscalers issue debt in Canadian dollars, Swiss francs and sterling. Amazon has sold C$14 billion of Canadian bonds this year, while Alphabet completed a rare 100-year sterling issue. In smaller markets, these transactions can widen spreads and crowd other companies out of long-term financing. Hyperscaler earnings have consequently become important events for bond desks: a larger capex forecast can imply another wave of issuance.

The physical consequences are similarly large. A Financial Times analysis of 60 major US data centers planned by Amazon, Microsoft, Alphabet and Meta estimated that they could generate 101.5 million metric tons of annual carbon emissions once fully operational, based on the current regional electricity mix. That is equivalent to about 7% of 2025 US power-sector emissions, 27 coal plants or 24 million gasoline-powered cars.

Three-quarters of the utilities serving these projects are planning or constructing additional gas-fired generation, while one-third of those operating coal plants are delaying retirements. Big Tech continues to contract renewable and nuclear power, but data centers require uninterrupted electricity and are being built faster than clean generation and transmission networks can expand.

The electricity requirement explains why the emissions estimate is so large. The International Energy Agency expects worldwide data-center consumption to more than double by 2030 to approximately 945 TWh, slightly more than Japan uses today. In the US, data centers could account for almost half of total electricity-demand growth and consume more power than the production of aluminum, steel, cement and chemicals combined.

The problem is not only the quantity of electricity but its timing. The US Energy Information Administration assumes that server demand remains almost constant throughout the day. Unlike some industrial users, data centers cannot simply stop operating when renewable output falls. This helps explain why utilities are adding gas generation even as hyperscalers sign large renewable and nuclear contracts.

The pressure is already visible in corporate climate disclosures. Amazon’s emissions increased 16% from 2024 to 2025, Microsoft’s rose 25% and Alphabet’s adjusted measure increased 18%, with the companies linking much of the rise to data-center construction and their supply chains.

The AI bill is no longer confined to Big Tech’s income statements: it is moving into bond portfolios, private credit, power grids and emissions.

You can find more articles in our Telegram channel at https://t.me/atranicapital_eng

U.S. equities were little changed at the headline level, but the underlying market was stronger than the major indexes suggested. The S&P 500 gained 0.4% and the Nasdaq 0.1%, while the Magnificent 7 lost 1.2% and the Dow fell 0.6%. Beneath the surface, however, breadth improved: large-cap value rose 1.0%, mid- and small-cap stocks gained around 1%, and the share of S&P 500 companies trading above their 200-day moving average reached its highest level since early December. Weakness was concentrated in several megacaps and selected consumer and healthcare names, while gains spread across financials, industrials, software and other parts of the market.

Strong earnings remain the main foundation. Bloomberg Intelligence estimates that S&P 500 profits are tracking about 31% above year-earlier levels, versus 23% expected before earnings season, with more than 90% of companies having reported. Margins are approaching 16%, helped by stronger productivity and early evidence that AI investment is beginning to lift profits rather than simply raise costs. 22V Research estimates AI-related productivity has added roughly 150 bp to margins. Importantly, strength extends beyond the megacaps, with positive earnings growth across almost every sector and unusually strong beat rates among mid- and small-cap companies. JPMorgan and Ed Yardeni responded by lifting their S&P 500 targets to 8,000 and 8,400, respectively.

The macro backdrop also became less threatening. Softer inflation and retail-sales data reduced expectations for a near-term Fed hike, while the lack of progress on reopening the Strait of Hormuz had little lasting impact on risk appetite. Volatility fell further, with the VIX near its lowest level since early 2026. At the same time, options markets showed unusually strong demand for upside exposure. Citadel Securities reported heavy call buying across at least 170 S&P 500 stocks, activity Steve Sosnick of Interactive Brokers described as “FOMO insurance” — investors reluctant to chase the market outright but equally reluctant to miss further gains.

Global equities also advanced, with the global ex-U.S. index up 0.6%. Asian technology markets led, with South Korea gaining 8.2% and Taiwan 3.9% as enthusiasm around AI hardware and memory demand revived. Japan rose 1.4% and broader emerging markets gained 1.5%. China moved the other way, falling 3.4%, while Brazil dropped another 4.0% as election and fiscal uncertainty triggered heavy foreign selling. Bloomberg reported more than 13.5 billion reais ($2.6 billion) of foreign equity outflows from Brazil through Wednesday.

Crypto underperformed other risk assets. Bitcoin fell 2.9% and total market capitalization declined 2.0%, pressured by fading optimism around the CLARITY Act, another regulatory delay from the SEC, and $385 million of weekly outflows from U.S. spot Bitcoin ETFs. The market is increasingly pricing slower progress on U.S. crypto legislation rather than an imminent regulatory breakthrough.

Rates markets became modestly less hawkish. CME data show the implied Fed funds curve shifted about 4 bp lower over the next 18 months as softer inflation and demand data reduced the urgency for another hike. The probability of a September increase fell to 33.1% from 44.4%, and markets pushed the likely timing of the next move from October to December. Futures now imply about 24 bp of cumulative tightening by year-end 2026, down from 30 bp a week earlier.

Treasuries, however, sent a more mixed signal. The 1-year yield fell 3 bp to 3.96%, reflecting reduced expectations for near-term tightening, while the 10-year rose 4 bp to 4.69% and the 30-year climbed 6 bp to 5.26%. The divergence suggests investors are less worried about an immediate Fed hike but still demand greater compensation for holding long-dated debt. Persistent fiscal deficits and heavy bond supply remain key concerns, helping keep the yield curve steep even as the expected policy path moves lower.

For comprehensive insights and deeper context, please refer to the full article.

Subscribe now

US Stock Market

U.S. equities were little changed at the headline level, but the underlying market was stronger than the major indexes suggested. The S&P 500 gained 0.4% and the Nasdaq 0.1%, while the Magnificent 7 lost 1.2% and the Dow fell 0.6%. Beneath the surface, however, most style segments advanced: large-cap value rose 1.0%, while mid- and small-cap stocks were also up around 1%. Weakness was concentrated in several megacaps and selected consumer and healthcare names, while gains were spread across financials, industrials, software and other parts of the market. The share of S&P 500 stocks trading above their 200-day moving average also rose to its highest level since early December. Together, these developments point to a continued broadening of the rally.

Strong earnings provided an important foundation. According to Bloomberg Intelligence, S&P 500 earnings are now tracking about 31% above year-earlier levels, versus 23% expected before the season, with more than 90% of companies having reported. Profit margins are approaching 16%, helped by stronger productivity and the first visible signs that AI investment is becoming a profit driver rather than only a cost. 22V Research estimates that AI-related productivity has added about 150 bp to margins. Importantly, the strength extends beyond mega-caps: earnings gains were positive in almost every sector, while mid- and small-cap beat rates are near record highs outside the post-pandemic period. That has prompted further target upgrades from strategists, with JPMorgan lifting its S&P 500 target to 8,000 and Ed Yardeni to 8,400.

At the same time, the macro backdrop became less threatening. Softer inflation and retail data reduced expectations for a near-term Fed hike, while the lack of progress on reopening the Strait of Hormuz had little lasting market impact. Volatility fell further, with the VIX near its lowest level since early 2026. Options markets also showed increasingly aggressive demand for upside exposure, with Citadel Securities reporting unusually strong call demand across at least 170 S&P 500 stocks. Steve Sosnick of Interactive Brokers described the activity as “FOMO insurance” — investors reluctant to chase stocks outright but unwilling to miss further gains.

Sector performance was broadly positive over the week, with nine of eleven sectors posting gains and only Consumer Discretionary and Materials finishing lower. Energy was the clear leader, surging 7.7% as crude prices rebounded sharply: Brent gained almost 6% over the week amid faltering U.S.–Iran peace talks and renewed threats of tighter pressure on Tehran, lifting Exxon (+4.6% w/w), Chevron (+7.2%) and ConocoPhillips (+7.8%). Technology added 1.1%, but performance beneath the surface was mixed. Micron (+10.7%), AMD (+6.4%) and storage-related names rallied strongly, with Sandisk jumping roughly 35% after its investor day outlined ambitious long-term growth and profitability targets and highlighted strong demand for NAND and AI-related storage. Communication Services rose 1.5%, while Financials, Health Care, Utilities and Consumer Staples also posted gains. Consumer Discretionary fell 1.4%, weighed down by Amazon (-4.3%) and Home Depot (-4.7%) despite Tesla’s 4.2% advance, while Materials slipped modestly. Overall, sector breadth was healthy, with the strongest leadership shifting toward Energy and selected semiconductor and memory names rather than being concentrated solely in the largest technology stocks.

The Fear & Greed Index edged up to 65 from 64, remaining in Greed. The composition improved in some important areas: market breadth strengthened from Fear to Greed, while safe-haven demand moved from Greed to Extreme Greed as stocks continued to outperform bonds. Junk-bond demand also remained in Extreme Greed, pointing to strong risk appetite in credit. At the same time, market momentum eased from Extreme Greed to Greed and options positioning also cooled from Extreme Greed to Greed, while stock-price strength stayed in Fear and volatility remained Neutral. Overall, sentiment became slightly more constructive and participation broadened, but the market was still not uniformly strong across individual stocks.

SPY consolidated just below 780 after its sharp breakout, with shallow daily moves suggesting investors are holding positions rather than rushing to take profits. The ETF remains well above its rising 20-, 50-, 100- and 200-day moving averages, keeping the trend clearly upward. RSI is steady near 66, indicating strong demand but also less room for the rally to accelerate before becoming overheated. A close above 780 would strengthen the move into record territory, while 770 is the first level to watch on any retreat, followed by the former breakout zone around 758–760 and the 20-day average near 756.

The earnings season is gaining momentum. According to LSEG I/B/E/S, 453 companies in the S&P 500—representing 90.6% of the index—have reported Q2 2026 results so far, up from 87.2% a week earlier. Of these, 84.8% have exceeded analysts’ EPS expectations, slightly down from 85.1% the previous week and still above both the long-term average of 67.5% and the four-quarter average of 80%. Reported earnings are running 8.4% above estimates in aggregate, unchanged w/w and above both the long-term average surprise of 4.4% and the recent four-quarter average of 7.5%.

Against this backdrop, consensus expectations for S&P 500 Q2 EPS growth were once again revised higher to 51.6% y/y, or 47.7% excluding the Energy sector, from 51.1% and 47.2%, respectively, a week earlier.

In the upcoming week beginning August 17, 12 S&P 500 companies are scheduled to report. Market attention will be particularly focused on the following high-profile earnings releases:

Global Markets

Globally, country ETFs posted mixed performance, with the global ex-U.S. equity index gaining 0.6% for the week. The advance was led by Asian technology markets, particularly South Korea (+8.2%) and Taiwan (+3.9%), as enthusiasm around the AI hardware cycle revived following strong Big Tech spending and an improving outlook for memory demand. South Korea’s rebound was especially strong, with Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix leading gains as the Kospi continued to recover from July’s sharp selloff. Japan also advanced 1.4%, while broader emerging markets gained 1.5%.

Elsewhere, performance was notably weaker. European equities were broadly flat, while China fell 3.4%. Brazil declined another 4.0%, extending the previous week’s losses as October election uncertainty and concerns over fiscal policy triggered heavy foreign selling. According to Bloomberg, foreign investors withdrew more than 13.5 billion reais ($2.6 billion) from Brazilian equities through Wednesday.

ACWX extended its advance and held close to 78, keeping the recent breakout intact and the price comfortably above its rising 20-, 50-, 100- and 200-day moving averages. RSI remained firm near 63, pointing to healthy demand without the market looking excessively stretched. The ETF has paused around 78, making that level the main near-term hurdle; clearing it could open room toward 80–80.5. If momentum fades, the former June high near 77 should offer the first cushion, followed by the closely grouped 20- and 50-day averages around 75.5–76.

Cryptocurrency Market

Crypto assets underperformed most other risk assets last week, with Bitcoin falling 2.9% while total market capitalization declined 2.0%. The weakness reflected a combination of fading regulatory optimism and renewed institutional outflows. Galaxy Digital cut its estimate of the CLARITY Act’s chances of passing in 2026 to just 10%, citing unresolved disputes over ethics rules, stablecoin yield and developer protections, as well as the very narrow Senate window when lawmakers return in September. The regulatory setback was compounded when the SEC postponed a meeting where it had been expected to unveil new crypto rules, extending the sense that near-term policy progress was losing momentum even as the agency continues working on alternative regulatory measures. Additional pressure came from U.S. spot Bitcoin ETF redemptions of $385 million over the week. At the same time, confidence in self-custody was shaken by the Coldcard exploit, which Galaxy Research said had resulted in at least 1,778 BTC being stolen and pushed exchange balances to a record high as some holders moved coins off hardware wallets.

Economic Indicators, Statistics and News

Several important macroeconomic indicators and economic news were published during the week:

Global

Negotiations over the Strait of Hormuz remained deadlocked despite repeated claims that an agreement was close. Iran and Oman were discussing a temporary maritime transit route, while Pakistan and Qatar were also acting as intermediaries, but Tehran stressed that such an arrangement would not automatically mean a full reopening of the strait. Iranian conditions included compensation for alleged US violations of the June agreement, an end to the US naval blockade, withdrawal of US forces from around Iran, removal of sanctions, release of frozen Iranian assets and, in some formulations, an end to attacks on Iran-backed groups elsewhere in the region. Washington rejected Iranian restrictions on navigation or tolling and also sought removal of mines and guarantees that commercial vessels would not be attacked. The strategic gap therefore remained wide: Iran viewed implementation of US concessions as a prerequisite for broader negotiations, while Washington wanted unrestricted commercial passage first. Before the war, roughly one-fifth of global oil and LNG flows passed through Hormuz; by mid-August, normal shipping had not resumed, with only 13 vessels crossing on one Thursday versus more than 130 per day before the conflict, while July had averaged about 26 vessels per day.

US policy shifted toward sustained economic coercion rather than an immediate expansion of military operations. The administration argued that sanctions, the naval blockade and lower oil prices could weaken Tehran enough to produce concessions while reducing the need for further strikes. Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent said additional measures would be announced and described them as an unusually broad effort at economic isolation, although the articles did not specify the final measures. The US had already imposed about 2,200 sanctions designations on Iran since 2018, including roughly 350 under Bessent’s “Economic Fury” campaign. Further escalation could involve secondary sanctions on buyers or financial institutions linked to Iranian oil, but China accounted for more than 90% of Iran’s oil exports, making stronger action against Chinese banks or refiners potentially costly for US-China relations and global energy markets. The policy therefore combines a tougher economic campaign with uncertainty over how much additional pressure can be imposed after decades of sanctions without generating wider financial and diplomatic consequences.

Iran’s domestic economy showed severe wartime stress, which Washington increasingly viewed as its main source of leverage. Central-bank data cited by Bloomberg put year-on-year inflation at about 77%, while the rial had fallen by more than 10% from its prewar level. Much of the country’s industrial capacity had been damaged and access to foreign exchange and energy supplies had tightened. Iran was responding by moving toward what the WSJ described as a survival-oriented economic model, including fuel and electricity rationing, tighter control of scarce foreign currency, lower investment and protection of essential imports and state resources. One estimate cited by the WSJ put Iran’s gasoline supply deficit at about 29 million liters per day. These pressures are substantial, but Iran has already experienced decades of sanctions without making fundamental concessions on its nuclear program or regional policies, leaving the political effectiveness of additional economic pressure uncertain.

Iranian crude exports were being directly constrained by the US blockade. Satellite imagery showed no supertankers at Kharg Island, Iran’s main oil export terminal, across six observations during the first nine days of August, compared with 7–10 supertankers calling there in July; only two smaller vessels were observed at Jask and Soroosh during the August period. During the temporary ceasefire after the June 17 agreement, Iran managed to export about 57 million barrels, but activity slowed sharply after the blockade resumed. Separate Kpler data cited by the WSJ estimated Iranian exports at only about 47,000 barrels per day in one recent week, roughly half the previous week’s level, while another estimate cited in the WSJ put exports close to zero compared with about 2 million barrels per day before the April blockade. Because tankers increasingly operate with transponders switched off, however, all estimates carry significant uncertainty.

The wider global oil balance tightened considerably as the war restricted Middle Eastern production and transport. The IEA estimated a global supply deficit of about 1.8 million barrels per day in the current quarter, more than twice its earlier projection, and expected the 2026 deficit to be the largest in five years. At the same time, high fuel prices were weakening consumption: the IEA projected global oil demand to decline by about 1.6 million barrels per day in 2026, the largest annual-average contraction since the 2020 pandemic. Inventories were consequently falling rapidly despite weaker demand; the WSJ reported that global stocks had dropped by more than 400 million barrels over six months. Alternative pipelines and shuttle-tanker arrangements through Hormuz have limited the disruption, but they have not restored normal trade flows or rebuilt the market’s depleted buffer against additional shocks.

US energy forecasts suggested that the physical effects of the conflict could persist well beyond 2026. The EIA estimated that war-related supply disruptions would remain around 600,000 barrels per day through the end of 2027. Oil moving through Hormuz averaged only 4.9 million barrels per day in Q2 2026, compared with 21.6 million barrels per day in Q4 2025 before the war. Middle Eastern production shut-ins declined from about 7.5 million barrels per day in June to 5.5 million in July, but were expected to rise again to around 6.6 million barrels per day in Q3. Assuming no additional production losses from threats around Bab el-Mandeb, the EIA expected most regional production and trade flows to recover to prewar levels only by early 2027. It also raised its 2026 gasoline and diesel price forecasts by 3.7% and 5.4%, respectively, and increased its 2027 retail gasoline forecast by 6.5% from the previous month, highlighting the conflict’s continuing inflation risk.

The Gulf states were increasingly treating Iranian influence over Hormuz as a longer-term structural energy-security problem rather than a temporary wartime disruption. Kpler data showed crude exports through the strait falling to about 2.2 million barrels per day, from roughly 8.5 million a month earlier, versus around 20 million barrels per day of oil and petroleum products before the conflict. Gulf producers were expanding pipelines toward the Red Sea and Gulf of Oman, increasing storage and using ships with tracking systems switched off, but alternative routes were themselves vulnerable: Saudi Red Sea facilities and Egyptian energy infrastructure had also been attacked. Between Feb. 28 and July 30, Iran and allied Iraqi militias carried out at least 172 attacks on nonmilitary infrastructure across the six Gulf Arab states, with energy, power and desalination facilities accounting for roughly half. The emerging regional view was therefore that partial accommodation with Iran over Hormuz may be economically less damaging than another broad military escalation, even if it leaves Tehran with greater influence over trade routes.

Iran simultaneously adopted a more aggressive military posture, reducing the likelihood that economic pressure alone would produce a rapid settlement. Senior appointments strengthened hard-line IRGC figures, including Mohsen Rezaee at the Supreme National Security Council, while Iranian officials described a transition from a predominantly defensive doctrine toward an “offensive” approach capable of conducting operations beyond Iran’s territory. The military’s operational headquarters was being integrated more closely with the General Staff to accelerate decision-making and battlefield-data processing, and an IRGC adviser said ballistic-missile production remained substantially above the rate of use. Combined with continued attacks on commercial vessels, the changes suggested that Tehran was preparing for a prolonged confrontation even if the current phase of fighting subsided.

The separate Gaza diplomacy also hardened during the period. Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu rejected a 15-point US-backed roadmap that linked the verified disarmament of Hamas to staged Israeli withdrawals from Gaza, saying the IDF would not withdraw until Hamas had genuinely disarmed. Hamas had offered conditional acceptance, including transferring heavy weapons to a new Gaza administration while linking implementation to Israeli withdrawals and eventual Palestinian statehood. The mediation framework envisaged Israeli forces moving back progressively as sectors were demilitarized, while dismantling Hamas’s tunnel network could take years. With around 2 million Palestinians concentrated in the remaining Hamas-controlled area and little progress since the initial ceasefire phase, the disagreement over sequencing—Hamas disarmament versus Israeli withdrawal—remained the central obstacle to implementation.

US

US consumer inflation moderated for a second month in July, but remained above the Fed’s target. Headline CPI increased 0.1% month on month and 3.4% year on year, down from 3.5% in June and 4.2% in May. Core CPI rose 0.2% during the month and slowed from 2.6% to 2.5% annually, matching its lowest rate since March 2021. Energy prices declined 1.5%, including a 2.9% drop in gasoline, although energy was still 14.7% more expensive than a year earlier. Grocery prices decreased 0.1%, helped by a 16.4% fall in lettuce, while restaurant prices rose 0.3%. Shelter increased only 0.1%, as rent and owners’ equivalent rent each advanced 0.3% but accommodation away from home fell 2.8%. Core services excluding energy and rents rose a moderate 0.2%, whereas non-food, non-energy goods rebounded after two monthly declines.

Alternative measures confirmed modest progress: the Cleveland Fed’s median CPI eased from 2.71% to 2.69%, its trimmed-mean measure fell from 2.63% to 2.60%, and the Atlanta Fed’s sticky-price index declined from 2.84% to 2.76%. These underlying gauges nevertheless remained above 2.5%, indicating that disinflation had resumed without yet restoring price stability.

Producer inflation also weakened in July, largely because the earlier energy shock continued to unwind. Final-demand PPI was unchanged from June, while its annual rate dropped from 5.5% to 4.7%. Excluding food and energy, prices rose 0.2% month on month and 4.2% year on year; the broader measure excluding food, energy and trade services increased 0.4% during the month and 4.7% annually. Final-demand goods prices fell 0.7%, reflecting declines of 3.1% in energy and 0.9% in food, including a 5.7% reduction in gasoline. Services prices rose 0.2%, as a 6.5% increase in portfolio-management fees and higher retail margins in several categories offset a 1.8% fall in transportation and warehousing costs. Construction prices advanced 2.2%. Earlier-stage inflation also softened, with processed intermediate goods down 0.6%, unprocessed goods down 1.8% and crude petroleum falling 11.9%. However, AI-related supply pressure remained visible: electronic components and accessories were nearly 28% more expensive than a year earlier, while computer and computer-equipment prices rose a record 9.8%.

Real earnings showed that weaker inflation had not yet produced a meaningful improvement in household purchasing power. Real average hourly earnings for private-sector employees declined 0.1% in July and 0.2% from a year earlier, while real weekly earnings were unchanged during the month and increased only 0.1% annually because the average workweek was 0.3% longer than in July 2025. Among production and nonsupervisory workers, real hourly earnings were unchanged month on month and down 0.1% annually, while real weekly earnings rose 0.1% during July and 0.2% over the year. The Atlanta Fed’s Wage Growth Tracker moved in the opposite direction, rising from 3.6% to 3.8%, but this did not establish a broader wage-price spiral: nominal average hourly earnings in the BLS series increased 3.2% annually, below headline consumer inflation.

The July CPI and PPI reports reduced the urgency of a September rate increase but did not establish a case for easing. Core CPI reached a five-year low, producer energy and transportation costs declined, and the alternative underlying inflation measures moved lower, giving the Fed more scope to consider the recent deterioration in payroll growth. At the same time, headline CPI remained above 3%, core and alternative measures stayed above the 2% objective, and rising prices for technology products and selected services showed that inflation had not become uniformly weak. Economists at Citigroup, Morgan Stanley and Jefferies projected that July core PCE would rise 0.2% when released on August 26. JPMorgan Asset Management’s David Kelly expects the Fed to remain on hold because tariffs, oil and wages should become less inflationary over time, while other analysts cited by the FT continued to see a possible 2026 hike if energy prices rebound or inflation stops improving. The combined evidence therefore supports patience in September while leaving tightening, rather than rate cuts, as the principal policy risk if disinflation loses momentum.

US retail sales fell 0.6% month on month in July to $763.6 billion, the largest decline since May 2025, although sales remained 5.0% above their year-earlier level. Spending excluding automobiles and gasoline decreased 0.2%, while the control group used in estimating GDP goods consumption fell 0.4%, its weakest result since early 2025. Five of the report’s 13 categories declined, led by decreases of 2.2% at nonstore retailers and 1.8% at motor-vehicle dealers, whereas restaurant and bar receipts rose 0.5%. Some of the weakness probably reflected Amazon Prime Day shifting from July in 2025 to June in 2026 rather than a broad retrenchment. Bank of America card data offered a similar picture: spending growth slowed to 5.0% year on year from 6.3% in June but remained firm at 4.3% excluding gasoline.

US consumer sentiment weakened broadly in August as inflation and future business conditions became greater concerns. The University of Michigan’s preliminary index dropped to 51.0 from 55.2, below the 55.0 consensus forecast, as expectations for short- and long-term business conditions fell 11% and 17%, respectively. Only 8% of consumers expected their incomes to grow faster than prices over the next year, down from 18% in December 2024. One-year inflation expectations increased to 4.3% from 4.2%, while the five-to-ten-year measure remained at 3.3%. The LSEG/Ipsos index confirmed the deterioration, declining 1.6 points to 49.4 and standing 4 points below August 2025. Its current-conditions and expectations measures fell to 39.2 and 56.1, while the jobs index was broadly unchanged at 63.3, indicating that purchasing power and the economic outlook were larger concerns than immediate employment security.

In contrast, US small-business confidence strengthened in July despite continued uncertainty over inflation and the Middle East conflict. The NFIB Optimism Index rose 2.4 points to 99.8, its highest level since August 2025 and above its long-term average of 98.0, with eight of its ten components improving. A net 20% of firms planned to add workers, up 9 percentage points and the strongest result since October 2022, while 36% reported vacancies they could not fill. Capital-spending plans increased to a net 25%, the highest since December 2024, and 54% of firms had made capital outlays during the previous six months. Pricing pressure nevertheless remained elevated: the net share raising selling prices declined 7 points to 31%, while 28% planned increases and 14% identified inflation as their most important problem.

US household finances continued to support spending, although the strength was unevenly distributed. Bank of America data showed July spending growth of 5.4% among lower-income households and 4.9% among middle-income households, supported by respective after-tax wage gains of 5.2% and 4.2%. More households across all income groups were paying their credit-card balances in full, and the report found little evidence of accelerated withdrawals from savings. The top 5% of earners remained an exception to the broader convergence in consumption, with rising equity wealth supporting spending even as their wage growth softened; the S&P 500 was up about 20% year on year in July. At the same time, mortgage rates near 6.7%, gasoline above $4 per gallon and the exhaustion of the earlier boost from tax refunds created a less supportive environment for households without substantial financial assets.

US affordability concerns have become an important political issue ahead of the midterm elections despite low unemployment, resilient consumption and improving manufacturing activity. Inflation has remained above 3% since the Iran war began, while elevated gasoline, electricity, food and housing costs have limited the political benefit from economic growth and stock-market gains. The Silver Bulletin’s August polling average showed presidential approval at 38.3% against 58.3% disapproval, with net approval of the administration’s handling of inflation at -42.4%. A separate Economist/YouGov poll found that 31% of respondents considered inflation and prices the country’s most important issue, well ahead of jobs and the economy. Proposed additional tax reductions, including changes affecting capital gains, may strengthen the administration’s economic platform, but their benefits would be concentrated among wealthier households and would not directly resolve the broader pressure on purchasing power.

Eurozone

Eurozone GDP expanded 0.4% quarter on quarter in Q2, confirming Eurostat’s initial estimate and following no growth in Q1. Annual growth accelerated from 0.5% to 1.0%, indicating that the economy absorbed the Middle East energy shock better than expected. Spain led the major economies with quarterly growth of 0.7%, while Germany, France and Italy each expanded 0.2%. Ireland rebounded 3.9% after contracting 7.0% in Q1, although its output remained 5.6% below the previous year’s level. A full expenditure breakdown was not yet available, but national data led Capital Economics to infer that household consumption increased despite weaker real incomes, potentially because consumers reduced saving.

Eurozone employment increased 0.1% quarter on quarter in Q2, matching its first-quarter pace, and was 0.5% higher than a year earlier. Since GDP grew faster than employment, output per worker appears to have improved during the quarter. Capital Economics estimated productivity growth at approximately 0.3% and indicated that this positive trend continued at the beginning of Q3.

The stronger Q2 performance prompted economists surveyed by Bloomberg to raise their eurozone growth forecast for 2026 from 0.5% to 0.8%. The revision largely incorporated the second-quarter surprise rather than a stronger immediate outlook, as respondents continued to expect GDP growth of 0.2% in Q3, followed by a gradual acceleration. Germany’s 2026 forecast increased from 0.6% to 0.8%, with defense spending and structural reforms expected to support eurozone activity over the medium term. Potential progress toward ending the Middle East conflict and reopening the Strait of Hormuz could improve confidence, while energy risks, restructuring among European automakers, wildfires and low water levels on the Rhine and Danube remain constraints.

UK

UK GDP expanded 0.4% quarter on quarter in the second quarter, following growth of 0.6% in the first three months of 2026. Output rose 0.3% in June, compared with expectations for a 0.1% decline, after stagnating in May and contracting 0.1% in April. Services provided most of the momentum, growing 0.5% over the quarter and 0.4% in June, whereas monthly production and construction fell 0.2% and 0.1%, respectively. Information and communication output increased 2.7% during the quarter, including a 3.7% rise in computer programming and related activities. Household consumption and a 1.7% increase in business investment also supported GDP, while government expenditure and trade were drags. Warm weather and the World Cup provided temporary demand for retail, accommodation, hospitality and media services, helping the economy expand 1.0% over the first half of the year.

The UK growth outlook is weaker than the first-half performance suggests because higher energy costs, tighter financial conditions and policy uncertainty have yet to affect activity fully. If disruption to the Strait of Hormuz persists through the end of 2026, internal Treasury modeling indicates GDP growth of 0.9% in 2026 and only 0.3% in 2027, compared with the OBR’s March forecasts of 1.1% and 1.6%, respectively. The BOE’s adverse scenario is less severe, projecting growth of 1.1% this year and 0.9% next year, while Bloomberg Economics estimates expansion of 0.6% and 0.7%, including a mild recession near the end of 2026. These projections indicate that the energy shock may appear in GDP with a delay even though its effect on the second quarter was limited.

UK inflation could rise materially if energy-supply disruption continues. Treasury modeling shows CPI reaching 4.3% in the first quarter of 2027 under its worst-case scenario, rather than returning to the BOE’s 2% target in the absence of the war. The BOE and Bloomberg Economics estimate a slightly higher peak of 4.5% during the first half of next year in their adverse cases. Under a less severe outlook, Capital Economics expects inflation to peak near 3.7% later in 2026. The range of forecasts reflects uncertainty over oil and gas supplies, while the 13% increase in the household energy-price cap in July is already expected to reduce purchasing power during the second half.

The economic scenarios complicate the UK government’s first budget, scheduled for October 28. Prime Minister Andy Burnham has introduced measures including capped bus fares and lower VAT on household energy bills, while Chancellor John Healey must finance additional spending without allowing borrowing to rise excessively. A downgrade to growth of 0.9% in 2026 and 0.3% in 2027 would narrow the government’s fiscal room at the same time that higher inflation increases pressure for further cost-of-living support. Even a rapid agreement to reopen the Strait of Hormuz may provide only gradual relief because Treasury officials expect energy flows to take months or years to return fully to pre-war conditions.

Asia

· India’s CPI inflation was broadly stable at 4.45% year on year in July, compared with a final 4.38% in June, remaining inside the RBI’s 2%–6% tolerance band for a seventh consecutive month. Rural inflation of 4.84% exceeded the urban rate of 3.96%, while food inflation accelerated to 5.52% from 5.32% and continued to account for much of the headline pressure. Price growth varied widely across categories: housing inflation was contained at 2.22%, while transport prices rose 4.43% and restaurant and accommodation services increased 7.72%. The RBI expects headline inflation to average 5.0% in the year through March 2027, reaching 5.9% in the December quarter before moderating, although improving monsoon rains, food stocks and lower crude prices could limit the increase.

Last week the RBI kept the repo rate unchanged at 5.25% for a fourth consecutive meeting through a unanimous vote and retained its neutral stance. Policymakers judged that higher inflation was still concentrated in food and fuel, with limited evidence that the supply shock had spread across the broader price basket. The RBI therefore wants greater clarity on the path and composition of inflation before changing policy. Most economists cited by Bloomberg expect rates to remain unchanged through 2026, although some still anticipate tightening by December if energy costs, food prices or imported inflation become more persistent.

India’s growth outlook remained resilient despite the Middle East conflict, with the RBI raising its GDP forecast for the year through March 2027 to 6.7% from 6.6%. The central bank projects growth of 7.0% in the April–June quarter, followed by 6.4%, 6.5% and 6.8% in the next three quarters, while growth in the January–March 2026 quarter had reached 7.8%. Private consumption, construction, capital-goods activity, bank lending and services exports continued to support the economy, while government infrastructure spending and high capacity utilization were expected to sustain investment. Risks remained linked to uneven monsoon rainfall, elevated energy costs, supply-chain pressures and uncertainty surrounding global trade.

· China’s CPI inflation slowed to 0.5% year on year in July from 1.0% in June, the weakest rate in six months, while core inflation excluding food and energy eased to 0.9%. CPI fell 0.1% month on month, and average inflation for January–July was 0.9%. Weak goods and food prices restrained the index: food declined 1.5% from a year earlier, consumer goods rose only 0.2%, and pork remained 13.3% cheaper despite a 4.1% monthly increase. Transport-fuel inflation dropped to 0.8% from 15% in June, while automobile prices fell 1.3% annually. Services inflation was firmer at 0.7%, although tourism-service inflation slowed to 2.2% from 4.5%, indicating limited pricing power during the summer travel period.

China’s PPI inflation moderated to 3.5% year on year in July from 4.1% in June and fell 0.7% month on month, showing that the commodity-driven increase in factory prices was losing momentum. Prices for production inputs remained 4.8% above a year earlier, led by increases of 16.4% in mining, 6.1% in raw materials and 3.1% in processing. However, consumer-goods producer prices declined 0.8%, including falls of 2.1% for food and 1.1% for clothing, suggesting that higher upstream costs were not passing fully into final goods. The contrast was also visible across industries: nonferrous-metal processing prices rose 20.2%, while automobile prices fell 2.3% and apparel prices declined 1.4%. Industrial purchasing prices increased 5.5% annually but dropped 1.0% during the month as fuel, power and chemical input costs each fell 2.6%.

The broad-based moderation in CPI and PPI renewed concern that China’s reflation remains dependent on external commodity prices rather than stronger domestic demand. The July data alone are unlikely to produce an immediate policy shift, but further weakness in activity or financial markets could increase pressure for additional support. China’s leadership has pledged to accelerate fiscal expenditure, consider new stimulus and adjust monetary tools when appropriate. Although many economists no longer expect an interest-rate reduction in 2026, ING estimates that softer inflation and weaker domestic activity provide a case for a 10 bp policy-rate cut in the coming months.

Foreign Exchange Markets

The U.S. dollar slightly strengthened over the week, with the DXY index gaining 0.1%.

Commodities and Energy Markets

The commodities complex ended the week mostly higher, led by rising crude oil prices amid renewed escalation in the Middle East.

Debt and Fixed Income Markets

According to CME data, the implied Fed funds rate curve over the next 18 months shifted lower by an average of 4 bp, leaving the implied policy rate for January 2028 around 2 bp below the prior week’s level.

The repricing was driven by softer inflation data and signs of weaker underlying demand. July CPI and PPI both showed renewed disinflation, while retail-sales data reinforced the case for patience. As a result, the implied probability of a September hike fell to 33.1% from 44.4% a week earlier, and the market pushed the likely timing of the next tightening move from October to December. Expectations for a second hike next summer were also removed. In total, futures now imply around 24 bp of cumulative tightening by year-end 2026, down from 30 bp a week earlier. That shift is consistent with the more cautious tone from officials such as Austan Goolsbee, who said recent inflation data were encouraging but that several more months of improvement were needed before confidence in a return to 2% could be restored.

The Treasury market, however, continued to send a different signal at the long end. The 1-year yield fell 3 bp to 3.96%, reflecting reduced expectations for near-term tightening, while the 10-year yield rose 4 bp to 4.69% and the 30-year yield increased 6 bp to 5.26%. The divergence suggests that investors became less concerned about an immediate Fed hike but more demanding about the compensation required to hold long-dated debt. Persistent fiscal deficits remain one explanation: Goldman’s Robert Kaplan argued that the long end is being driven more by structural supply-demand imbalances and large deficits than by the fed funds path itself, while Pimco’s Marc Seidner similarly expects the curve to remain steep as fiscal pressure weighs on longer maturities.

Fed credibility has also become part of the term-premium story. President Trump’s renewed attempt to remove Governor Lisa Cook has revived concerns over central-bank independence, while Chair Kevin Warsh’s less explicit communication style has already made investors more uncertain about the Fed’s reaction function. Reuters noted that episodes of political pressure on the Fed have coincided with higher long-term yields and a weaker dollar, and Barclays warned that if confidence in the Fed’s willingness to defend its inflation target has begun to deteriorate, the long end may still be underpricing that risk. In other words, softer inflation lowered the expected policy path, but political pressure, fiscal supply and uncertainty over the Fed’s inflation-fighting commitment prevented that relief from translating into lower long-term yields.

You can find more articles in our Telegram channel at https://t.me/atranicapital_eng

The main catalyst was a more favorable macro backdrop. Early in the week, progress toward reopening the Strait of Hormuz eased fears of prolonged disruption to global energy supplies, pushing oil lower and reducing inflation concerns. Friday then added a second boost: the U.S. economy lost 23,000 jobs in July, while payroll gains for May and June were revised down by a combined 103,000. The weak report reduced expectations for near-term Fed tightening and pulled Treasury yields lower.

Strong earnings gave the rally a firmer foundation. Citadel Securities argued that the recent reduction in speculative retail positioning had removed some technical excess, while positive earnings surprises and an expected pickup in corporate buybacks provided additional support. That helps explain why equities responded so strongly when the macro backdrop improved. The counterpoint is sentiment: Bank of America’s Bull & Bear Indicator climbed to 9.7, its highest since 2021, suggesting that increasingly bullish positioning may itself be becoming a source of vulnerability.

Global equities moved higher alongside Wall Street, with the global ex-U.S. index up 2.9%. Brazil was the notable exception, with EWZ falling 3.6% as political and fiscal uncertainty intensified ahead of October’s presidential election. A widely expected 25 bp Selic cut to 14% offered little relief, while escalating tensions with Washington added to the country-specific risk premium.

Global economic activity also improved in July. The J.P. Morgan Global Composite PMI rose to 52.6 from 52.0, a five-month high consistent with roughly 2.6% annualized GDP growth. Services drove most of the improvement, while manufacturing remained in expansion but lost some momentum as precautionary inventory building faded. New business grew at the fastest pace since February and employment increased for the first time since April. Investment-related sectors — particularly AI, technology equipment, machinery and defense — remained an important source of strength. Inflation pressures eased as energy costs declined, although price growth remained elevated in the U.S. and Japan.

Crypto advanced with other risk assets. Bitcoin rose 3.2% and total market capitalization gained 2.1%. U.S. spot Bitcoin ETFs attracted $865 million, the strongest weekly inflow since April. The market is also becoming increasingly institutional: professional investors accounted for 72% of spot trading volume on Wintermute’s OTC desk in the first half of 2026, up from 59% a year earlier. That shift toward ETFs, derivatives and institutional trading may help explain why Bitcoin’s current drawdown has been more gradual than in previous crypto downturns.

Rates markets became noticeably less hawkish after the weak jobs report. CME data show the implied Fed funds curve shifted about 9 bp lower over the next 18 months. The probability of a September hike fell to 44.4% from 67.0%, pushing the likely timing of the next tightening move to October, while expectations for a second hike moved from January to next summer. Futures now imply around 30 bp of cumulative tightening by year-end 2026, down from 37 bp a week earlier.

Treasury yields moved lower in response. The 1-year fell 5 bp to 3.82%, the 10-year declined 8 bp to 4.65%, and the 30-year eased 7 bp to 5.20%, according to Bloomberg. The combination of softer employment, lower oil prices and easing inflation concerns gave investors more confidence that the Fed can afford to move cautiously rather than tighten aggressively.

For comprehensive insights and deeper context, please refer to the full article.

Subscribe now

US Stock Market

U.S. equities rallied strongly over the week, with the S&P 500 gaining 3.6%, the Nasdaq Composite 5.2% and the Dow 3.0%. Unlike several recent weeks, the advance extended well beyond the largest technology companies: large-, mid- and small-cap stocks all rose, although growth remained the clear leader. The main support came from an improving macro backdrop. Early in the week, progress toward reopening the Strait of Hormuz reduced fears of prolonged disruption to global energy supplies, pushing oil prices lower and easing inflation concerns. By Friday, unexpectedly weak U.S. employment data added a second catalyst, reducing expectations for a near-term Fed hike and pulling Treasury yields lower. The economy lost 23,000 jobs in July, while employment gains for the previous two months were revised down by a combined 103,000.

Strong corporate earnings provided an additional foundation for the rally. Citadel Securities argued that the recent reduction in speculative retail positioning had removed some of the market’s technical excesses, while earnings continued to surprise positively and corporate buyback activity was poised to accelerate as blackout periods ended. That combination helps explain why equities responded so strongly to the improvement in the macro backdrop. Still, sentiment is becoming increasingly optimistic: Bank of America’s Bull & Bear Indicator reportedly climbed to 9.7, its highest since 2021, suggesting that the rapid improvement in risk appetite may itself be becoming a source of vulnerability.

Sector performance improved markedly over the week, with eight of eleven sectors posting gains and only Energy, Real Estate and Utilities finishing lower. Technology led the advance, surging 7.2% as strength broadened across AI and semiconductor names: Nvidia jumped 11.6%, Broadcom 9.9%, Intel 12.7% and Micron 6.6%, while Microsoft added 7.6%. Materials (+4.8%) and Industrials (+3.0%) also posted strong gains, pointing to broader participation beyond mega-cap growth. Consumer Discretionary advanced 3.3%, supported by Tesla (+5.6%), Home Depot (+7.1%) and strong gains across travel-related names, while Communication Services rose 2.8% as Meta (+6.4%) and Disney (+9.1%) offset a slightly weaker Alphabet. Energy was the clear laggard, falling 3.4%, with Chevron, ConocoPhillips and several exploration and production companies declining as crude oil recorded a third consecutive weekly loss. Overall, the week represented a much broader risk-on move than some of the recent rallies, combining renewed AI leadership with strength across cyclical sectors.

The Fear & Greed Index jumped to 64 from 42, moving decisively from Fear into Greed. The improvement was broad: market momentum strengthened all the way to Extreme Greed, options positioning also shifted to Extreme Greed, safe-haven demand improved to Greed, and junk-bond demand remained in Extreme Greed. However, the picture was not uniformly bullish. Stock-price strength remained in Fear and market breadth improved only from Extreme Fear to Fear, indicating that the rally was still being driven by a relatively narrow group of stocks rather than broad participation across the market.

SPY accelerated out of its two-month trading range, clearing the June peak near 760 and reaching a new record high. The ETF now stands comfortably above its 20-, 50-, 100- and 200-day moving averages, leaving the underlying trend firmly positive. RSI rose to 66, reflecting strong demand while also warning that the market is nearing overheated territory after a rapid advance. With no established ceiling above the current price, 780 is the nearest round-number hurdle; if the rally pauses, the former high around 758–760 becomes the first area to watch, followed by the 20-day average near 750.

The earnings season is gaining momentum. According to LSEG I/B/E/S, 436 companies in the S&P 500—representing 87.2% of the index—have reported Q2 2026 results so far, up from 60.8% a week earlier. Of these, 85.1% have exceeded analysts’ EPS expectations, slightly down from 85.2% the previous week and still above both the long-term average of 67.5% and the four-quarter average of 80%. Reported earnings are running 8.4% above estimates in aggregate, up 1.4 pp w/w and above both the long-term average surprise of 4.4% and the recent four-quarter average of 7.5%.

Against this backdrop, consensus expectations for S&P 500 Q2 EPS growth were once again revised higher to 51.1% y/y, or 47.2% excluding the Energy sector, from 47.7% and 44.2%, respectively, a week earlier.

In the upcoming week beginning August 10, 10 S&P 500 companies are scheduled to report. Market attention will be particularly focused on the following high-profile earnings releases:

Global Markets

Globally, country ETFs posted broad gains in sync with the U.S. market, with the global ex-U.S. equity index surging 2.9% on the week. Brazil was the notable global laggard, with EWZ falling 3.6%. The weakness appeared largely domestic, as investors demanded a higher political and fiscal risk premium ahead of October’s increasingly competitive presidential election. Polls showed Lula’s lead over Flávio Bolsonaro narrowing, while neither campaign has yet convinced markets that it can stabilize Brazil’s rising public debt. A widely expected 25 bp Selic cut to 14% offered little relief, with the central bank maintaining a cautious stance amid elevated inflation risks. Escalating tensions with Washington — including visa retaliation, U.S. tariffs, and accusations of election interference — added to political uncertainty.

ACWX broke decisively out of its recent sideways range, climbing above both the 20- and 50-day moving averages and returning to the June highs. All four key averages are now rising beneath the price, reinforcing the broader uptrend. RSI advanced to 62, showing solid buying momentum without yet reaching overheated territory. The 77.5–78 area is the next immediate test; a sustained move above it would confirm the breakout, while 75–75.5 should now provide initial support if the rally pauses, followed by the 100-day average near 74.

Cryptocurrency Market

Crypto assets advanced alongside broader risk assets, with Bitcoin rising 3.2% while total market capitalization increased 2.1%. Bitcoin received additional support from strong institutional demand, as U.S. spot Bitcoin ETFs attracted $865 million over the week, the largest weekly inflow since April. The move fits a broader shift in market structure: institutional investors accounted for 72% of spot trading volume on Wintermute’s OTC desk in the first half of 2026, up from 59% a year earlier, while professional investors increasingly used ETFs, derivatives and structured products rather than buying tokens outright. That growing institutional presence may also help explain why Bitcoin’s current drawdown has been more gradual than in previous crypto downturns, with liquidity increasingly shaped by asset managers and hedge funds rather than retail speculation.

Economic Indicators, Statistics and News

Several important macroeconomic indicators and economic news were published during the week:

Global

The J.P. Morgan Global Composite PMI rose from 52.0 in June to 52.6 in July, reaching a five-month high as global activity, new business and employment all strengthened. The reading was consistent with annualized global GDP growth of approximately 2.6%, compared with the survey’s long-term average of 2.9%. Output increased in 10 of the 13 countries with available July data: expansion accelerated in the US and Australia and resumed in the euro area and UK, while France, Russia and Brazil contracted. New business grew at its fastest pace since February, although international trade remained weak as export orders declined for a fifth month. Canada and Ireland were excluded because their July releases were not available when the global index was compiled.

Global manufacturing remained in expansion, but momentum softened as the earlier contribution from precautionary inventory building diminished. The J.P. Morgan Global Manufacturing PMI slipped from 52.2 to 52.1, its lowest level since March but its 12th consecutive month above 50. The manufacturing output index declined to 52.7, also a four-month low, although the survey remained consistent with annual global production growth of approximately 3%, above its historical average of about 2%. Output and new orders continued to rise across consumer, intermediate and investment goods, but both recorded their weakest growth since March. Export orders stabilized after contracting in May and June. Input purchasing expanded at its slowest pace this year, accumulation of raw-material inventories moderated and finished-goods stocks fell more quickly, indicating that safety-stock demand was becoming a smaller source of production growth.

Manufacturing performance varied substantially across regions. ASEAN returned to growth as supply disruptions eased, with Thailand leading the global rankings and Vietnam recording one of the strongest expansions in its 15-year survey history. Japan delivered the best result among developed economies, with manufacturing output growth reaching its highest level since February 2012, while mainland China slowed to its weakest pace since March. European manufacturing achieved its strongest expansion since February 2022, helped by Germany’s best performance in more than four years and firmer growth in the UK, although France, Spain and Poland remained in contraction. North American momentum weakened as US growth slowed and Mexican output declined, while Brazil recorded the sharpest manufacturing downturn among the economies monitored.

Global services activity gained momentum in July, with the Services PMI reaching 52.5, its strongest reading since February. Business services expanded faster and consumer services returned to growth as lower energy prices and reduced geopolitical uncertainty supported tourism, recreation and other discretionary spending. Some of this improvement was temporary, however, reflecting the FIFA World Cup, US250 celebrations and favorable weather in several countries. Financial services were among the weakest-performing industries: real-estate activity continued to contract, although more slowly, and banking growth nearly stalled as new business weakened. The slowdown in banking activity pointed to more cautious borrowing and investment intentions despite the broader revival in service demand.

The sector composition of global growth continued to favor investment related to AI and defense. Technology-equipment production increased at its fastest rate since May 2021, while the broader technology sector recorded its strongest expansion in 10 months as demand rose for software, IT services and data-center equipment. Machinery and equipment output grew at its fastest pace in five years, partly supported by higher defense spending in the US and Europe. By contrast, growth in metals, mining and other basic-material industries weakened as precautionary stock accumulation slowed. Investment-goods producers consequently led the six broad sectors covered by the global survey, while consumer services recorded the weakest overall expansion despite improving significantly from June.

The global labor picture improved modestly in July. Composite employment increased for the first time since April as stronger current activity, higher backlogs and a better near-term outlook encouraged recruitment. Manufacturing employment recorded its fastest rise since June 2024 and increased for the second time in three months. Companies in the US, mainland China and Japan added workers, while euro-area employment stabilized after six consecutive months of reductions. The improvement nevertheless remained limited, consistent with continued caution among businesses facing uncertain demand, tariffs and elevated operating costs.

Global inflation pressure eased but remained high relative to historical norms. Composite input costs and selling prices rose at their slowest rates in five and four months, respectively, while goods-price inflation declined to a four-month low and factory input-cost growth was the weakest since February. Lower energy costs and less intensive inventory building provided some relief, but labor expenses and service-sector prices remained firm. The US recorded the strongest selling-price inflation among the major advanced economies, with service charges reaching a 14-month high. Japan’s rate was the second highest in its survey history, while inflation also accelerated in Canada and Australia. Price growth moderated in the euro area, UK, Brazil and mainland China, showing that the easing was uneven across economies and sectors.

Global business confidence improved for a second month and reached a five-month high, but remained well below its historical average because of uncertainty surrounding the Middle East, US tariff policy and the war in Ukraine. Sentiment recovered further across developed economies, although all major markets remained below their usual levels; the UK recorded the weakest relative confidence and the euro area the strongest. Conditions were less favorable in emerging markets, where optimism fell to its lowest level on record outside the pandemic period. Confidence in mainland China declined to a 15-month low, India fell to one of its weakest readings in four years, and sentiment in Russia and Brazil remained close to historical lows.

The latest diplomatic effort paused another round of US attacks but did not establish that direct negotiations with Iran had resumed. President Donald Trump cancelled strikes that he described as potentially the largest since World War II after Saudi Arabia, the UAE and Qatar requested more time for diplomacy, and he subsequently characterized the initiative as Iran’s final opportunity to reach an agreement. Tehran maintained that it was negotiating only with Oman, while Washington said discussions involving Iran were continuing. The conflict is now in its sixth month, and US Central Command had reported no attacks on Iran since July 29. Trump faces a choice between accepting an interim arrangement that could formalize a larger Iranian role in Hormuz, returning to military escalation without a clear route to victory, or maintaining the blockade and periodically responding to attacks. Any reopening of the strait could allow broader talks on Iran’s nuclear program, but the collapse of the June ceasefire has reduced confidence that a new agreement would lead quickly to a durable settlement.

Iran and Oman reached an understanding in principle on a temporary shipping arrangement for the Strait of Hormuz, although its final wording and political approval remained unresolved. Iranian officials indicated that the framework could remain in force for two to four months, while another reported version referred to a 60-day agreement. The proposal would concentrate traffic in a central corridor, with Iran managing vessel entry and Oman participating in the oversight of departures; mine clearance would be needed before the route could support regular two-way traffic. Iranian lawmakers were also considering restrictions on US- and Israeli-linked ships and cargo, compensation from countries regarded as hostile, and charges for insurance or environmental services. Washington rejected any requirement for permissions, tolls or fees and said commercial passage must be unobstructed. A US official nevertheless indicated that the blockade of Iranian ports would be lifted once Iran implemented an agreement restoring shipping. Approval from Supreme Leader Mojtaba Khamenei was still uncertain, while pressure from Iranian hardliners complicated the ability of diplomats to finalize and enforce the arrangement.

Concurrently, Houthi operations widened the regional security risk beyond Hormuz. The Iran-backed group carried out major drone and missile attacks against Saudi-supported forces in Yemen’s Marib and Hadramout regions, with at least 30 troops reported killed, and struck Saudi Arabia’s Najran region, where 11 civilians were wounded. The attacks represented one of the most serious escalations since the 2022 ceasefire between the Houthis and the Saudi-led coalition. The group had already announced a maritime blockade of Saudi Arabia and targeted Saudi Aramco facilities at Jizan and Yanbu, while an India-flagged vessel sank after an attack near Yemen, with all 13 crew members rescued. These actions create a second threat to energy and commercial shipping around the Red Sea and Gulf of Aden. Saudi Arabia continued indirect negotiations with the Houthis through Oman while retaining military options if diplomacy failed.

Turkey, Saudi Arabia and Pakistan established a trilateral defense agreement under which an armed attack on one participant would be treated as an attack on all three. The pact provides for coordinated deterrence, shared defensive capabilities, joint exercises and personnel training, while remaining separate from the bilateral Saudi-Pakistani defense agreement signed in September 2025. Its members combine Saudi Arabia’s regional economic influence, Turkey’s position in NATO and its large conventional military, and Pakistan’s nuclear and missile capabilities. The agreement was presented as defensive and not directed at a particular country, but its timing reflects concern among Sunni-majority states about the expansion of the Iran conflict and attacks on Gulf infrastructure. It also signals a greater regional role in collective security while preserving the participants’ different relationships with the US-led defense framework.

US

US nonfarm productivity advanced at a 1.4% annualized rate in Q2, accelerating from a revised 0.8% in Q1, as output increased 1.7% while hours worked rose only 0.3%. Productivity was 2.2% higher year on year, while unit labor costs increased a moderate 1.3% during the quarter and 1.4% from a year earlier. These figures suggest that businesses generated more output without a comparable expansion in labor inputs, limiting employment-related inflation pressure. Bloomberg Economics viewed the result as consistent with a possible early contribution from AI. However, real hourly compensation fell at a 3.1% annualized rate, and labor’s share of income declined to 52.9%, its lowest level in the series beginning in 1947, indicating that the latest efficiency gains did not translate into stronger purchasing power for workers.

The June JOLTS report indicated a gradual normalization in labor demand rather than a sharp deterioration. Job openings declined to 7.36 million from 7.54 million in May, while hiring edged up to 5.35 million and layoffs remained broadly stable. There was approximately one vacancy for every unemployed worker, compared with a peak of two vacancies per unemployed person in 2022, suggesting that supply and demand are now more closely balanced. The quits rate held at 2.0%, reflecting limited worker confidence in finding better opportunities elsewhere. Vacancies weakened in several service industries, while hiring improved in healthcare and construction, supporting the view that softer demand should gradually reduce wage-related inflation pressure.

ADP reported that private employers added only 44,000 jobs in July, the smallest increase since the beginning of the year and well below economists’ expectations, following a revised 95,000 gain in June. The weak hiring figure contrasted with stronger pay growth among workers who changed employers: their wages increased 7.0% year on year, the fastest pace in almost a year, while employees who remained in their positions received a 4.4% increase. This gap suggests that overall recruitment is cooling, but employers in some areas still face shortages of suitable workers and must offer larger wage increases to attract them.

The official employment report presented a weaker picture, with nonfarm payrolls falling by 23,000 in July, compared with the Bloomberg consensus for an 80,000 increase, while May and June employment was revised down by a combined 103,000. Private payrolls still grew by 30,000, led by healthcare and social assistance, but losses in government, retail, financial activities and leisure and hospitality pulled the headline figure below zero. Local-government education accounted for much of the decline and may have been affected by seasonal adjustment around summer closures, although the broader three-month slowdown also points to genuinely softer hiring. The unemployment rate fell from 4.2% to 4.1%, but this reflected people leaving the workforce rather than stronger employment, as labor-force participation dropped to 61.4%. Average hourly earnings increased only 0.1% during the month and 3.2% over the year, the slowest annual growth in more than five years. Analysts disagreed over the severity of the signal: JPMorgan’s Bruce Kasman regarded the weakening across industries as meaningful, while BlackRock’s Rick Rieder argued that AI, greater operational efficiency and slower labor-force growth are allowing companies to expand output without adding employees.

The employment figures reduced expectations for near-term Fed tightening but did not eliminate the possibility of another rate increase. Market-implied odds of a 25 bp September hike fell to 44%, from around 55%–60% before the payroll release. The policy-sensitive 2-year Treasury yield declined about 5 bp to 4.19% and the dollar weakened The report weakened the case for an immediate increase because it raised risks to the employment side of the Fed’s mandate, but analysts continued to view inflation as the more important constraint. A strong CPI release could therefore restore expectations of tightening, whereas Bloomberg Economics expects the Fed to remain on hold in September if inflation also softens.

The Senate confirmed Brett Matsumoto as BLS commissioner by 51–47, giving him a four-year term at an agency whose employment and inflation releases have substantial market influence. Matsumoto, a BLS economist since 2015 who also worked at the White House Council of Economic Advisers, pledged that official statistics would continue to be prepared by career staff and protected from political influence. His appointment follows the dismissal of former commissioner Erika McEntarfer, which raised concerns about confidence in the agency’s independence. Matsumoto will also have to address declining survey participation, reduced staffing, budget constraints and the removal of external advisory committees. He has indicated that alternative data sources will become increasingly important as the existing survey-based statistical system becomes more difficult to maintain.

The S&P Global Composite PMI rose from 51.9 to 54.5 in July, its highest level since October 2025, as stronger services activity outweighed slower manufacturing output growth. New business expanded at a 19-month high, confidence reached its strongest level since November and private-sector employment increased for the first time since April. The survey was consistent with annualized GDP growth of approximately 2.3%, although temporary spending associated with the FIFA World Cup and Independence Day events contributed to the improvement. Growth was reported in six of the seven monitored sectors: Industrials led with an activity index of 55.5, Technology recorded its strongest expansion in nine months and Consumer Services reached its highest level since October 2025. Healthcare was the exception at 49.9, ending nine months of growth. Economy-wide input inflation accelerated to its highest level since November 2022, while selling prices rose at the fastest pace in one year.

US manufacturing remained in expansion, although the ISM and S&P Global surveys offered different assessments of momentum. The ISM Manufacturing PMI climbed from 53.3 to 55.6, its highest reading since May 2022 and its seventh consecutive month above 50. Production surged 6.3 points to 58.5, new orders strengthened to 56.7, backlogs increased to 55.0, and employment moved from 49.7 to 52.8, ending 33 months without workforce growth. New export orders returned to expansion at 53.0, while imports rose to 55.7; fifteen industries grew, with chemicals the only one contracting. By contrast, the S&P Global Manufacturing PMI remained at 53.9, as output growth fell to a four-month low, new-order growth slowed for a third month and exports continued to decline. Supplier performance deteriorated at the second-fastest rate in four years, and business confidence reached a nine-month low. Cost pressure eased but remained substantial: the ISM prices index declined from 73.0 to 71.1, while S&P Global continued to report elevated costs from tariffs, energy and material shortages. Strong demand from AI infrastructure, semiconductors and defense therefore coexisted with supply constraints and weaker foreign sales.

Services activity also expanded, but employment and inflation signals were less favorable. The ISM Services PMI edged from 54.0 to 54.1, its 25th consecutive month above 50, as business activity jumped 3.7 points to 59.1 and new orders rose 2.1 points to 57.2. However, the employment index fell from 51.2 to 47.4, indicating the sharpest headcount contraction since March, and backlog growth weakened to 50.9. S&P Global reported a stronger acceleration, with its Services PMI rising from 51.2 to 54.6, above the preliminary 53.6 reading and the highest in nine months. New business grew at its fastest rate since November 2025, confidence reached an eight-month high and hiring improved modestly, although export demand recorded one of its steepest declines since late 2022. Price pressure intensified across both surveys: the ISM prices-paid index increased from 67.7 to 70.3, while S&P Global recorded the fastest growth in input costs since May 2025 and a 14-month high in selling-price inflation. The combination of resilient demand, conflicting employment signals and stronger cost pass-through gives the Fed arguments both for waiting and for retaining a tightening bias.

The New York Fed’s July survey showed slightly lower near-term inflation expectations, mixed labor-market confidence and a modest improvement in household financial sentiment. Median one-year inflation expectations eased from 3.7% to 3.6%, while the three- and five-year measures remained at 3.3% and 3.0%. Expected gasoline-price growth rebounded 1.4 percentage points to 2.9%, but anticipated rent inflation fell 2.4 points to 5.9%, medical-cost expectations declined to 8.9%, and food-price expectations held at 5.0%. The perceived probability of finding a job after becoming unemployed rose 1.3 points to 46.2%, although the probability that the national unemployment rate would be higher in one year also increased 1.1 points to 42.8%. Job-loss risk edged up to 14.2%, expected earnings growth stayed at 2.8%, and the expected quit rate rose to 18.6%. Household income-growth expectations remained at 3.0%, while expected spending growth eased to 4.9%. The probability of missing a minimum debt payment increased 1.2 points to 12.0%, particularly among households earning below $50,000, but assessments of current and future finances improved. The perceived probability of higher stock prices in one year reached 41.4%, its highest level since April 2021.

Eurozone

The S&P Global Eurozone Composite PMI rose from 50.0 in June to 52.0 in July, its highest level in eight months and the first clear expansion in private-sector activity since March. New business increased for the first time since February and at the strongest pace since November, supported by renewed services demand and faster manufacturing production. Export orders still declined, but only marginally and at the slowest rate in just over a year. Employment stabilized after six months of job losses, while business confidence improved for a third consecutive month to a five-month high. Germany returned to growth, Italy and Spain accelerated, and France remained the only major economy in contraction. S&P Global estimated that the survey was consistent with quarterly GDP growth of approximately 0.3%. Input-cost inflation eased to a five-month low and selling-price growth was the weakest since March, although both remained elevated by historical standards.

The Eurozone Manufacturing PMI increased from 51.4 to 51.9, a three-month high, while its output component advanced from 51.7 to 52.9, the strongest reading in 52 months. Production benefited from the completion of earlier orders, whereas new business grew only slightly and export demand contracted again. Backlogs consequently fell for a third month and at their fastest pace since January, suggesting that current output growth was partly being sustained by previously accumulated work rather than a comparable flow of new demand. Factories continued to reduce employment, purchasing and inventories of both inputs and finished products. Supplier delivery times lengthened considerably, although disruption was less severe than at any point since the Middle East conflict began. Input-cost inflation slowed to a five-month low and factory-gate price growth was the weakest since March. Germany recorded its joint-best manufacturing result in more than four years, while Italy expanded more slowly and France and Spain were broadly stagnant.

The Eurozone Services PMI rebounded from 49.4 in June to 51.7 in July, ending three months of declining activity and recording its strongest expansion since February. The improvement was supported by a solid increase in new business, while another reduction in export orders showed that growth was primarily domestic. Service companies continued to reduce outstanding workloads but added employees at a modest pace, providing the main support for the stabilization in overall eurozone employment. Cost and selling-price inflation both eased slightly, reaching their lowest rates since February and March, respectively, but remained persistent rather than disappearing. Confidence among service providers rose to a five-month high as stronger demand improved expectations for the coming year.

The broader Europe Sector PMI showed that 13 of 19 industries expanded in July, up from 12 in June and the widest participation since February. Technology Equipment led the rankings, with production growing at its fastest pace since November 2021, followed by Software & Services; Technology has now been Europe’s strongest broad sector for six consecutive months. Other Financials, Machinery & Equipment and Banks also performed relatively well, while Chemicals recorded its first output decline in six months and became the weakest industry. Basic Materials was the only broad category in contraction. Input-cost growth slowed in 14 of 19 sectors, although expenses increased faster than their respective historical averages in nearly every industry. Most sectors continued to reduce staffing, with Other Financials reporting the strongest hiring and Media the steepest employment decline.

UK

The S&P Global UK Composite PMI rose from 49.3 in June to 52.2 in July, returning to expansion for the first time since April as both manufacturing and services increased output. Total new business also grew for the first time in three months, indicating a modest improvement in private-sector demand. Employment nevertheless continued to decline because renewed services activity did not prevent further workforce reductions. Inflation pressure eased across both sectors: overall input-cost growth was the weakest since February, while selling-price inflation fell to a five-month low. The survey therefore pointed to a better start to Q3 for activity and demand, but the continued loss of jobs showed that companies remained cautious about the durability of the recovery.

The S&P Global UK Manufacturing PMI declined from 52.5 to 51.9, a four-month low, because inventories fell sharply, employment growth almost stopped and supplier delays became less severe. However, the underlying measures of current demand and production improved: output expanded at its fastest pace since September 2024, total new orders rose for an eighth consecutive month and export orders increased for a seventh month. Sales strengthened across North America, the EU and several Asian markets, although output still declined among smaller manufacturers while medium-sized and large companies expanded. Backlogs rose for the first time since April 2022, suggesting greater pressure on capacity, but manufacturers reduced purchasing and inventories for a second month. Input-cost inflation slowed to a five-month low, selling-price growth eased to its weakest in four months and supplier delays were the least pronounced since February. Business confidence nevertheless slipped to a three-month low amid concerns about trade tensions, taxes, regulation and geopolitical uncertainty.

The S&P Global UK Services PMI increased from 48.8 in June to 52.1 in July, ending two months of declining activity, although it remained below its long-term average of 54.2. New business rose marginally for the first time since February as demand for technology services strengthened and consumer spending showed tentative improvement. Overseas orders declined for a fifth month, but at the slowest pace during that period, while backlogs continued to fall and indicated limited pressure on operating capacity. Service-sector employment was reduced for a 22nd consecutive month, matching the longest period of job losses in the survey’s 30-year history, although the latest decline was the mildest since October 2025. Input-cost and selling-price inflation both eased to five-month lows as lower fuel bills partly offset higher wages, logistics expenses and technology costs. Confidence improved to its strongest level since February, with 45% of companies expecting activity to rise over the coming year and 15% anticipating a decline.

Asia

The S&P Global Japan Composite PMI was broadly stable at 52.7 in July, compared with 52.8 in June, as exceptionally strong manufacturing output offset slower services growth. Overall new orders increased at a weaker pace, although export business strengthened, while private-sector employment rose for a 34th consecutive month with job creation easing slightly from June. Growth in unfinished work also moderated, suggesting less pressure on capacity outside manufacturing. Composite input-cost inflation slowed to a three-month low but remained historically high, and businesses raised selling prices at the second-fastest rate since the series began in late 2007. The survey therefore indicated continued solid output growth alongside a softer demand trend and persistent price pressure.

The S&P Global Japan Manufacturing PMI edged down from 54.8 to 54.5, but remained well inside expansion territory for a seventh consecutive month. Factory production grew at its fastest pace since February 2014, supported by the strongest increase in new orders since January 2022 and the quickest rise in export business in just over five years. Companies reported stronger demand from Asia and the US, particularly for semiconductors and products linked to AI development. Manufacturers increased employment solidly, raised purchasing at the fastest pace since April 2022 and accumulated input inventories at the quickest rate since May 2024, partly as protection against supply disruption. Even so, backlogs rose at their fastest pace since February 2014, indicating that capacity remained stretched. Input-cost inflation eased to a four-month low but stayed elevated because of higher oil and raw-material prices, while selling prices rose sharply. Business confidence improved to a four-month high on expectations of continued semiconductor demand.

The S&P Global Japan Services PMI declined from 52.2 in June to 51.2 in July, signaling a second month of expansion but a clear loss of momentum. New business grew at the slowest rate in the current 25-month expansion sequence, while overseas demand contracted for a fourth consecutive month. Service providers added workers only marginally, and growth in backlogs weakened to a 17-month low, showing that capacity pressure was easing. Cost conditions moved in the opposite direction: input-price inflation remained close to June’s four-year high because of the Middle East conflict, higher wages and the weak yen, prompting firms to raise charges at the second-fastest rate on record. Business confidence also weakened to one of its lowest levels since the pandemic as supply disruption, labor shortages, an ageing population and elevated costs clouded the outlook.

The RatingDog China Composite PMI fell from 53.6 in June to 50.8 in July, remaining marginally above the expansion threshold but recording its weakest growth in one year. Activity slowed across both manufacturing and services, while total new business increased for a 14th consecutive month at its softest pace since March. Employment rose for a third month, the longest sequence of workforce growth since mid-2023, indicating that companies continued to add capacity despite weaker output momentum. Inflation pressure moderated across the private sector, with both input-cost and selling-price growth easing to six-month lows. The survey therefore showed that China’s expansion continued at the start of Q3, but with limited momentum and greater dependence on the durability of new demand.

The RatingDog China General Manufacturing PMI declined from 51.7 to 50.9, a four-month low, while remaining in expansion for an eighth consecutive month. Production also grew for an eighth month, although at the slowest pace since March, and new orders increased for the 14th month, the longest sequence since 2018. Export orders returned to growth after two months of contraction, supported by stronger international demand. Manufacturers raised employment for a second month and at the fastest rate since August 2023, while backlogs increased for a sixth month. However, purchasing activity declined for the first time since November 2025 because inventories of inputs had risen for eight consecutive months, the longest accumulation since 2006–07. Input-cost inflation slowed to a six-month low, allowing output prices to remain broadly unchanged after six months of increases. Business confidence improved slightly as firms expected stronger demand, new products and additional production capacity.

The RatingDog China General Services PMI dropped sharply from 54.1 in June to 50.4 in July, its lowest reading since September 2024, although service activity has now expanded every month since January 2023. New business increased for a 43rd consecutive month, but at the weakest rate since March as domestic demand softened. Foreign demand remained firmer, with the export business index at 52.0, its second-highest level of 2026. Employment grew for a third month, the longest period of job creation since the second half of 2024, while backlogs rose for a ninth month, their longest expansion since 2023. Input-cost inflation eased to its lowest level since January, and service providers raised prices for a second consecutive month—the first such sequence in a year and a half. Confidence nevertheless fell to its weakest level since February 2020, showing that firms remained cautious despite export growth, continued hiring and lower cost pressure.

The HSBC India Composite PMI fell from 57.1 in June to 54.3 in July, remaining consistent with solid private-sector expansion but recording its weakest growth since March 2022. Output and new orders both increased at their slowest rates in 53 months, with manufacturing outperforming services as the latter experienced a particularly sharp loss of momentum. Employment growth accelerated because stronger services hiring more than offset slower job creation among manufacturers. Private-sector input-cost inflation eased to a six-month low, but companies raised selling prices at the fastest pace since April. The survey therefore indicated that demand and activity remained resilient at the start of the second fiscal quarter, although growth became less broad and firms continued to pass higher costs to customers.

The HSBC India Manufacturing PMI declined from 54.2 to 53.5, its lowest level since August 2021 and below the long-run average of 54.2. New orders continued to grow but at the second-slowest rate in more than four years, while output expansion remained among the weakest recorded since mid-2022. Consumer-goods producers experienced the clearest slowdown, whereas intermediate- and capital-goods manufacturers performed more strongly. Export orders accelerated markedly, supported by demand from markets including Canada, the UAE, South Africa and several Asian economies. Purchasing growth fell to a 31-month low, although firms continued rebuilding buffers as input inventories increased and finished-goods stocks recorded their strongest rise in more than 11 years. Supplier delivery times shortened at close to a survey-record pace. Employment increased for a 29th consecutive month, but at the slowest rate in that sequence. Input-cost inflation eased to a five-month low, selling prices rose moderately and business confidence recovered from June’s recent low.

The HSBC India Services PMI dropped from 57.4 in June to 53.3 in July, marking the weakest expansion in almost four and a half years. New business growth slowed to its lowest rate since February 2022 as competition, softer demand and postponed orders affected sales. Export demand remained comparatively firm, with companies reporting stronger business from the UAE, UK and US, while Finance and Insurance was the only broad services category to record faster growth in both activity and sales. Job creation recovered from June’s six-month low, but remained modest: only 6% of companies increased employment and 92% reported no change. Limited new work contributed to the fastest reduction in backlogs in almost five years. Input-cost inflation fell to a six-month low and below its historical average, but selling-price growth accelerated to its strongest pace since April. Business confidence declined to a seven-month low despite expectations of improved demand, investment and inbound tourism.

Foreign Exchange Markets

The U.S. dollar weakened over the week, with the DXY index falling 0.4%.

Commodities and Energy Markets

The commodities complex ended the week mostly lower, led by declining crude oil prices amid easing tensions in the Middle East.

Debt and Fixed Income Markets

According to CME data, the implied Fed funds rate curve over the next 18 months shifted lower by an average of 9 bp, leaving the implied policy rate for January 2028 around 11 bp below the prior week’s level.

Following the unexpectedly weak July employment report, the probability of a rate hike in September fell to 44.4% from 67.0% a week earlier, shifting the likely timing of the next tightening move to the October meeting. Looking further ahead, the expected timing of a second hike shifted from January to next summer. In total, futures now imply around 30 bp of cumulative tightening by year-end 2026, down from 37 bp a week earlier.

Similarly, the U.S. Treasury yield curve moved lower overall. According to Bloomberg, the 1-year yield fell 5 bp to 3.82%, the 10-year yield decreased 8 bp to 4.65%, and the 30-year yield edged lower 7 bp to 5.20%.

You can find more articles in our Telegram channel at https://t.me/atranicapital_eng

Semiconductor stocks entered the summer as one of the strongest trades in global markets. They left July looking like one of the most violent unwinds since the financial crisis.

The PHLX Semiconductor Sector Index (SOX) lost about 21% in July, its worst monthly performance since October 2008. By contrast, the S&P 500 Total Return Index slipped just 0.1%, underscoring how narrowly the market damage was concentrated. Even after an 8.3% rebound over the final two sessions, the SOX finished roughly 23% below its June 22 record. The July selloff erased around $2.2 trillion from the combined market capitalization of SOX constituents.

Volatility was equally striking: almost half of July’s sessions ended with a move of at least 4% in either direction, while every trading day produced an intraday range of 2% or more.

Yet the selloff did not coincide with a collapse in near-term AI demand. Hyperscalers continued to commit extraordinary sums to infrastructure, and earnings expectations for leading chipmakers remained robust. That apparent contradiction is the key to understanding July.

The market was no longer asking whether AI spending was strong. It was asking whether the rate of growth in spending, chip scarcity, pricing power and margins could remain exceptional for long enough to justify prices—and whether investors had become too crowded in the same answer.

The rally was supported by earnings

It would be too simple to call the first-half surge an empty AI bubble. FactSet data compiled by Goldman Sachs show that semiconductor prices broadly followed a powerful rise in consensus forward earnings from the start of 2025. The clearest evidence came from memory, where AI servers created an acute requirement for high-bandwidth memory, tightened the wider DRAM market and drove a sharp improvement in pricing and profits.

That fundamental acceleration helped semiconductor shares more than double by the June peak. But the relationship changed near the top: prices began to run ahead of forward earnings estimates. The trade was still supported by fundamentals, but it had become increasingly dependent on further upgrades.

At the same time, positioning became extraordinary. The Bank of America Fund Manager Survey shows how quickly the trade became crowded. The share of respondents identifying “long global semiconductors” as the world’s most crowded trade rose from 24% in April to 73% in May, 80% in June and 82% in July. That did not tell investors when prices would reverse, but it did describe the market’s vulnerability. When almost everyone shares the same thesis, even a modest reduction in confidence can produce a disproportionate move.

The break began before July

The correction began on June 23. By then, the PHLX Semiconductor Sector Index, or SOX, had more than doubled during the first half of 2026 and reached a record high.

Several concerns arrived at once. Rising Treasury yields increased the discount rate applied to long-duration growth assets. Investors were also becoming more sensitive to the financing and free-cash-flow consequences of the AI buildout. Most visibly, the pressure spread to Korea: the KOSPI fell almost 10%, triggering a circuit breaker, while Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix dropped 12.3% and 12.5%, respectively.

At roughly the same time, industry reports said SK Hynix was slowing its HBM4 ramp and allocating more capacity according to relative profitability across HBM and conventional DRAM. That did not mean AI demand had disappeared. If anything, it reflected the strength of broader memory economics. But the market could interpret it as the first crack in a much more powerful assumption: permanently scarce AI chips, uninterrupted capacity growth and ever-rising margins.

No single item was large enough to explain the subsequent decline. Together, however, they stopped the one-way momentum that had carried the sector through the first half.

July changed the question

One of the first July catalysts arrived on July 1, when Bloomberg reported that Meta was developing a cloud-infrastructure business that could sell external customers access to AI models and raw computing power. The plans were still in development, but the reference to “excess computing power” raised the possibility that hyperscalers could eventually redirect capacity built for internal use into the external market. Meta jumped 9.3% in early trading, while CoreWeave and Nebius fell as much as 14% and 17%, respectively.

The report did not show that Meta already had idle capacity or that AI demand was weakening. Bloomberg said demand remained exceptionally strong, and Zuckerberg had previously said Meta still expected to use its compute. For semiconductor investors, the significance lay in future economics rather than current demand: if installed capacity could be monetized externally, utilization and returns on AI investment might become more important than capacity additions alone. That challenged supplier valuations dependent on continued capex acceleration, persistent scarcity and exceptional margins.

Other concerns reinforced that reassessment during the month: rapid progress by Chinese memory and equipment companies, the efficiency of open-source AI models, the possibility of a more conventional memory cycle, and repeated questions about the returns on hyperscaler capital spending. Strong semiconductor results were sometimes met with weak share-price reactions—a classic sign that high expectations, rather than weak current numbers, had become the problem.

The data do not support a simple month-long rotation from semiconductors into software. The two groups did not consistently move in opposite directions. A clearer divergence emerged only late in July, when selected hyperscalers were rewarded for evidence of cloud growth, AI monetization and spending discipline. Chip suppliers, by contrast, were priced not merely for high capex, but for continued acceleration in capex, persistent scarcity and exceptional margins.

AI spending is a level. Equity returns depend on changes in the market’s expectations for that level and for the profits it will generate.

Crowding turned a reassessment into liquidation

Profit-taking describes how the decline spread, but not what initiated it. Once the upward trend broke, the structure of the trade amplified every piece of bad news.

The rally had attracted momentum strategies, leveraged portfolios and investors using the same group of liquid stocks as a concentrated expression of the AI theme. Falling prices then tightened risk limits, generated margin calls and forced sales. Forced deleveraging at the highly leveraged Situational Awareness fund was a vivid example: its portfolio combined long AI beneficiaries with short positions in software, leaving both sides exposed when the prevailing factor relationships reversed. It was an accelerant, not the original cause of the industry selloff.

The result was an unusually disorderly sequence. SOXX fell 11.6% over July 1–3, rebounded only 2.7% the following week, then lost another 10.2% over July 13–17. Subsequent rebounds were again shallow, and the ETF finished July down 22.1% despite a rally of roughly 9% over the final two days.

The damage was broad. Every SOX constituent finished below its June 22 level, and more than half lost at least 25%. Performance from the peak nevertheless varied sharply: Broadcom and Nvidia slipped just 0.7% and 3.8%, respectively, while Micron and Intel fell 32.1% and 36.0%. The market was not abandoning every company exposed to AI equally. It was repricing the most stretched assumptions and the portfolios most vulnerable to forced selling.

Record inflows into a falling market

The most revealing feature of the selloff may be what happened inside semiconductor ETFs.

Five broad, unlevered US semiconductor ETFs—SOXX, SMH, XSD, SOXQ and PSI—received approximately $11.8 billion in July, following $6.3 billion in June. SOXX and SMH alone attracted about $11.4 billion, a record combined monthly inflow. SOXX received $6.9 billion and SMH $4.5 billion.

The concentration was remarkable. About 96% of the unlevered July inflow went into SOXX and SMH, while the equal-weighted XSD received almost nothing. On July 8 alone, SOXX absorbed $5.4 billion—nearly four-fifths of its entire monthly inflow.

Leveraged products showed even stronger dip-buying. SOXL, which targets three times the daily semiconductor return, attracted another $6.9 billion in July. It should be analyzed separately from long-only funds because its daily reset, derivatives and rebalancing mechanics make its flows economically different. Its large inflow also followed substantial earlier redemptions, so it cannot simply be added to conventional ETF demand and interpreted dollar for dollar.

How could record inflows coexist with a historic price decline? Because ETF flows measure only one route into the market. Buyers of ETF shares were absorbing stock supplied by sellers elsewhere: active funds, single-stock investors, leveraged portfolios, derivatives dealers and international holders. Authorized participants could create new ETF shares even as the underlying basket fell if selling through other channels remained larger.

The flow data therefore point to a large transfer of ownership. Momentum and leveraged holders appear to have reduced exposure while a new cohort of dip-buyers accumulated the most liquid ETFs. The inflows may have softened the decline and helped the late-month rebound, but they do not prove that the bottom was reached—or that crowding was fully cleared. Indeed, a market that continues to fall despite record demand from a visible group of buyers is also revealing how much supply remains.

What July did—and did not—change

July did not establish that the AI investment cycle was over. Hyperscaler capex remained strong, forward earnings were still high, and the final two sessions showed how quickly semiconductor shares could rebound once forced selling eased.

What changed was the burden of proof. Investors stopped rewarding exposure to AI infrastructure indiscriminately. They began distinguishing between companies demonstrating returns on AI investment and suppliers whose valuations required capacity growth, scarcity and margins to remain exceptional.

That leaves four signals worth watching after the selloff:

· Forward earnings revisions. If estimates continue to rise while prices stabilize, the correction will increasingly look like a valuation and positioning reset. Falling estimates would point to a deeper fundamental turn.

· Hyperscaler capex and free cash flow. The issue is not merely how much they spend, but whether spending continues to accelerate and produces visible revenue.

· Memory pricing, capacity and margins. HBM demand can remain strong while a shift in the wider memory cycle changes the earnings profile of the suppliers.

· Price behavior relative to ETF flows. Continued inflows with weak prices would suggest persistent distribution. Stabilizing prices on less extreme flows would be healthier evidence that ownership has reset.

The best description of July is therefore not that the AI boom ended. An extraordinary, earnings-backed advance became the market’s most crowded trade. A cluster of concerns then challenged its most optimistic assumptions, and leverage converted that reassessment into a historic liquidation.

The fundamentals created the rally. Positioning determined the violence of its reversal.

You can find more articles in our Telegram channel at https://t.me/atranicapital_eng

The divide showed how investors are now judging AI spending: not by its size, but by whether it produces accelerating revenue without overwhelming cash flow. Microsoft delivered the strongest combination. Azure growth accelerated to 43%, exceeded expectations and is projected to reach about 45% this quarter, while management kept its 2026 capex outlook unchanged and said free cash flow should remain positive. Amazon was also rewarded as AWS growth accelerated to 37% and margins reached 39%. Those results persuaded investors that stronger AI demand could justify raising annual capex guidance to $220 billion, despite a second consecutive quarter of negative free cash flow.

Meta and Apple exposed less favorable versions of the same AI investment cycle. Meta generated just $784 million of free cash flow, while nearly $700 billion of future contractual and lease commitments underscored the scale of investment required before its newer AI products generate meaningful revenue. Unlike Microsoft, Amazon and Alphabet, it lacks a developed cloud platform through which it can directly monetize excess computing capacity. Apple faced almost the opposite problem. Its restrained data-center spending protects cash flow, but the AI infrastructure boom is raising memory costs and tightening component supplies. Strong quarterly results were overshadowed by weaker guidance, slower Services growth and pressure on product margins.

The week therefore offered reassurance for the AI infrastructure trade, but not a return to indiscriminate enthusiasm. Microsoft and Amazon showed that investors will tolerate enormous spending when cloud growth accelerates and the path to returns is visible. Meta demonstrated that large commitments without clear near-term monetization are harder to defend, while Apple showed that even companies investing less directly in AI cannot escape its effects on costs and supply chains. With Alphabet, Meta, Microsoft and Amazon carrying nearly $2.4 trillion of disclosed future commitments, the market is increasingly separating companies that can convert the buildout into revenue and cash flow from those still asking investors to take returns largely on faith.

Global equities also advanced in dollar terms, with the global ex-U.S. index up about 1.6%, although much of the move reflected a 1.5% decline in the dollar.

Crypto remained under pressure. Bitcoin fell 2.0% and total market capitalization declined 1.3%. Weakness intensified Friday as momentum behind the Clarity Act faded ahead of the Senate’s August recess and disappointing Coinbase results pointed to softer retail trading. Redemptions from U.S. spot Bitcoin ETFs erased earlier inflows and ended a three-week streak of net additions.

Rates delivered a more complicated message following the Fed’s widely expected decision to hold its policy rate unchanged. The probability of a standard 25 bp hike in September rose to 67.0% from 57.3%, but markets removed the roughly 25% chance of a larger 50 bp move that had been priced a week earlier. As a result, the expected scale of near-term tightening declined even as a quarter-point hike became more likely. The expected timing of a second increase shifted from December to January, while futures now imply about 37 bp of cumulative tightening by year-end 2026, down from 45 bp.

Treasuries reflected the same split. The removal of jumbo-hike risk pushed the 1-year yield down 8 bp to 4.03%. Longer maturities rose as higher oil prices, three dissents in favor of an immediate hike and limited guidance from Chair Kevin Warsh increased concern that delayed action could leave inflation elevated for longer. The 10-year yield climbed 5 bp to 4.73%, while the 30-year rose 11 bp to 5.27%, its highest level since 2007. Investors were therefore pricing less risk of an unusually large move now, but more risk that rates ultimately remain higher for longer.

For comprehensive insights and deeper context, please refer to the full article.

US Stock Market

U.S. equities rebounded, but the headline indexes again concealed an unusually concentrated market. The S&P 500 gained 1.1% and the Nasdaq Composite rose 1.6%, while the combined market value of the Magnificent 7 increased 4.0%, or roughly $880 billion. That exceeded the approximately $700 billion gain in the entire S&P 500, implying that the rest of the index declined slightly in aggregate. The group’s internal dispersion was equally striking, ranging from Apple’s 7.2% weekly loss to Microsoft’s 21.8% surge. Microsoft alone added about $616 billion in market value, nearly matching the gain in the broader index.

The sharp differences reflected how investors are now judging AI spending: not by its size alone, but by whether companies can show accelerating revenue and preserve cash flow. Microsoft delivered the clearest combination. Azure growth accelerated to 43%, exceeded expectations and is forecast to reach about 45% in the current quarter, while management kept its calendar-2026 capex outlook unchanged and said the company should remain free-cash-flow positive. That contrast with cash burn elsewhere in the sector helped produce the largest weekly gain among the megacaps. Amazon was rewarded for a different reason: AWS revenue accelerated 37% and margins reached 39%, persuading investors that rising AI demand could justify the increase in annual capex guidance to $220 billion even after a second consecutive quarter of negative free cash flow.

Meta and Apple fell because their earnings exposed less favorable versions of the same AI investment cycle. Meta’s free cash flow dropped to just $784 million, while almost $700 billion of future contractual and lease commitments highlighted the scale of spending required before its newer AI products generate meaningful revenue. Unlike Microsoft, Amazon and Alphabet, Meta still lacks a developed cloud business through which it can directly monetize excess computing capacity. Apple’s problem was almost the reverse: its restrained data-center spending protects cash flow, but the broader AI infrastructure boom is raising memory costs and limiting the supply of components used in its devices. Despite strong quarterly results, weaker-than-expected guidance, slowing Services growth and pressure on product margins pushed the shares sharply lower.

The week therefore offered some reassurance for the broader AI infrastructure trade, but not a return to indiscriminate enthusiasm. Amazon and Microsoft showed that investors will tolerate enormous spending when cloud growth accelerates and the path to returns is visible. Meta’s decline showed that commitments without clear near-term monetization remain difficult to defend, while Apple demonstrated that even companies spending less on AI cannot escape its effects on supply chains and costs. With Alphabet, Meta, Microsoft and Amazon now carrying nearly $2.4 trillion of disclosed future commitments, the market is increasingly separating firms that can convert the buildout into revenue and cash flow from those still asking investors to take the returns largely on faith.

Sector performance was mixed over the week, with five of eleven sectors advancing and six finishing lower. Consumer Discretionary was the clear leader, rising 6.1% as Amazon surged 17.0% after AWS delivered its fastest growth in more than four years. Communication Services gained 1.8%, with Alphabet’s 11.4% rebound more than offsetting Meta’s 6.5% decline. Technology was little changed despite Microsoft’s 21.8% post-earnings surge, as Apple fell 7.2% and weakness extended across semiconductors, including Micron, AMD and Nvidia. Consumer Staples and Financials posted modest gains, while Energy was broadly flat. Utilities were the main laggard, falling 4.2%, and Real Estate declined 1.9% as the renewed rise in long-term Treasury yields weighed on rate-sensitive sectors. Industrials and Materials also retreated, leaving the week’s gains heavily dependent on a small number of large earnings winners.

The Fear & Greed Index rose to 42 from 39 but remained in Fear. The improvement was again narrow and came mainly from credit markets, where junk-bond demand strengthened from Neutral to Extreme Greed, indicating greater willingness to take risk. This was partly offset by safe-haven demand slipping from Greed to Neutral, while market momentum, stock-price strength and options positioning remained in Fear and market breadth stayed in Extreme Fear. The mix therefore suggests that risk appetite improved in credit, but confidence in the equity market itself remained fragile and participation beneath the major indexes was still weak.

SPY staged a sharp rebound after briefly testing the 736–737 support zone, finishing back above its closely grouped 20- and 50-day moving averages near 745–746. That recovery steadies the near-term picture, while the rising 100- and 200-day averages remain well below the market and continue to confirm the broader uptrend. RSI recovered to 53, giving buyers a modest advantage without signaling excessive optimism. Holding above 744–746 would support another attempt toward 750–755, followed by the June high near 758–760, while renewed weakness below the short-term averages would put 736–737 back in focus.

The earnings season is gaining momentum. According to LSEG I/B/E/S, 304 companies in the S&P 500—representing 60.8% of the index—have reported Q2 2026 results so far, up from 26.4% a week earlier. Of these, 85.2% have exceeded analysts’ EPS expectations, slightly up from 84.8% the previous week and still above both the long-term average of 67.5% and the four-quarter average of 80%. Reported earnings are running 7.0% above estimates in aggregate, down 1.8 pp w/w and above the long-term average surprise of 4.4%, but slightly below the recent four-quarter average of 7.5%.

Against this backdrop, consensus expectations for S&P 500 Q2 EPS growth were revised sharply higher for a second consecutive week, to 47.7% y/y, or 44.2% excluding the Energy sector, from 38.8% and 35.3%, respectively, a week earlier. As in the previous week, when Alphabet’s investment gains distorted the headline figure, this week’s estimate was boosted by unexpected gains at Amazon and Microsoft. Amazon recorded $53.4 billion of pre-tax non-operating income, primarily related to its Anthropic investment, while Microsoft reported a $3.2 billion gain from its Anthropic stake. According to our calculations, excluding these investment gains would reduce estimated S&P 500 EPS growth to around 39.7% y/y, which would still represent an improvement from the previous week.

In the upcoming week beginning August 3, 136 S&P 500 companies are scheduled to report. Market attention will be particularly focused on the following high-profile earnings releases:

Global Markets

Globally, dollar-denominated country ETFs mostly advanced, with the global ex-U.S. equity index up about 1.6%, largely reflecting a 1.5% depreciation in the U.S. dollar. In local-currency terms, equity-market moves were less pronounced: the STOXX 600 rose 0.7%, the FTSE 100 gained 1.2%, the TOPIX slipped 0.2%, and the CSI 300 fell 1.3%.

ACWX rebounded from its rising 100-day moving average and climbed back above the 20-day line, easing some of the recent technical pressure. The ETF is now testing its 50-day average near 75.4, making the 75–75.5 area an important near-term dividing line between renewed strength and continued sideways trading. RSI has recovered to 52, showing that buyers have regained a slight edge without momentum becoming stretched. A sustained move above 75.5–76 would bring the June highs around 77–77.5 back into view, while initial support lies near 74.5–75, followed by the stronger 73–73.5 zone around the 100-day average.

Cryptocurrency Market

Major cryptocurrencies posted mixed performance, with Bitcoin falling 2.0% while total market capitalization declined 1.3%. The weakness intensified on Friday as momentum behind the Clarity Act faded ahead of the Senate’s August recess and disappointing Coinbase results pointed to softer retail trading activity. Joshua Lim of FalconX said funds were selling into rallies as expectations for the legislation diminished, while Coinbase shares tumbled 11% after its earnings. Heavy redemptions from U.S. spot Bitcoin ETFs then erased the week’s earlier inflows and ended a three-week streak of net additions, reinforcing the broader pullback from speculative assets.

Economic Indicators, Statistics and News

Several important macroeconomic indicators and economic news were published during the week:

US

The Fed kept the federal funds target at 3.50%–3.75% for a fifth consecutive meeting, but the vote shifted from a unanimous 12–0 in June to 9–3. Dallas Fed President Lorie Logan, Cleveland’s Beth Hammack and Minneapolis’s Neel Kashkari favored a 25 bp increase, while the policy statement otherwise repeated June’s assessment that economic activity was expanding at a solid pace and inflation remained above the 2% target. Their subsequent explanations showed a shared concern that waiting could eventually require more aggressive tightening. Hammack said inflation pressure was broadening and policy was not sufficiently restrictive, while Kashkari argued that repeated supply shocks and demand from data-center investment could entrench inflation. Logan said inflation appeared to be heading toward the mid-2% range rather than 2%, with solid employment, consumption and financial conditions suggesting that monetary policy was not restraining the economy. All three favored modest action now to reduce the risk of sharper increases later.

Warsh maintained that the hold did not signal a move toward easing. He reaffirmed the 2% target and acknowledged that higher rates could become part of the response if inflation remained elevated, but argued that the rise in market yields since June had already tightened financial conditions. The dissents and their subsequent explanations strengthened expectations that the next move will be upward: interest-rate swaps indicated about a 60% probability of a September hike, compared with roughly 40% before the decision, with one increase fully priced by December. Neil Dutta of Renaissance Macro described the hold as a temporary reprieve, while JPMorgan Asset Management’s Bob Michele saw the dissents as evidence that the committee was moving toward tighter policy.

Treasury trading reflected relief over the immediate hold but growing concern about the consequences of delaying action. Following the decision, the 2-year yield fell 6 bp to 4.23%, while the 10-year rose 5 bp to 4.66% and the 30-year climbed above 5.22%, its highest level since 2007. After the dissenters published on Friday their statements, shorter maturities reversed much of their initial rally, the 10-year yield exceeded 4.73% and the 30-year moved above 5.25%. The steepening suggested that investors initially reduced the probability of immediate tightening but demanded greater compensation for persistent inflation and the possibility of larger increases later. The 30-year breakeven rate also recorded its biggest daily rise since 2024, reinforcing the increase in long-term inflation risk.

Warsh’s communication strategy added to that uncertainty. He wants markets to respond more directly to economic data and has reduced forward guidance, yet markets still need to understand how the Fed will react to changing conditions. The problem became more pronounced when he said he was examining inflation measures beyond PCE without identifying them or explaining how they would influence policy. Former New York Fed President Bill Dudley supports shorter statements and less reliance on forecasts but argues that Warsh is withholding something more important: the Fed’s reaction function. Without that framework, investors must infer Fed policy while the Fed simultaneously treats market yields as evidence of appropriate tightening. This circular process risks increasing volatility, inflation-risk premiums and long-term yields even if the formal 2% target remains unchanged.

US GDP growth slowed to an annualized 1.5% in Q2 from 2.1% in Q1, but the BEA contribution data showed a much stronger domestic economy than the headline suggested. Consumer spending added 2.12 percentage points to growth, up from only 0.37 points in Q1, while fixed investment contributed another 1.20 points. These gains were offset by drags of 1.01 points from net exports, 0.67 points from inventories and 0.14 points from government spending. Final sales to private domestic purchasers rose 3.9%, more than double the previous quarter’s pace and the strongest since early 2023. AI remained an important investment driver, although its precise contribution cannot be isolated from official data: information-processing equipment, software and R&D—categories that include but are not limited to AI—together added 0.67 points, while industrial and transportation equipment contributed another 0.56 points. This supports Bloomberg Economics’ assessment that investment strength was broadening beyond AI. Bank of America economist Shruti Mishra added that broad gains across discretionary goods and services suggested Q1’s spending weakness was largely weather-related rather than the start of a sustained consumer slowdown.

US PCE inflation eased in June, although it remained above the Fed’s target. The BEA reported that the headline price index fell 0.1% m/m, while core PCE rose a weaker-than-expected 0.1%. On an annual basis, headline inflation slowed more noticeably to 3.7% from 4.1%, while core inflation edged down to 3.3% from 3.4%. Lower prices helped real consumer spending advance 0.4% m/m, matching its strongest increase since July 2025, although personal income and disposable income each grew by only 0.2%. The saving rate consequently fell to 2.7%, its lowest since 2022, suggesting that households partly maintained consumption by reducing their financial cushion. With tax refunds fading and gasoline prices rising again in July, Barclays economist Pooja Sriram cautioned that this support may be harder to sustain in Q3.

US labor costs showed no renewed acceleration in Q2, suggesting that the job market was not a major source of additional inflation pressure. The BLS Employment Cost Index increased 0.9% q/q and 3.4% y/y, while wages and salaries rose 0.9% over the quarter and 3.2% from a year earlier. Benefit costs increased more rapidly at 3.8% y/y, partly reflecting a 6.0% rise in private-sector health-benefit expenses. Inflation-adjusted private-sector wages declined 0.4% y/y, meaning that nominal pay growth continued to trail consumer prices. The absence of a stronger wage response despite robust hiring earlier in the quarter supports the view that labor supply and demand remained broadly balanced.

US consumer sentiment improved in July but remained weak by historical standards. The University of Michigan’s final index rose to a five-month high of 55.2 from 49.5 in June, exceeding the preliminary estimate of 54.4, with gains across income, age, education and political groups. Expectations and assessments of current conditions both strengthened, while views of the economy over the next five years reached a one-year high and buying conditions for durable goods were the best since October. Even so, sentiment remained 11% below its year-earlier level. Lower gasoline prices provided some relief during much of the survey period, with the July average declining to $3.95 from $4.05 in June, although a subsequent rebound above $4.10 may weigh on confidence in August. One-year inflation expectations eased to 4.2% from 4.6%, while the five-to-10-year measure held at 3.3%, still above its 2024 range. Survey comments about AI were negative overall, as concerns about employment outweighed recognition of possible productivity gains.

Eurozone

Euro-area GDP expanded 0.4% q/q in 2Q after stagnating in 1Q, twice the 0.2% Bloomberg survey consensus and the strongest increase in more than a year. Annual growth improved from 0.5% to 1.0%. According to Pantheon Macroeconomics’ calculations, Ireland’s volatile 3.9% rebound added around 0.1 percentage point to euro-area growth, but the expansion extended beyond Ireland. Spain again led the major economies at 0.7%, supported by household spending, exports, tourism, migration and EU funds, while Germany, France and Italy each grew 0.2%. Germany relied mainly on net exports as consumption slowed and investment declined, while France’s return to growth also included another fall in capital spending. The result therefore shows greater resilience to the energy shock, but domestic demand remained uneven and Spain continued to outperform the larger northern economies.

Euro-area HICP inflation rose to 2.9% y/y in July from 2.8%, matching the Bloomberg survey consensus, while prices increased 0.2% m/m. Energy remained the main source of pressure, accelerating from 8.5% to 10.0% y/y after renewed US-Iran hostilities lifted oil prices. However, underlying measures also firmed: inflation excluding energy, food, alcohol and tobacco increased from 2.4% to 2.5%, services inflation rose from 3.2% to 3.3%, and non-energy industrial-goods inflation advanced from 0.7% to 0.9%. By contrast, food, alcohol and tobacco inflation slowed from 1.5% to 1.2%, while inflation excluding energy remained unchanged at 2.2%. The July increase was therefore still led by energy, but the simultaneous acceleration in core goods and services made the report broader than a purely oil-driven rise.

The ECB kept rates unchanged in July after raising them by 25 bp in June, but stronger GDP and firmer inflation increased the likelihood of another move in September. Bloomberg Economics expects a further 25 bp hike, while Kamil Kovar of Moody’s Analytics said the combination of July inflation and developments in the Middle East had placed the ECB firmly on a tightening path. Several Governing Council members have expressed a similar bias, although Lagarde declined to pre-commit and the ECB will receive August inflation data and updated staff projections before deciding. The main uncertainty is whether elevated energy prices begin to influence wages and services inflation: current wage indicators remain reassuring, but some policymakers argue that waiting for second-round effects to become visible could leave the ECB responding too late.

Money markets assigned roughly a 90% probability to a 25 bp ECB increase in September and priced approximately 42 bp of cumulative tightening by year-end. The pricing reflects a combination of stronger-than-expected growth, headline inflation moving further above the 2% target and concern that elevated energy costs may persist. At the same time, less than two full increases were priced, indicating that investors still see uncertainty around the duration of the Middle East shock and whether its impact will spread beyond energy into underlying inflation.

UK

The BOE kept Bank Rate at 3.75% by a 6–3 vote, with Catherine Mann joining Megan Greene and Huw Pill in favor of a 25 bp increase. Despite the larger-than-expected hawkish minority, Governor Andrew Bailey stressed that the majority was not moving closer to a hike. The MPC saw clear evidence that domestic inflationary pressure was easing and little indication that the energy shock had yet affected broader wage and price-setting, although it retained guidance that it “stands ready to act” if these risks intensify. The committee’s divisions were two-sided: some members viewed higher rates as necessary insurance against persistent inflation, while Dave Ramsden and Alan Taylor indicated that cuts could return to consideration if the Middle East conflict ended quickly and domestic disinflation continued.

The July inflation outlook was materially less severe than the scenarios published in April. The BOE restored a central forecast in which CPI inflation rises from 2.6% to a peak of 3.2% late in 2026 before returning to around the 2% target next year. In April, the two less extreme scenarios had inflation peaking at 3.6%–3.7% at the end of 2026, while the adverse case reached 6.2% in early 2027. The corresponding July scenarios now show a milder peak of 3.0% and an adverse peak of 4.5% in 2Q 2027. This downward shift reflected softer-than-expected underlying inflation, slower indirect energy pass-through and less extreme energy assumptions: the oil price used in July’s central forecast averaged $78 per barrel, compared with about $100 before the April report. However, oil and gas prices had already risen above the July assumptions by the time of the policy decision, leaving the risks tilted above the central path.

The BOE’s central projection puts UK GDP growth at 1.1% in both 2026 and 2027, followed by 1.7% in 2028, with broadly similar outcomes across its energy scenarios. This is firmer than the April scenarios, which showed four-quarter growth by 2Q 2027 of only 0.8% in the two less severe cases and 0.5% in the adverse case. Nevertheless, the July forecast still describes a subdued economy: household consumption is projected to grow 1.0% in 2026 and 0.8% in 2027, while business investment is expected to contract 1.5% this year. Persistent spare capacity and restrictive financial conditions should limit firms’ ability to pass higher energy costs through to prices, but a prolonged shock could weaken real incomes and investment further.

Labor-market weakness remains an important counterweight to the inflation risk. The BOE expects unemployment to rise from an average of 4.8% in 2025 to 5.0% in 2026 and 5.3% in 2027, while private-sector regular wage growth is projected to slow to 3.0% by the end of 2026. Bailey characterized the UK as a “low hire, low fire” economy in which limited worker turnover is making it especially difficult for new entrants to find jobs; unemployment among people aged 16–24 has reached its highest level in more than a decade. The Bank has seen early signs that AI may be reducing some recruitment, particularly for professional roles, but does not regard it as the principal cause of the slowdown. Weak hiring, falling vacancies and softer wage growth reduce the risk that higher energy prices develop into a lasting wage-price cycle.

Short-dated gilts rallied after Bailey rejected the interpretation that the MPC was approaching a hike. The 2-year yield fell 11 bp to 4.34%, while markets reduced expected tightening by year-end to about 32 bp from 38 bp immediately before the announcement and cut the probability of a September increase to below 40% from almost 60%. Longer maturities lagged: the 10-year yield declined only 4 bp to 4.99%, and the 30-year yield was nearly unchanged at 5.73%, reflecting uncertainty around the government’s autumn Budget and future borrowing. The BOE also estimated that quantitative tightening has added 20–30 bp to the 10-year gilt yield, around 5 bp more than previously assessed, and will review the next phase of its balance-sheet reduction in September.

Asia

The BOJ kept its policy rate at 1.0% by an 8–1 vote, following June’s increase to the highest level since 1995. Hajime Takata favored an immediate rise to 1.25%, arguing that the bank should respond more quickly to inflation risks from overseas demand and global financial conditions. Governor Kazuo Ueda said underlying inflation was approaching the 2% target and that the cost of an upside surprise was becoming greater, leaving every meeting from September potentially open for another increase. He also indicated that the pace of tightening could accelerate if financial conditions remained too accommodative. However, the decision showed that most board members preferred to assess the impact of June’s move before tightening again.

The BOJ lowered its median core CPI forecast for fiscal 2026 to 2.5% from 2.8% in April, mainly because government subsidies will temporarily reduce electricity and gas bills. The forecasts for later years changed little: inflation is projected at 2.4% in fiscal 2027, up slightly from 2.3%, and at 2.0% in fiscal 2028, unchanged from April. Despite the lower near-term estimate, the bank expects core inflation to move clearly above 2% during the second half of fiscal 2026 as higher oil prices, yen depreciation and more expensive semiconductors feed into energy, goods and durable-product prices. Core inflation excluding fresh food and energy is forecast at 2.5% this fiscal year, only slightly below April’s 2.6%, showing that the downgrade mainly reflects subsidies rather than a weaker underlying trend. The BOJ consequently described inflation risks as tilted to the upside.

Japan’s growth projections were broadly unchanged from April. The BOJ expects real GDP to expand 0.6% in fiscal 2026, compared with 0.5% previously, followed by 0.8% in both fiscal 2027 and fiscal 2028; the April forecasts were 0.7% and 0.8%, respectively. Higher crude-oil costs are expected to restrain corporate profits and household purchasing power this year, but government support, accommodative financial conditions, stronger wages and global AI-related demand should prevent a sharper slowdown. The bank also changed its assessment of growth risks from tilted to the downside to broadly balanced, indicating that the Middle East shock has been less damaging than initially feared.

Labor shortages remain central to the BOJ’s expectation that inflation will become sustainable. The bank expects nominal wage growth to remain near its current pace after another strong spring wage round, while companies continue passing higher labor and import costs into selling prices. From fiscal 2027, easing energy pressure and continued wage gains are expected to strengthen the cycle from income to consumption. This wage-price mechanism should bring underlying inflation into line with the 2% target between the second half of fiscal 2026 and fiscal 2027, although tighter labor supply also creates a risk that wage and price growth exceeds the bank’s baseline assumptions.

Currency developments have become an increasingly important influence on the timing of the next rate increase. Japanese authorities appeared to intervene in the foreign-exchange market shortly before the BOJ decision, reportedly with US assistance, highlighting official concern about the yen’s depreciation and its effect on imported prices. The BOJ noted that exchange-rate movements now pass through to inflation more readily because companies have become more willing to raise prices. Ueda did not explicitly guide markets toward a September increase, but JPMorgan Securities’ Ayako Fujita said the decision would depend heavily on the yen and regarded a hike by October as increasingly likely. The combination of currency volatility, accommodative financial conditions and upside inflation risk therefore keeps the September meeting live even after the July hold.

China’s business activity weakened broadly in July, with the Composite PMI falling from 50.6 to 49.3, below the 50 threshold separating expansion from contraction. The official Manufacturing PMI dropped from 50.3 to 49.2, missing the 50.1 Bloomberg survey consensus and contracting for the first time in five months. Manufacturing output slipped to 49.9, while new orders fell 2.7 points to 48.5, their weakest level in more than three years according to Bloomberg. The industrial divide remained pronounced: high-tech and equipment manufacturing expanded at 53.3 and 51.4, respectively, while consumer-goods and energy-intensive industries registered only 47.8 and 47.0. The results indicate that strong technology and export-related production has not been sufficient to offset weak domestic demand and traditional manufacturing.

Non-manufacturing activity also moved into contraction, with its PMI declining from 50.2 to 49.0. The Services PMI fell from 50.4 to 49.3 as strength in aviation, accommodation, tourism and entertainment was outweighed by weakness in wholesale trade, financial services, real estate and capital-market activity. Construction deteriorated more sharply, with its PMI dropping 2.0 points to 47.0, the lowest level since the beginning of the pandemic according to Bloomberg. Extreme heat, flooding and heavy rainfall delayed projects, but the decline also suggested that government infrastructure spending had yet to recover from its weak first-half pace. Expectations were more positive than current conditions, with the services outlook index holding at 56.0 and the construction equivalent rising to 51.8.

The weak PMIs strengthen the case for faster fiscal support, although the Politburo stopped short of announcing a new large-scale stimulus package. Officials instead pledged to accelerate government spending, deploy proceeds from existing bond issuance and advance the Six Networks infrastructure program linked to AI development and economic resilience. According to Macquarie, the unused bond quota available for the second half is 1.3 trillion yuan larger than a year earlier, equivalent to 1.8% of period GDP, while another 800 billion yuan remains undrawn through new policy-financing instruments. Goldman Sachs estimated that the government could later access a further 1.8 trillion yuan of unused bond quotas from previous years. The near-term policy impact will therefore depend mainly on how quickly already-authorized funds reach infrastructure and other domestic-demand projects.

Monetary support is less certain because higher oil prices and renewed factory-gate inflation have reduced the case for lower interest rates. The Politburo said monetary tools would be adjusted when appropriate, but the median Bloomberg survey expects the PBOC to keep its policy rate unchanged through 2026 and 2027. Economists consider a reduction in banks’ reserve requirement ratio more likely in 4Q, as this would release liquidity without delivering as strong an easing signal as a rate cut. However, Henry Hao of Commerzbank said the deeper contraction increased the probability of a rate reduction before year-end, while Ding Shuang of Standard Chartered argued that the July figures added urgency to the policy response. Fiscal acceleration currently appears to be the authorities’ preferred first step, with broader monetary easing more likely if activity fails to recover.

Foreign Exchange Markets

The U.S. dollar weakened broadly over the week, with the DXY index falling 1.5%. The decline reflected both a modest reduction in expected near-term Fed tightening and a sharp rebound in the yen following suspected official intervention. The euro and pound gained 1.4% and 1.2%, respectively, while USD/JPY fell 3.8%, making the Japanese currency the largest contributor to the dollar’s retreat.

Japan and the U.S. appear to have mounted a coordinated effort to support the yen after it weakened to ¥163.99 per dollar, its lowest level since 1986. Japan’s suspected intervention on Thursday drove USD/JPY from about ¥162.80 to ¥157.95 in roughly 50 minutes, producing an intraday yen gain of as much as 3.3%. Estimates based on BOJ settlement data vary widely: Nikkei calculated purchases of ¥6–7 trillion, Bloomberg put the operation near ¥8.45 trillion, and Reuters estimated that it may have reached $59 billion. The exact amount will not be known until Japan’s Finance Ministry releases its monthly report, and officials have not formally confirmed the action. Japan reportedly intervened again on Friday, while the Financial Times said the New York Fed sold euros to buy yen for the U.S. Treasury. A photographed note belonging to Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent referred to purchases of $5–10 billion, although Washington disclosed no transaction size.

USD/JPY ended Friday around 157.58, its largest weekly decline since Japan’s July 2024 intervention episode. In that earlier operation, authorities spent ¥5.53 trillion buying yen on July 11–12 and initially pushed the exchange rate from 161.76 to 157.30. Possible U.S. participation makes renewed speculative selling of the yen more risky and gives the latest intervention greater short-term credibility. However, persistent interest-rate and fiscal pressures suggest that official action may be more effective at slowing the yen’s depreciation than reversing its broader trend.

Commodities and Energy Markets

The commodities complex ended the week mostly lower.

Debt and Fixed Income Markets

According to CME data, the implied Fed funds rate curve shifted lower at the front end but was little changed further out, leaving the implied policy rate for January 2028 around 1 bp below the prior week’s level.

The repricing was not straightforwardly dovish. The probability of a 25 bp hike in September rose to 67.0% from 57.3%, but the market simultaneously removed the roughly 25% chance of a larger 50 bp move that had been priced a week earlier. This reduced the expected size of near-term tightening, even though a standard quarter-point increase became more likely. The probability of no change therefore rose to 33.0% from 17.8%, while the expected timing of a second hike shifted from December to January. In total, futures now imply around 37 bp of cumulative tightening by year-end 2026, down from 45 bp a week earlier.

The Treasury market reflected a related but different split. Shorter maturities are most sensitive to the expected path of Fed policy, so the removal of the jumbo-hike risk pushed the 1-year yield down 8 bp to 4.03%. Longer-dated yields, however, depend not only on the expected policy rate but also on inflation uncertainty and the additional compensation investors require for holding bonds over many years. Those pressures increased as oil prices rose, three Fed officials dissented in favor of an immediate hike, and Chair Kevin Warsh provided little guidance on how the Fed would respond if inflation remained elevated. Investors therefore saw less risk of an unusually large move in the near term, but more risk that delayed action could allow inflation to persist and ultimately require rates to remain higher for longer. The 10-year yield rose 5 bp to 4.73%, while the 30-year climbed 11 bp to 5.27%, its highest level since 2007. Demand for protection against a further long-end selloff also increased sharply, with options positioning targeting 10-year yields near 4.9% and 30-year yields as high as 5.42%.

You can find more articles in our Telegram channel at https://t.me/atranicapital_eng

Data are through the July 28 U.S. close and July 29 Korean close, unless stated otherwise.

On Wednesday, SK Hynix reported a 557% year-over-year increase in operating profit. Its shares closed 9.6% lower.

The stock had fallen almost 20% intraday. The KOSPI was briefly down more than 12% and closed 6% lower, extending its two-day drop to about 16%. Trading was halted for a second straight session, a first in the index’s history, and the KOSPI was almost 38% below its June 22 level.

Strong earnings can still disappoint when expectations are even stronger. SK Hynix missed elevated forecasts and said its 2026 investment would exceed ₩40 trillion. Yet the scale of the reaction pointed to something broader: South Korea has become one of the first liquid markets to price changes in the global AI trade each day.

It is tempting to call the KOSPI a proxy for the entire semiconductor industry. A more precise description is that Korea has become the opening bell for AI memory and semiconductor risk. That is not the same as being a substitute for SOX, but it is still a major change.

The rally that preceded the selloff makes the point. At the June 22 U.S. close, the iShares MSCI South Korea ETF (EWY) was up 125.3% YTD. The iShares Semiconductor ETF (SOXX) had gained 117.5% and was at an all-time high, while EWY had peaked one session earlier. By July 28, their gains had fallen to 55.8% and 63.2%, respectively, while the S&P 500 was still up 8.7%.

Korea’s correlation with U.S. chips has surged

Bloomberg has reported recently that the 60-day correlation between KOSPI and Nasdaq 100 returns had risen to 0.46, close to a two-year high and almost three times its five-year average of 0.16. The shift is also changing investment routines: fund managers in London, New York and Tokyo now check Seoul before their own markets open. PineBridge portfolio manager Hani Redha put it neatly: “We are all Korean investors now.”

My calculations using three years of daily returns tell a similar story. The latest 60-session correlations were 0.48 with SOX, 0.45 with the Nasdaq 100 and 0.39 with the S&P 500—roughly three to four times their average readings over that period. More importantly, Korea’s relationship was strongest with semiconductors and weakest with the broad U.S. market.

The time-zone comparison is even more revealing.

Over the latest 30 sessions, the same-date correlation between KOSPI and SOX was about 0.65, compared with 0.56 for the Nasdaq 100 and 0.39 for the S&P 500. Because Seoul closes well before U.S. cash trading ends, the Korean close comes first in each pair.

Pairing today’s KOSPI move with the previous U.S. session produces a very different result: all three 30-day correlations have fallen to around zero. The 60-day lagged readings remain near 0.3 because they still include the earlier period when KOSPI was more closely related to the previous Wall Street session. The shorter window is therefore more useful for showing the recent change, provided it is compared with the same 30-day window above.

This does not prove that Seoul predicts New York: Korean investors can watch U.S. futures, and both markets respond to the same news. It does show, however, that Korea has recently been more than an echo of the previous Wall Street session.

Why Korea carries so much information about chips

Start with the weights. On June 22, Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix represented 50.54% of the iShares MSCI South Korea ETF (EWY). By July 28, after both stocks had fallen sharply, their combined weight had declined to 43.18%. Half of an ostensibly diversified country fund had effectively become a two-stock memory bet.

The market structure reflects the economy. Korea’s Ministry of Trade reported a record $253.9 billion of ICT exports in the first half. Semiconductors and solid-state drives accounted for 83.7% of that total, while semiconductor exports rose 162.5% y/y. ICT products exceeded half of Korea’s total exports for the first time.

Korea also controls much of the industry’s most constrained product. TrendForce estimates that Samsung and SK Hynix held a combined 67.3% of global DRAM revenue in Q1 2026. Their position is even stronger in high-bandwidth memory, which feeds data to AI accelerators: TrendForce projected the two companies to account for 78% of global HBM bit output this year. Together with the conventional DRAM and storage required by AI servers, that made Korea an unusually direct way to invest in the memory bottleneck.

Memory’s high fixed costs magnify the cycle: stronger demand, higher prices and fuller factories can make profit grow much faster than revenue. Goldman Sachs has forecast 300% earnings growth for the Korean market in 2026. But suppliers are now increasingly sensitive to whether AI investment can keep accelerating. As I argued in the recent article “The AI Boom Is Real. So Is the Risk of Overbuilding It”, the question is no longer whether demand exists, but whether the spending can produce adequate returns and continue growing fast enough to satisfy the expectations already reflected in valuations.

That concentration explains most of EWY’s recent decline. A simple starting-weight attribution suggests that Samsung and SK Hynix contributed 23.2 percentage points of the ETF’s 30.9% loss between June 22 and July 28—roughly 75%. The estimate is approximate, but the message is clear: two stocks drove about three quarters of the move.

Leverage made the signal louder

That fundamental sensitivity collided with a local market experiment. Leveraged and inverse products tied to individual Korean stocks began trading on May 27, with most linked to Samsung or SK Hynix.

They grew quickly. By early July, the two chipmakers and their associated leveraged products accounted for more than 70% of all trading value in Korea’s roughly $4.3 trillion equity market, according to CLSA estimates cited by Bloomberg. Their share reached 84% on one late-June session and was still 73% in early July.

Daily-reset 2x products must buy after gains and sell after losses to maintain their target exposure. Once they become large relative to normal liquidity, those mechanical flows can reinforce both rallies and selloffs.

Regulators were already uneasy. On July 16, the Financial Services Commission stopped new single-stock leveraged listings and advertising, tightened premium and discount rules, raised the minimum cash deposit from ₩10 million to ₩30 million and expanded mandatory education. The regulator explicitly warned about larger investor losses and greater volatility in memory-chip shares.

The July 28–29 selloff showed why. Trading was halted for 20 minutes on both days. On Wednesday, retail investors sold about ₩2 trillion of shares, more than foreign investors. Most of the new leveraged chip products had already lost around 60% or more since launch.

The KOSPI was now telling two stories at once. One was global: investors were reassessing the price they were willing to pay for AI growth. The other was local: a crowded, leveraged market was unwinding. Both matter when Seoul is used as a signal for the rest of the world.

A useful proxy, with limits

KOSPI is not simply SOX with a different time zone. Korea is heavily exposed to memory, while the U.S. index also includes chip designers, foundries and equipment suppliers. Taiwan remains the clearer listed proxy for advanced foundry manufacturing, and Japan has more exposure to equipment and materials. Korean shares also respond to the won, domestic policy, Chinese demand and local leverage.

South Korea has nevertheless become the clearest early-session gauge of the AI-memory cycle and an important indicator of broader semiconductor risk. Its benchmark weights, export structure and recent cross-market correlations all support that conclusion. But concentration and leverage can make the signal louder than the underlying fundamentals. A sharp move in Seoul now deserves attention; it should not automatically be treated as a forecast for Wall Street. The key question is whether Korea is repricing AI demand or liquidating a crowded trade. Often it is some of both.

You can find more articles in our Telegram channel at https://t.me/atranicapital_eng

Almost all of the damage came on Thursday, when Alphabet’s earnings shifted the market’s focus from AI demand to the rising cost of meeting it. Google Cloud revenue surged 82%, but Alphabet raised its 2026 capital-spending forecast to $195–205 billion, reported negative free cash flow for the first time as a public company, and indicated that spending would rise again in 2027. Investors quickly extended those concerns to the other hyperscalers, sending Alphabet, Meta, Amazon, Microsoft and Tesla sharply lower. According to Bloomberg, the Magnificent 7 lost $797 billion in that session alone, its worst day since April 2025.

The reaction looked less like a rejection of the AI growth story than a sharp increase in the hurdle for future spending. Demand remains strong, but investors are now asking whether revenue can keep growing faster than capex, depreciation and financing costs. As Jason Lemire of Bold Wealth Partners noted, hyperscalers are becoming more asset-heavy and harder to value as traditional cash-generating businesses. Matt Maley of Miller Tabak described Alphabet’s decline as another example of an emerging “sell the news” pattern ahead of results from Microsoft, Meta, Amazon and Apple next week.

Positioning, however, provides an important counterweight. Hedge funds had already been cutting U.S. technology exposure at a record pace before Alphabet reported. Goldman Sachs estimates that sector exposure fell by roughly 10% in market-value terms over eight weeks, while the Nasdaq 100 futures long-short ratio dropped to a 17-year low. JPMorgan also estimated that hedge-fund positioning in the Magnificent 7 was near the 25th percentile since 2018, while short interest across the broader S&P 500 remained close to a record. That does not remove the concerns around AI returns, but it does mean bearish positioning is crowded enough to create the potential for a sharp reversal if the remaining hyperscalers avoid another major capex increase or offer clearer evidence of improving cash returns.

Global equities were mixed, with the global ex-U.S. index edging up 0.1%.

Macro data were stronger. The average G4 Flash Composite PMI rose to 52.7 from 51.0 in July, a five-month high, as growth accelerated across all four economies. The U.S. remained the strongest at 53.6, driven by services, while the eurozone and UK returned to expansion and Japan improved to 53.1 as factory output grew at its fastest pace in more than 12 years. Still, some of the strength reflected temporary support from World Cup spending, warm weather and precautionary stockbuilding. Inflation eased in the eurozone and UK but remained elevated in Japan and accelerated sharply in the U.S., leaving central banks with little room to relax.

Crypto was broadly stable. Bitcoin edged up 0.3%, while total market capitalization slipped 0.1%, showing that the improvement remained concentrated in the largest token rather than spreading across the market.

Rates markets turned more hawkish. CME data show the implied Fed funds curve shifted about 13 bp higher over the next 18 months, driven by a 27% two-week surge in Brent and evidence that the U.S. economy remains strong enough to absorb tighter policy. The probability of a July hike jumped to 34.2% from 12.8%, while markets continued to price a likely move in September and began assigning meaningful odds to a second hike in December.

Treasury yields rose across the curve. The 1-year climbed 12 bp to 4.11%, the 10-year gained 13 bp to 4.68%, and the 30-year rose 9 bp to 5.16%, according to Bloomberg. The move suggests investors were pricing both a higher near-term Fed path and a more persistent inflation premium. Conning’s Cindy Beaulieu argued that the 10-year yield may be moving toward a higher range near 5%, reflecting an economy that may require tighter financial conditions to avoid overheating.

For comprehensive insights and deeper context, please refer to the full article.

US Stock Market

U.S. equities declined for a second week, but the headline indexes again understated the concentration of the move. The S&P 500 fell 0.6% and the Nasdaq Composite lost 2.1%, while the Magnificent 7 dropped 3.9%. According to our calculations, the group shed about $893 billion in market value over the week, more than twice the roughly $400 billion decline in the S&P 500. That implies the rest of the index gained by approximately the same amount the benchmark lost. The internal rotation was also clear: large-cap growth fell 1.1%, while large-cap value edged higher and mid-cap growth advanced 0.7%.

Almost all of the Magnificent 7’s damage came on Thursday after Alphabet’s earnings shifted the focus from AI demand to the escalating cost of meeting it. Alphabet reported exceptional growth at Google Cloud, but raised its 2026 capital-spending forecast to $195–205 billion, turned free cash flow negative for the first time as a public company and indicated that spending would rise again in 2027. Investors quickly extended those concerns to the other hyperscalers, sending Alphabet, Meta, Amazon, Microsoft and Tesla sharply lower. According to Bloomberg, Magnificent 7 cohort lost $797 billion in that session alone, its worst day since April 2025.

The selloff therefore looked less like a rejection of the AI growth story than a sharp increase in the hurdle for further spending. Google Cloud revenue surged 82%, showing that demand remains strong, but investors are now asking whether revenue can continue to grow faster than capital expenditure, depreciation and financing costs. As Jason Lemire of Bold Wealth Partners noted, the hyperscalers are becoming more asset-heavy and harder to value as traditional cash-generating businesses. Matt Maley of Miller Tabak described Alphabet’s reaction as another example of the emerging “sell the news” pattern ahead of results from Microsoft, Meta, Amazon and Apple.

Positioning adds an important counterweight. Hedge funds had already been cutting U.S. technology exposure at a record pace before Alphabet reported, with Goldman Sachs estimating a roughly 10% reduction in market value over eight weeks and signs of capitulation beginning to emerge. The Nasdaq 100 futures long-short ratio had fallen to a 17-year low, while JPMorgan estimated that hedge-fund positioning in the Magnificent 7 was near the 25th percentile since 2018. At the broader market level, short interest in S&P 500 stocks was also close to a record. This does not remove the fundamental concerns around AI returns, but it does mean bearish positioning is already crowded enough to create the potential for a sharp reversal if the remaining hyperscalers avoid another large increase in capex or provide clearer evidence of improving cash returns.

Sector performance improved beneath the surface over the week, with eight of eleven sectors posting gains and only Communication Services, Consumer Discretionary and Consumer Staples finishing lower. Energy led the advance, rising 3.4% as U.S. crude climbed more than 9% amid renewed escalation in the U.S.–Iran conflict, lifting Exxon (+6.5% w/w), Chevron (+4.0%) and ConocoPhillips (+4.8%). Utilities, Industrials, Materials and Real Estate also advanced, while Technology edged higher as gains in Nvidia, Broadcom, AMD and Micron offset weakness in Microsoft and several software names. By contrast, Consumer Discretionary fell 5.2%, largely because Tesla plunged 17.8% after weaker-than-expected earnings and negative free cash flow intensified concerns about its heavy spending on AI, robotaxis and robotics; Amazon’s 6.1% decline added further pressure. Communication Services dropped 3.9% as Alphabet and Meta both fell nearly 8%. Overall, sector breadth was relatively healthy, but sharp post-earnings losses in a few mega-cap companies kept the headline market under pressure.

The Fear & Greed Index edged up to 39 from 37 but remained firmly in Fear. The improvement was narrow: safe-haven demand shifted from Fear to Greed and junk-bond demand improved to Neutral, suggesting some return of risk appetite in credit and relative stock-versus-bond performance. However, market momentum, stock-price strength and options positioning remained in Fear, while market breadth stayed in Extreme Fear. The overall picture therefore points to a modest stabilization in sentiment rather than a convincing recovery, with participation beneath the headline indexes still notably weak.

SPY came under renewed pressure, falling further below its 20- and 50-day moving averages before finding support around the important 736–737 breakout level. The broader uptrend remains intact, with the ETF still comfortably above its rising 100- and 200-day averages, but the near-term picture has weakened. RSI slipped to 45, showing that sellers have gained the upper hand without pushing the market into oversold territory. Holding 736–737 would keep the recent decline within a broader consolidation, while a clear break below it could expose the 730 area. On the upside, SPY would need to recover above 745–746 to improve the tone, with the June high near 758–760 remaining the main resistance.

The earnings season is gaining momentum. According to LSEG I/B/E/S, 132 companies in the S&P 500—representing 26.4% of the index—have reported Q2 2026 results so far, up from 9.8% a week earlier. Of these, 84.8% have exceeded analysts’ EPS expectations, down from 89.8% the previous week but still above both the long-term average of 67.5% and the four-quarter average of 80%. Reported earnings are running 8.8% above estimates in aggregate, down 3.5 pp w/w but still ahead of the long-term average surprise of 4.4% and the recent four-quarter average of 7.5%.

Against this backdrop, consensus expectations for S&P 500 EPS growth have been revised sharply higher to 38.8% y/y for Q2, or 35.3% excluding the Energy sector, from 26.0% and 22.0%, respectively, a week earlier. The headline increase, however, is heavily distorted by Alphabet’s investment gains. The company reported GAAP EPS of $9.11, but approximately $6.26 per share came from the after-tax effect of higher valuations on its equity holdings rather than its operating businesses. Alphabet recorded nearly $99 billion of pre-tax investment gains, which added $77.1 billion to net income after the related tax expense. The increase appears to have been driven largely by its Anthropic and SpaceX holdings: Alphabet’s private-company investments were valued at about $124.3 billion, primarily reflecting Anthropic, while its SpaceX shares were valued at $94.1 billion following the company’s IPO.

According to our calculations, excluding Alphabet’s investment gains would reduce estimated S&P 500 EPS growth to around 25.1% y/y. That would still represent a strong quarter, but it would be slightly below the 26.0% growth rate expected a week earlier and far less dramatic than the headline 38.8%. The distinction matters because these largely unrealized gains reflect changes in the value of assets Alphabet continues to hold and could reverse in future periods; they do not represent a comparable acceleration in underlying corporate earnings.

In the upcoming week beginning July 27, 175 S&P 500 companies are scheduled to report, including four Magnificent 7 members: Meta Platforms and Microsoft on Wednesday, followed by Amazon and Apple on Thursday. Market attention will be particularly focused on the following high-profile earnings releases:

Global Markets

Global country ETFs were mixed, with the global ex-U.S. equity index edging higher by 0.1%.

ACWX stabilized after testing support near its rising 100-day moving average, but the rebound lacked strength and the ETF remains below the 20- and 50-day lines around 75–75.5. That keeps the near-term tone cautious, even as the broader uptrend remains intact above the 100- and 200-day averages. RSI edged up to 45 but remains below the neutral 50 level, suggesting selling pressure has eased without buyers regaining control. The 73–73.3 area remains the key support zone, followed by 71.5–72 if it gives way, while a sustained recovery above 75–75.5 would improve the picture and bring the June highs around 77–77.5 back into view.

Cryptocurrency Market

Major cryptocurrencies posted mixed performance as the market was pulled in opposite directions by weaker global risk sentiment and renewed hopes for passage of the long-awaited Clarity Act. Bitcoin edged up 0.3%, while total crypto market capitalization slipped 0.1%, suggesting that the improvement remained concentrated in the largest token rather than spreading across the market.

The legislative backdrop became more supportive after Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent said lawmakers were at the “1-yard line” and urged Congress to act before the August recess. Matt Maley of Miller Tabak argued that Bitcoin has been building a base since early June and that passage could provide the catalyst for a break above its recent range. Still, the political path remains difficult. Republicans are preparing a Senate vote, but they need at least seven Democratic supporters, and negotiations remain stuck over ethics rules related to President Trump’s crypto interests, consumer protection, illicit finance and stablecoin rewards. Prediction-market odds of passage this year have therefore fallen to roughly one in three, leaving the Clarity Act as a potential upside catalyst rather than a settled outcome.

Economic Indicators, Statistics and News

Several important macroeconomic indicators and economic news were published during the week:

Global

· Business activity across the G4 economies strengthened markedly in July, with the simple average of flash composite PMIs rising to 52.7 from 51.0 in June, a five-month high. Growth accelerated across all four economies, marking a clear recovery from the weakness seen after the outbreak of the Middle East war. The improvement was increasingly driven by services, while manufacturing continued to outperform for a seventh consecutive month. However, temporary support from the FIFA World Cup, unusually warm weather and precautionary stockbuilding means that the strength of July’s rebound should be interpreted cautiously.

The United States remained the strongest performer, with the Composite PMI rising to 53.6 from 51.9, an eight-month high. The acceleration was driven entirely by services, supported by stronger domestic demand, World Cup-related hospitality spending and increased business investment, while manufacturing growth slowed as the inventory-building boost began to fade. Employment returned to modest growth and business confidence improved, but supply-chain disruption intensified and selling-price inflation reached its highest since August 2022. Chris Williamson said the survey was consistent with annualized GDP growth of around 2% at the start of Q3, compared with roughly 1.2% in Q2, but warned that temporary event-related spending and worsening supply and price pressures could make the improvement short-lived.

The eurozone and UK both returned to expansion. The eurozone Composite PMI rose to 51.9 from 50.0, a five-month high, as services recovered after three months of decline and manufacturing output expanded at the fastest pace since March 2022. New orders and employment also increased, with the survey pointing to GDP growth of around 0.3% q/q, while easing cost pressures reduced the immediate case for further ECB tightening. The UK Composite PMI rebounded to 52.1 from 49.3, supported by renewed services growth and the strongest manufacturing output expansion since September 2024. Manufacturing benefited from improving exports, AI and data-center investment and defense spending, although part of the factory upturn continued to reflect precautionary stockbuilding. UK price pressures eased for a third month, but employment fell again and services growth remained constrained by cost-of-living pressures.

Japan’s Composite PMI edged up to 53.1 from 52.8, the strongest reading since February, as manufacturing output rose at the fastest pace in more than 12 years and new factory orders recorded their sharpest increase in just over five years. Services growth moderated, however, and overall business confidence weakened. Cost inflation eased slightly but remained elevated, while selling-price inflation accelerated to near its survey high as service providers passed higher expenses on to customers. Usamah Bhatti of S&P Global noted that demand from the semiconductor and AI industries continued to support manufacturing expectations, but warned that stockbuilding, supply disruption and high energy and raw-material costs remained important risks.

Taken together, the July PMIs point to a broad-based improvement in developed-market growth, but not yet an unambiguous return to sustainable expansion. Services have begun to recover, particularly in the US and Europe, while manufacturing remains partly supported by temporary inventory accumulation. Price trends also diverged: inflation moderated in the eurozone and UK, remained close to record levels in Japan and accelerated sharply in the US. S&P Global cautioned that renewed escalation in the Middle East and fresh tariff measures could reverse some of July’s gains by lifting energy costs, worsening supply shortages and weakening demand. With G4 price gauges still above levels consistent with central-bank targets, the rebound in activity is likely to reinforce a cautious or tighter policy bias despite lingering questions over its durability.

· The US has rebuilt a broad tariff floor by imposing duties of 10% to 12.5% on imports from almost 60 economies, using Section 301 of the Trade Act of 1974 and allegations that trading partners have failed to prevent forced labor in their supply chains. The measures took effect as a temporary 10% global levy expired, avoiding any interruption in tariff protection after the Supreme Court invalidated an earlier regime. The EU and Taiwan are capped at 10%, while imports from Japan, South Korea and Switzerland are generally capped at 12.5% under existing trade agreements; India received a 10% rate instead of the proposed 12.5%. Fuels, food and fertilizers are exempt, as are products such as automobiles, metals and pharmaceuticals already covered by sector-specific duties, and qualifying trade within North America is also excluded. A separate Section 301 investigation into excess manufacturing capacity could produce additional tariffs, potentially layered on top of the new rates.

Several US allies rejected the forced-labor justification but initially avoided retaliation. Australia called the tariffs inconsistent with its free-trade agreement, Singapore said they lacked an economic basis, and New Zealand disputed the claim that forced-labor goods have a meaningful role in its economy. Japan is seeking confirmation that its effective tariff burden will remain within the terms agreed with Washington last year, while the EU said its 10% ceiling was consistent with its bilateral deal. Some exemptions and quotas should limit the practical impact, particularly for products already receiving preferential treatment, while Bloomberg Economics expects only a marginal change in the pressure on China’s exports and growth. The dispute may nevertheless encourage Asian economies to reduce their reliance on the US market through closer trade links with one another.

The new tariff structure is already being challenged by US importers in two lawsuits before the Court of International Trade. The plaintiffs argue that Section 301 does not authorize the administration to apply a near-universal import tax based on broad claims about forced labor without demonstrating how the practices of each country restrict US commerce. One case seeks class-action status for all importers required to pay the duties. The litigation follows the Supreme Court’s rejection of earlier tariffs imposed under emergency powers and comes while customs authorities are processing claims connected with roughly $166 billion collected under that previous system. Section 301 is generally regarded as a stronger legal foundation, but the cases leave uncertainty over whether the administration followed the country-specific procedures required by the statute.

Although the latest tariffs largely preserve the existing level of protection rather than creating a new shock, their longer-term economic effect remains uncertain. Global equities showed little reaction because the change had been widely anticipated, but further duties linked to excess industrial capacity could raise the overall tariff burden and create a more significant drag on growth. The inflation risk is also more difficult to dismiss while the Iran war is already increasing energy and commodity costs. According to a YouGov survey, 72% of almost 9,700 US adults believe Trump’s tariffs have raised the prices they pay, making the policy politically sensitive ahead of the midterm elections.

The revenue and negotiating leverage provided by tariffs may make them difficult for a future administration to remove completely. The Tax Policy Center estimates that the measures could generate about $179 billion in 2026 and approximately $1.7 trillion over the next decade, although receipts are expected to decline as buyers move away from taxed imports. The current tariff structure is projected to replace less than 60% of the revenue lost when the Supreme Court invalidated the earlier levies. Tariffs may narrow the budget deficit directly, but weaker economic growth could offset part of that benefit by making the debt burden harder to reduce relative to GDP. A future president could therefore ease selected duties to lower consumer costs or repair relations with allies while retaining much of the broader framework.

· The latest phase of the US-Iran conflict produced 13 consecutive nights of US strikes before Washington appeared to pause the campaign on July 25. The attacks targeted Iranian command centers, missile and drone sites, air defenses, communications networks and coastal military infrastructure, while Iran retaliated against US bases and regional facilities in Jordan, Kuwait, Bahrain and Iraq. The American death toll since the war began on February 28 reached 18, including personnel killed during the latest escalation, while Iran said the renewed US strikes had killed more than 50 people and wounded over 500. Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth argued that Iran’s military was at its weakest point, but acknowledged that it retained significant capabilities and gave no timetable for ending the war. The widening range of targets and continuing Iranian retaliation indicate that air power has weakened Tehran’s forces without yet compelling it to accept Washington’s conditions.

Diplomatic contacts continued without producing an immediate route back to the ceasefire. Pakistan and Qatar conveyed proposals that reportedly included a 10-day truce and a return to the positions held before July 9, when disagreements over control of the Strait of Hormuz caused the interim agreement to unravel. President Donald Trump alternated between threatening larger attacks and saying that the US remained willing to listen, while Iranian officials defended negotiations against domestic hardliners. President Masoud Pezeshkian said Iran’s new supreme leader was taking a larger role in state strategy, including policy toward Hormuz, but the leader’s limited public presence and pressure from factions demanding retaliation complicated Tehran’s decision-making. The central obstacle remained unchanged: the US demanded unrestricted navigation through the strait, while Iran insisted on retaining authority over maritime traffic.

The war’s economic risk increased as disruption spread from the Strait of Hormuz to the Red Sea. Traffic through Hormuz, which normally handles about one-fifth of global crude oil and LNG flows, remained largely paralyzed, with total Gulf shipments through the strait and alternative pipelines falling to roughly two-thirds of prewar levels. Military specialists cited by the Financial Times estimated that reopening the route by force could require several weeks of as many as 150 to 200 strikes per night, and shipowners would still need confidence that vessels could operate safely. The Houthis then attacked Saudi tankers, threatened vessels using Saudi ports and claimed strikes near Yanbu and Jizan, placing at risk the main Saudi export route bypassing Hormuz. Brent rose about 27% over two weeks and closed at $96.78 per barrel on July 24 after briefly moving above $100, while US gasoline exceeded $4 per gallon.

Washington’s Gulf allies became increasingly frustrated as Iranian attacks damaged regional infrastructure and disrupted their economic plans. Kuwait’s power and desalination facilities were targeted, energy tankers linked to Saudi Arabia, Qatar and the UAE came under attack, and flights across the region were repeatedly interrupted. Gulf governments agreed on the need to restore secure navigation but differed over the military response: some concluded that Iran would not loosen its control of Hormuz without stronger US action, while Qatar continued to favor immediate de-escalation. The effective closure of the strait forced several exporters to curtail shipments and widened fiscal deficits, threatening investment strategies centered on AI, finance and tourism. Relations were further strained by provisions in the interim agreement that could release frozen Iranian assets and establish a $300 billion reconstruction fund, to which none of the six Gulf Cooperation Council members had committed funding.

Domestic opposition increased as the conflict became longer, more expensive and less clearly defined. The House voted 214–208 to call for an end to US military action, with four Republicans joining Democrats, although the chamber separately advanced a $95 billion budget framework largely intended to finance the war. In the Senate, a procedural motion for another war-powers resolution failed 49–47. Public support was also weak: a Quinnipiac poll found that 60% of Americans considered the war not worth its cost, compared with 34% who regarded it as worthwhile. Higher oil and gasoline prices added to the political pressure before the November midterm elections, while the expansion of the conflict to the Red Sea made it harder for the administration to present a clear endpoint.

The direct cost of the war had reached approximately $37.5 billion over five months, according to Hegseth, prompting the administration to request $67 billion in supplemental funding. About $21.3 billion was intended for personnel, fuel shortages and replacement of equipment used in operations, while almost $46 billion was sought for munitions, hypersonic weapons and counter-drone systems. Democratic appropriators questioned the request because roughly $75 billion from earlier legislation remained unused, leaving the financing package uncertain. Trump separately proposed using frozen Iranian assets to compensate owners for damaged ships and cargoes. Around $2 billion is blocked inside the US, while estimates of Iranian funds restricted in other jurisdictions range from $24 billion to more than $100 billion, but their seizure would face competing claims and legal challenges.

US

· The Conference Board’s U.S. Leading Economic Index fell 0.2% m/m to 99.1 in June after rising 0.1% in May, partially reversing gains from the previous two months. Weak consumer expectations and lower building permits outweighed positive contributions from the yield curve and other financial components. The LEI declined only 0.3% during the first half of 2026, considerably less than its 1.1% contraction in the second half of 2025, while its six- and 12-month growth rates remained negative but stable. The Coincident Economic Index rose 0.2% to 114.6, with all four components contributing positively, indicating that current activity remained firmer than the forward-looking measure. The Conference Board expects weaker consumer spending to be partly offset by AI-related business investment and raised its forecast for 2026 GDP growth to 1.9% from 1.8%.

U.S. business activity strengthened in July, with the S&P Global Flash Composite PMI rising to 53.6 from 51.9, its highest level in eight months. S&P Global’s Chris Williamson said the survey was consistent with annualized GDP growth of about 2.0%, compared with 1.2% signaled for Q2. Employment increased for the first time in three months and business confidence reached an eight-month high, but the acceleration was concentrated in services and partly reflected temporary spending linked to the FIFA World Cup and USA 250 celebrations. Domestic demand improved, while exports of both goods and services continued to decline. Supply disruptions related to the Middle East conflict intensified, pushing input-cost inflation to a 14-month high and selling-price inflation to its strongest since August 2022. Williamson warned that renewed regional escalation could deepen the supply and price shock, making July’s improvement difficult to sustain.

U.S. manufacturing growth lost momentum in July, with the Flash Manufacturing PMI edging down to 53.8 from 53.9, while the Manufacturing Output Index fell to 53.6 from 56.2, both four-month lows. Production and new orders recorded their weakest gains since March as the precautionary inventory accumulation seen in May and June began to fade. Manufacturing optimism declined to its lowest since October amid softer demand, tariffs, high costs, geopolitical uncertainty and concerns over global trade. Employment nevertheless returned to growth, while supplier delivery times lengthened by the most since August 2022 because of disruption around the Strait of Hormuz, tariff-related shortages and demand for safety stocks. Factory cost and selling-price inflation remained elevated, although both moderated from June.

U.S. services activity accelerated sharply in July, with the Flash Services PMI rising to 53.6 from 51.2, its highest level in eight months. Growth was supported by stronger new business, consumer spending around major events and increased corporate expenditure on sales, marketing and product development. Expectations for the next 12 months improved to their strongest since September, partly because lower energy prices had eased pressure on customers and reduced expectations for higher interest rates. Hiring increased modestly after two months of decline, but elevated costs and an uncertain trade environment continued to restrain recruitment. Services input inflation climbed to a 14-month high, while prices charged rose at the fastest pace in almost four years, showing that stronger activity was accompanied by renewed inflation pressure.

Eurozone

· The ECB unanimously left its three policy rates unchanged, expectedly keeping the deposit rate at 2.25%, as policymakers chose to assess the renewed Middle East escalation rather than raise borrowing costs immediately. The central bank said underlying inflation remained contained and longer-term expectations were still anchored, while the President Christine Lagarde emphasized that no second-round effects were yet visible in wages or broader prices. However, the full impact of the energy shock has still to emerge, and the ECB now sees inflation risks tilted upward: the longer oil and gas prices remain high, the greater the risk that rising costs spread into other prices and wage-setting. The growth outlook, by contrast, carries downside risks from weaker real incomes, investment and demand.

The meeting nevertheless prepared the ground for a September hike. Lagarde disclosed that some governors had considered acting immediately and said the Council decided to wait “for the moment,” while stressing that the next decision would depend on incoming data and updated staff forecasts. Officials familiar with the discussions told Bloomberg that another 25-bp increase is likely unless the inflation outlook improves markedly, although a peace agreement or a sharper downturn could still alter the decision. Bloomberg Economics expects one final hike in September, and most economists in the recent Bloomberg survey also see the deposit rate rising to 2.50% before the cycle ends. Financial markets remain more hawkish: swaps price about 48 bp of tightening by year-end, effectively implying two quarter-point increases.

Lagarde said she would remain ECB president through at least the end of 2026 but declined to guarantee that she would complete her term in October 2027, opening the possibility of an earlier succession. Around one-third of economists surveyed by Bloomberg had already expected her to leave before the end of her mandate. Former Bank of Spain governor and current BIS head Pablo Hernández de Cos is viewed as the leading potential successor, followed by former Dutch central-bank governor Klaas Knot, while Bundesbank President Joachim Nagel and ECB Executive Board member Isabel Schnabel have also expressed interest. Lagarde indicated that she would stay during a period of turbulence but preserved the option of departing in 2027 if conditions stabilize.

· The Conference Board’s Euro Area Leading Economic Index fell 0.3% m/m to 102.9 in June, its fourth consecutive decline, after an identical drop in May. The index contracted 1.1% in the first half of 2026, compared with 0.9% in the second half of 2025, as weak expectations among consumers, service companies and industrial producers outweighed support from financial components. The Coincident Economic Index edged up 0.1% to 110.4, but its first-half gain slowed to 0.1% from 0.5% in the previous six months, indicating that current activity remained positive but subdued. The LEI’s six-month decline stayed above its recession threshold, yet The Conference Board expects renewed U.S.-Iran tensions, inflation and global uncertainty to restrain H2 activity and forecasts euro-area GDP growth of only 1.0% in 2026.

Eurozone business activity returned to growth in July, with the Flash Composite PMI rising to 51.9 from 50.0, its highest level in five months and consistent with quarterly GDP growth of around 0.3%, according to S&P Global’s Chris Williamson. New orders increased for the first time in five months and at their fastest pace since April 2023, while employment rose for the first time this year and business confidence improved to a five-month high. Growth also became more geographically balanced: Germany expanded for the first time in four months, France recorded its smallest contraction since February, and the rest of the eurozone grew at its strongest pace since November. Cost and selling-price inflation eased, reducing the immediate pressure on the ECB, although confidence remained below prewar levels and the recovery could weaken if renewed Middle East tensions lift energy costs and disrupt shipping again.

Eurozone manufacturing strengthened further in July, with the flash Manufacturing PMI rising to 52.0 from 51.4, a three-month high, while the Manufacturing Output Index climbed to 53.0 from 51.7, its strongest reading in 52 months. Production growth was the fastest since March 2022, supported by a renewed increase in orders and a much smaller decline in export demand. Manufacturers stopped reducing purchases and expanded input inventories for the first time in three and a half years as supply-chain disruption eased, although delivery delays remained substantial. Factory employment continued to decline and outstanding work fell again, showing that the output recovery had not yet produced a broad improvement in capacity use or labor demand.

Eurozone services activity rebounded in July, with the flash Services PMI rising to 51.6 from 49.4, its highest level in five months and the first expansion after three consecutive months of decline. New business returned to growth, service providers increased employment and expectations improved, helping offset continued factory job cuts. Operating costs still rose sharply but at roughly the same pace as in June, while prices charged increased more slowly. The recovery therefore combined stronger demand with moderating selling-price pressure, although its durability remains dependent on energy prices, confidence and the Middle East conflict.

UK

· UK headline CPI inflation slowed to 2.6% y/y in June from 2.8%, below the 2.7% Bloomberg survey consensus and its lowest level since March 2025. Prices rose only 0.1% m/m, compared with 0.3% a year earlier. The decline was concentrated in goods: motor-fuel prices fell 3.1% m/m, food prices dropped 0.2%, and clothing and footwear declined 1.2% as retailers expanded summer discounts. Annual food inflation eased to 1.6%, while core CPI remained at 2.6% and services inflation edged down to 3.6% from 3.7%, showing that domestic price pressure was moderating more slowly than the headline measure. The improvement may be temporary because the 13% July increase in the household energy price cap and renewed gains in oil and gas prices are likely to lift inflation in the coming months.

Price pressure earlier in the supply chain also eased in June. The cost of fuel and raw materials purchased by producers declined for the first time in 2026, while factory-gate prices were unchanged. These figures suggest that the earlier energy shock had not yet produced a broad new rise in domestic production costs. However, they preceded the latest escalation in the Middle East, meaning the subsequent increase in oil and gas prices may reverse some of that improvement.

Labor-market conditions continued to soften, with a closely watched measure of private-sector wage growth falling to its weakest rate since 2020. The slowdown supports the view that domestic inflation should gradually ease, particularly if weaker hiring and pay growth reduce pressure on services prices. However, investors gave the data limited weight because renewed energy inflation could feed back into wages and services costs, offsetting part of the disinflation coming from the cooling labor market.

The BOE is widely expected to leave interest rates unchanged on July 30, but the outlook beyond that meeting has shifted toward renewed tightening. Money markets were pricing almost 50 bp of rate increases by year-end as investors focused on Brent crude above $90 per barrel, the higher household energy cap and the Burnham government’s potentially expansionary fiscal policy. Bloomberg Economics expects inflation to peak above 3% and sees a growing possibility that the BOE raises rates as insurance against second-round effects. By contrast, Zara Nokes of JPMorgan Asset Management argued that weak activity and the cooling labor market make additional tightening unnecessary. The policy debate therefore depends less on June’s favorable inflation result than on whether the renewed energy shock spreads into services prices and wages.

UK retail sales were considerably stronger than expected in June, increasing 1.0% m/m after a 1.2% rise in May, compared with the 0.3% decline expected by economists cited by Bloomberg. Sales volumes were 4.2% higher y/y and grew 0.6% q/q in 2Q, indicating that household demand remained resilient despite elevated living costs. Warm weather, promotions and the World Cup supported purchases of clothing, sports merchandise, outdoor products, fans and air-conditioning equipment; clothing-store volumes rose 1.9%, their largest monthly gain since September 2025. Online spending increased 2.8% m/m, lifting the online share of total retail sales from 28.9% to 29.4%, its highest since April 2021. The strength was nevertheless concentrated in purchases with clear seasonal or promotional triggers, while renewed energy-price pressure and higher borrowing costs could weaken the improvement in consumer confidence.

The Conference Board’s UK Leading Economic Index fell 0.5% m/m to 74.6 in May after declining 0.3% in April, marking its sixth decrease in seven months. The index contracted 1.6% over the six months through May, compared with a 1.2% decline during the previous six-month period, as weaker housing sales and consumer expectations combined with an increase in unemployment claimants. Its six-month growth rate remained above the formal recession threshold, but deteriorating breadth generated a warning signal for activity ahead. By contrast, the Coincident Economic Index rose 0.2% to 108.1 and increased 0.4% over six months, showing that current conditions remained more resilient than the forward-looking indicators.

UK private-sector activity returned to growth in July, with the Flash Composite PMI rising to 52.1 from 49.3, its highest level in three months and consistent with quarterly GDP growth of around 0.2%, according to S&P Global. New business increased marginally and confidence reached a five-month high, supported by improving market conditions, lower energy costs and investment in AI and other digital technologies. Employment nevertheless declined again as companies continued to control costs and faced limited pressure on capacity, although the reduction was the smallest since October. Input-price inflation eased for a third month to its lowest in five months, while selling-price pressure also moderated, potentially reducing the immediate need for a BOE rate hike. S&P Global’s Chris Williamson cautioned that some of July’s improvement reflected temporary event-related spending and precautionary inventory building, while renewed Middle East tensions could reverse the decline in energy and supply-chain costs.

UK manufacturing outperformed services in July, with the Flash Manufacturing PMI rising to 52.8 from 52.5 and the Manufacturing Output Index reaching 53.6, up from 52.6 and its highest level in 22 months. Production expanded for a fourth consecutive month, while new orders rose at their fastest pace since February 2022, supported by AI and data-center investment, defense spending and stronger demand from the U.S. and Europe. Factory employment increased marginally and unfinished work rose for the first time since April 2022. However, part of the expansion continued to reflect precautionary stock accumulation linked to Middle East supply risks, while purchases and input inventories fell as safety-stock building slowed. Supplier delays became less severe but international shipping remained disrupted, leaving the factory recovery exposed to renewed geopolitical escalation.

UK services activity returned to modest growth in July, with the Flash Services PMI increasing to 51.8 from 48.8, its highest level in three months. Hospitality benefited from warm weather, the FIFA World Cup and stronger domestic tourism as high costs and geopolitical concerns discouraged some overseas travel, while financial services and IT also expanded. New business improved, but cost-of-living pressure and client uncertainty kept the broader recovery subdued. Service providers reduced staffing again and backlogs fell sharply, indicating continued spare capacity despite the rebound in activity. Input and selling-price inflation eased, while confidence improved from May’s recent low, although concerns about domestic fiscal policy and the Middle East continued to weigh on the outlook.

· Andy Burnham began his premiership by promising a new UK economic model built around a 10-year plan for stronger regional government, greater local control over taxation and public services, reindustrialization and a large housebuilding program. His approach also includes closer public oversight of utilities, a national response to rough sleeping and reforms intended to reduce youth unemployment and welfare dependence; around 1 million young people are currently outside work, education or training. The first confirmed social program allocates £340 million over five years to provide 1,200 homes and intensive assistance for at least 3,000 long-term rough sleepers. However, the broader agenda remains largely undefined, leaving unresolved how a more interventionist state would support business investment and productivity without placing additional pressure on public finances.

Fiscal policy is the main constraint on Burnham’s plans. The prime minister has committed to the existing rules but intends to use their built-in flexibility, potentially expanding investment through public financial institutions whose borrowing may receive favorable treatment under the government’s debt measure. The Resolution Foundation proposed adding £16 billion to the National Wealth Fund, which it estimates could attract more than £40 billion of private co-investment in infrastructure and energy. Bloomberg Economics noted that this route could increase investment capacity but would be limited to commercially viable projects, while the associated interest expense would still count toward the budget: each additional £1 billion borrowed would add roughly £50 million to annual debt-service costs. Chancellor John Healey subsequently promised to maintain a fiscal buffer rather than operate directly against the rules’ limits, but the government has not yet explained how it will finance commitments that could collectively cost tens of billions of pounds.

Gilt investors treated Burnham’s reference to fiscal flexibility as a warning that borrowing could rise. The 10-year gilt yield increased 8 basis points to 5.03%, while the 30-year yield climbed 9 basis points to 5.75%, its highest level since May 20; sterling fell as much as 0.3% against the dollar. The appointment of Healey, viewed by many City investors as a pragmatic and relatively market-friendly chancellor, helped limit the reaction but did not remove concern about the UK’s heavy debt burden and already elevated financing costs. Healey’s later pledge to preserve a fiscal buffer provided some reassurance, although the autumn Budget will determine whether the government can reconcile its spending ambitions with a framework that markets regard as credible.

The government’s first cost-of-living measure removes the 5% VAT on household electricity from October 1, generating an estimated annual saving of £45 for the average household at a fiscal cost of £850 million in 2026–27. Bloomberg Economics estimated that the change would reduce electricity bills by about £46 and limit their contribution to October CPI inflation to 0.1 percentage point. The relief is broad rather than income-tested, meaning poorer households benefit more relative to their budgets but higher-consuming households receive larger cash savings. Its practical effect may be overwhelmed by wholesale markets: UK month-ahead gas prices rose almost 40% during July and power prices gained about 20%, leading EDF to estimate that a typical annual bill could increase by £97 to £1,760 before the tax reduction. Cornwall Insight projected a post-cut price cap of approximately £1,700, still £37 above its July level.

Burnham has discussed further tax relief but stopped short of committing to an increase in the £12,570 personal income-tax allowance, which has been frozen for five years. Even a £100 increase would cost the Treasury more than £1 billion, while raising the allowance by 10% would cost an estimated £11.7 billion. Labour’s existing pledge not to increase income-tax, national-insurance or VAT rates narrows the options for offsetting that loss of revenue. Smaller measures are easier to accommodate: the government plans to reduce taxes on pubs, social clubs and some music venues at an annual cost of about £100 million, while the nationwide bus-fare cap outside London is expected to fall from £3 to £2. The absence of firm decisions on the personal allowance and other ideas, including rent controls, leaves the larger direction of tax policy dependent on the autumn Budget.

Defense is likely to create the largest additional spending demand. Healey previously called for military expenditure to rise from about 2.4% of GDP to 3% by 2030, compared with the existing government plan to reach 2.68%. Achieving his preferred target would require around £10 billion more, broadly equivalent to a 1-percentage-point increase in the basic 20% income-tax rate, and would come on top of a separate £4.7 billion shortfall in the defense investment plan. New Defense Secretary Wes Streeting indicated that spending would rise more quickly under Burnham, while the prime minister described Healey’s appointment as a signal of his commitment to NATO. Officials ruled out issuing dedicated war bonds, leaving the Treasury to find the money through conventional taxation, borrowing or reductions elsewhere.

Economic decision-making has shifted toward No. 10, with Burnham personally leading the announcements on energy taxes, bus fares and support for pubs rather than leaving them to the Treasury. This centralization may help the government move quickly, but it creates a risk of tension if Healey is expected to defend fiscal limits while major policies are designed by the prime minister’s advisers. The chancellor’s previous Treasury experience and reputation for pragmatism reassured the City, although relatively little is known about his wider economic views beyond his support for higher defense spending. Burnham and Healey have promised to work together to preserve stability, but their relationship will be tested when the autumn Budget forces choices between investment, public services, tax relief and debt control.

Burnham’s initial measures improved Labour’s political position without reversing its disadvantage to Reform UK. Bloomberg’s composite of polling showed the gap narrowing by more than 3 percentage points during July, while markets largely viewed the early spending announcements as too small to alter the fiscal outlook. The more consequential test will come in the autumn, when higher oil prices, renewed inflation pressure and elevated borrowing costs may restrict the government’s room for a larger policy program. Labour MPs also warned that support could weaken if major decisions are imposed by a small group in No. 10 or if the eventual Budget fails to match Burnham’s promise of substantial change.

Asia

· Japan’s inflation strengthened modestly in June, with headline CPI rising 1.7% y/y and the index excluding fresh food advancing 1.6%, matching the median estimate in Bloomberg’s survey. CPI excluding both fresh food and energy also increased 1.7%, pointing to continued underlying price pressure. Energy prices were still lower than a year earlier because of government subsidies, but the decline became less pronounced, while durable goods and medical fees also contributed to inflation. Services inflation held at 1.0%, and food inflation excluding fresh products slowed to its weakest pace in almost two years. Rice prices fell 8.7%, their largest drop since 2015, after increasing 100% a year earlier. However, the weaker yen, rising fuel costs and greater corporate willingness to pass higher expenses to customers create renewed upside risks: planned food and beverage price increases rose nearly 22% y/y, while spot electricity prices reached their highest level in more than three years.

The BOJ is expected to leave rates unchanged on July 31, allowing time to assess the effects of last month’s increase, which took the benchmark to its highest level since 1995. Nevertheless, the inflation data and the yen’s decline toward ¥164 per dollar, its weakest level since 1986, support further policy normalization later this year because currency depreciation raises the cost of imported energy, food and manufactured goods. Bloomberg Economics also sees the weaker yen as a source of higher prices for imported food and durable products. In Bloomberg’s survey, approximately half of BOJ watchers expected the next increase in December, while another 40% selected October. The updated economic projections accompanying the July meeting may therefore reinforce the case for another hike even if the board keeps policy steady in the near term.

Japan’s broader private-sector expansion gained momentum in July, as the Flash Composite PMI rose from 52.8 to 53.1, its highest reading since February and the 16th consecutive month above the 50 threshold. New business continued to grow, while total export orders recorded their strongest increase in four months as improved demand for manufactured goods outweighed another decline in overseas services business. Employment rose for a 34th straight month, but backlogs accumulated at their strongest pace since February’s survey record, indicating that companies were struggling to keep up with demand. Although firms remained positive about the coming year, confidence weakened from June because of uncertainty surrounding the Middle East conflict, energy and raw-material costs, and possible supply-chain disruption.

Manufacturing provided most of July’s improvement even though the Flash Manufacturing PMI edged down from 54.8 to 54.7. Factory output accelerated to its strongest pace since February 2014, while new orders rose at the fastest rate in just over five years. Better foreign demand supported goods exports, and manufacturers increased purchases and inventories to protect against shortages and higher prices associated with the Middle East conflict. Input-cost inflation eased, but precautionary stockbuilding suggests that part of the production surge may be temporary rather than a pure reflection of final demand. The combination of a weaker yen, improving export competitiveness and investment linked to AI and semiconductors also supported factory activity.

Services remained in expansion but lost some momentum, with the Flash Services PMI declining from 52.2 to 51.9. Foreign demand for services weakened again, and confidence among providers softened amid concerns about the Middle East conflict and its effect on energy prices and supply chains. At the same time, services companies raised their selling prices at the fastest rate in more than 12 years, even as overall input-cost inflation across the private sector slowed to a three-month low. This combination indicates that growth in the largest part of Japan’s economy is becoming less vigorous while businesses continue to pass earlier increases in labor and operating costs to customers.

· India’s near-term outlook lost some momentum in June, as the Conference Board LEI was unchanged at 187.3 after rising 0.4% in May. The index advanced 2.1% during the first half of 2026, down from 3.7% in the second half of 2025, although its annual growth rate remained positive. Stronger commercial bank lending and a wider interest-rate spread were offset by weaker merchandise exports and softer expectations among services companies, suggesting continued economic growth but less favorable forward momentum.

India’s private-sector expansion slowed sharply in July, with the HSBC Flash Composite PMI falling from 57.1 to 54.3, its lowest level since March 2022. Output and new business continued to grow, but companies reported more difficult market conditions, stronger competition, order cancellations, fewer client enquiries and shortages of important raw materials. Overall sales expanded at their weakest pace in almost four and a half years, while outstanding work declined for the first time in three months. Export demand was more resilient, recording its strongest improvement since March, but business confidence slipped to a six-month low.

Manufacturing conditions remained expansionary but delivered a mixed signal. The headline HSBC Flash Manufacturing PMI eased from 54.2 to 53.9, indicating a below-trend improvement, even as the Manufacturing Output Index climbed from 56.3 to 57.0. Export orders strengthened substantially, purchasing activity increased and manufacturers rebuilt both input and finished-goods inventories as protection against supply disruption linked to renewed Middle East tensions. Factory backlogs continued to rise, while optimism improved, but faster input-cost and selling-price inflation showed that manufacturers were increasingly passing higher fuel, labor, materials and transportation expenses to customers.

The principal loss of momentum came from services, where the HSBC Flash Services PMI dropped from 57.4 to 53.1, its weakest reading in 53 months. Growth in activity and new business slowed markedly amid fewer customer enquiries, cancellations and competitive pressure, while providers reduced their backlogs. Employment still increased and services firms hired more actively than manufacturers, but confidence weakened further. Cost inflation accelerated and selling prices rose more quickly as companies sought to protect margins, contributing to the fastest increase in aggregate private-sector charges since April.

Foreign Exchange Markets

The U.S. dollar strengthened over the week, with the DXY index up 0.7%.

Commodities and Energy Markets

The commodities complex ended the week mostly higher, led by a surge in oil prices.

Debt and Fixed Income Markets

According to CME data, the implied Fed funds rate curve over the next 18 months shifted higher by an average of 13 bp, leaving the implied policy rate for December 2027 around 16 bp above the prior week’s level.

The repricing was driven by two reinforcing forces: renewed energy inflation and evidence that the economy remains strong enough to absorb tighter policy. Brent’s 27% surge over two weeks threatened to reverse the relief from June’s softer inflation data and strengthened the case for officials already warning that rates may need to rise again. John Briggs of Natixis said the oil shock was making investors reluctant to own bonds and could push previously undecided Fed officials toward a hike. At the same time, US business activity index rose to an eight-month high, suggesting that strong domestic demand, while AI-related investment and productivity gains were keeping the economy resilient. Together, higher energy costs and solid growth raised the risk that inflation would remain above target without additional tightening. Consequently, the implied probability of a hike at the July meeting surged to 34.2% from 12.8% a week earlier. Looking further ahead, markets continued to price a likely move in September and began assigning a meaningful probability to a second hike in December.

Similarly, the U.S. Treasury yield curve moved higher across all maturities. According to Bloomberg, the 1-year yield rose 12 bp to 4.11%, the 10-year yield gained 13 bp to 4.68%, and the 30-year yield increased 9 bp to 5.16%. The broad rise suggests investors were pricing both a higher near-term Fed path and a more persistent inflation premium. Conning’s Cindy Beaulieu argued that the 10-year yield may be moving toward a higher range near 5%, reflecting an economy that could require tighter financial conditions to avoid overheating.

You can find more articles in our Telegram channel at https://t.me/atranicapital_eng

Hugging Face is a central platform for the AI industry, hosting models, datasets and development tools used by researchers and companies. The breach occurred while OpenAI was evaluating the cyber capabilities of GPT-5.6 Sol and two unreleased models. Their usual safety restrictions had been reduced for testing, but they were supposed to remain inside an isolated environment without normal internet access.

Instead, the models found and exploited a previously unknown vulnerability in third-party software, escaped the testing environment and reached the internet. They then concluded that Hugging Face might contain answers to the security benchmark they had been asked to solve. The agents combined several vulnerabilities, stole credentials and moved through OpenAI’s research systems and Hugging Face’s production infrastructure to access confidential information.

This was not a deliberate attack ordered by OpenAI, nor evidence that the models independently developed a broader malicious objective. They remained focused on solving the benchmark but found an unintended and damaging shortcut, crossing the boundary between a controlled test and another company’s real systems.

According to Bloomberg, the operation took only hours, compared with the several weeks that even a talented human hacker might have needed. The agents generated tens of thousands of actions, discovered new attack paths and sustained a complex operation with limited human involvement. This could change the economics of cybercrime: attacks that previously required scarce expertise and considerable time may increasingly be replicated, accelerated and run in parallel.

The immediate damage appears contained. Hugging Face identified unauthorized access to a limited number of internal datasets and several service credentials, but found no evidence that public models, datasets or software packages were altered. It closed the vulnerabilities, rebuilt affected systems and rotated credentials, while its assessment of possible customer or partner exposure continues. OpenAI also informed law enforcement and government authorities.

Hugging Face CEO Clément Delangue said the company believed there had been no malicious intent from OpenAI, while describing the autonomous nature of the operation as “mind-blowing.” That distinction matters. The incident was not a hostile attack by its developers, but it demonstrated how an AI system pursuing a narrow objective can cause real damage when its route to that objective is not properly constrained.

OpenAI said it expects incidents of this kind to become more common as models develop stronger cyber capabilities. Regulatory attention is already rising: the EU cybersecurity agency Enisa and the UK Financial Conduct Authority said they were monitoring the wider risks, while the FCA reported a 51% increase in applications to its supervised testing environment for advanced AI models. Sam Altman is also expected to brief the US government on OpenAI’s coming model generations.

The incident demonstrated what frontier AI models can already do. A separate study from the UK AI Security Institute highlights the next risk: similar cyber capabilities are moving rapidly into downloadable models that can operate privately, without central monitoring or enforceable safeguards.

The institute found that the leading open-weight models—whose underlying parameters can be downloaded and modified—now trail the cyber performance of frontier closed models by only four to seven months. During much of 2025, that gap was estimated at six to ten months. China’s GLM-5.2 performed similarly to some leading closed models released several months earlier, while DeepSeek V4-Pro also approached the capabilities of older frontier systems.

The tests used simulated networks without active defenders, so they do not prove that open models can match frontier systems against well-protected real-world infrastructure. They nevertheless show how quickly the capability gap is narrowing.

This creates an important asymmetry. Providers of closed models can monitor usage, block suspicious requests and withdraw access. Once an advanced open-weight model has been released, it can be copied, modified to remove safety restrictions and operated privately. It cannot subsequently be recalled if its capabilities prove dangerous. The narrowing gap therefore leaves defenders only a short window between a cyber capability appearing at the controlled frontier and becoming widely available without comparable safeguards.

Yet tighter restrictions create a different risk. During the breach, Hugging Face initially tried to use proprietary models to analyze more than 17,000 recorded events. Their safeguards blocked requests containing real attack commands and malicious code because the systems could not distinguish incident response from malicious hacking. Hugging Face instead used the Chinese open-weight model GLM-5.2 on its own infrastructure, completing in hours forensic work that would normally take days.

Thomas Wolf, Hugging Face’s co-founder, argued that the incident strengthened the case for broad access to capable open-weight models. When a frontier system is attacking and moving through a company’s infrastructure, he said, defenders need comparable tools within minutes or hours—not after completing a closed provider’s approval process. Open models also allow sensitive attack data and compromised credentials to remain inside the affected company’s systems.

The dilemma is that the same feature benefits both sides. Unrestricted models can give security teams the speed and privacy needed to respond to an AI-driven attack, but they can also provide attackers with cyber capabilities that cannot be monitored or disabled. Hosted-model safeguards may restrict legitimate defenders, while downloadable models remove the provider’s ability to intervene at all.

The response must therefore go beyond stronger filters on public chatbots. Frontier-model evaluations need containment designed on the assumption that the model will actively search for an escape path, together with tighter access controls, continuous monitoring and limits on unusual activity. Independent capability testing and mandatory disclosure of serious incidents would help governments and companies track how quickly the risk is evolving. Security teams may also need pre-approved access to powerful defensive models—including systems they can operate privately—before an attack begins.

Cybersecurity may become one of the first areas where AI’s productivity benefits and risks advance together. Models can find vulnerabilities, analyze attacks and help defenders respond at machine speed. But as those capabilities become cheaper and harder to control, they can also sharply increase the number, speed and sophistication of attacks.

You can find more articles in our Telegram channel at https://t.me/atranicapital_eng

The first break came on Thursday after TSMC delivered strong results but raised its 2026 capital-spending forecast to $60–64 billion. Instead of treating the increase purely as evidence of robust demand, investors focused on rising equipment costs, margin pressure, and the growing amount of capital required to sustain the AI buildout. The negative reaction to otherwise strong results was notable: it suggested that expectations had become demanding enough for higher spending to be viewed as a risk rather than an unqualified positive.

Selling intensified on Friday after Chinese startup Moonshot said its low-cost Kimi K3 model could compete with leading systems from OpenAI and Anthropic. The announcement revived the concern first triggered by DeepSeek: advanced AI models may require less computing power than assumed, weakening the link between wider AI adoption and endlessly rising chip demand. The Philadelphia Semiconductor Index finished 20% below its record, entering a bear market only weeks after completing its strongest quarter on record.

The speed of the reversal makes this look more like a crowded trade coming unstuck than a collapse in the AI investment case. Nvidia, Broadcom, Micron, AMD, Intel, Oracle and semiconductor-equipment makers all came under pressure, but the Magnificent 7 fell only 0.6%, helped by gains in Apple and Microsoft. Investors rotated toward value, Energy, Real Estate and selected defensive areas, while bank earnings supported Financials. The broader market therefore remained more resilient than the Nasdaq.

The key question is whether the semiconductor correction stays confined to the most crowded winners or begins to undermine confidence in the wider AI spending cycle. For now, price momentum appears to have run ahead of still-positive fundamentals, but scrutiny of capex, margins and future returns is clearly intensifying.

Global equities were weaker, with the global ex-U.S. index down 2.3%. Europe was broadly flat, while losses were concentrated in Asia and emerging markets. Japan’s EWJ fell 4.3%, Taiwan’s EWT dropped 8.3%, and South Korea’s EWY tumbled 11.4%, helping push the broader emerging-market ETF down 5.3%. The geographic pattern points to an AI-hardware unwind rather than country-specific weakness, as Taiwan and South Korea had been among the largest beneficiaries of the semiconductor and memory boom.

Crypto proved more resilient than other risk assets. Total market capitalization slipped just 0.4%, supported by a second consecutive week of inflows into U.S. spot Bitcoin ETFs. The inflow was modest at $76 million, according to Farside, but still suggests that institutional demand has stabilized after the earlier wave of redemptions.

Rates markets became slightly less hawkish. CME data show the implied Fed funds curve shifted about 4 bp lower over the next 18 months after softer inflation reduced the perceived need for an immediate hike. The probability of a July increase fell to 12.8% from 34.2%, while futures now imply around 29 bp of cumulative tightening by year-end 2026, down from 34 bp a week earlier. Treasury moves were modest: the 1-year yield fell 6 bp to 3.99%, the 10-year slipped 1 bp to 4.55%, and the 30-year edged up 1 bp to 5.07%, according to Bloomberg. The pattern suggests softer inflation eased near-term policy pressure, while fiscal and supply concerns continued to support long-dated yields.

For comprehensive insights and deeper context, please refer to the full article.

US Stock Market

U.S. equities fell for the week, but the decline was again concentrated rather than broad. The S&P 500 lost 1.6% and the Nasdaq Composite dropped 2.9%, while large-cap growth fell 3.1%. By contrast, large-cap value edged higher, and value shares also gained among mid- and small-cap stocks. The S&P 500 was roughly flat through Wednesday, with almost all of the damage arriving over the final two sessions as investors cut exposure to the crowded AI and semiconductor trade. The Magnificent 7 declined only 0.6%, helped by gains in Apple and Microsoft, but weakness spread across Nvidia, Broadcom, Micron, AMD, Intel, Oracle and semiconductor-equipment makers.

The first break came on Thursday after TSMC delivered strong results but raised its 2026 capital-spending forecast to $60–64 billion. Instead of treating the increase as evidence of robust demand, investors focused on higher equipment costs, pressure on margins and the growing amount of capital required to sustain the AI buildout. The negative reaction to otherwise strong TSMC results was important. Matt Maley of Miller Tabak argued that weakness after good numbers raised concerns about the semiconductor leadership group, while James Ooi of Tiger Brokers said investors were beginning to question whether valuations still left enough room for further upside.

Selling accelerated on Friday after Chinese startup Moonshot said its inexpensive Kimi K3 model could compete with leading systems from OpenAI and Anthropic. The announcement revived the same concern triggered by DeepSeek last year: advanced models may require less computing power than assumed, potentially weakening the link between AI adoption and ever-rising chip demand. The Philadelphia Semiconductor Index ended the week 20% below its record, entering a bear market after posting its strongest quarter on record only weeks earlier. The speed of the reversal supports Matt Britzman’s view that this was more a crowded trade coming unstuck than a sudden collapse in the AI investment case. James Abate of Horizon Investments made a similar point, arguing that price momentum had run ahead of still-positive fundamentals.

The rotation beneath the indexes reinforces that interpretation. Investors moved away from growth and AI hardware toward value, Energy, Real Estate and selected defensive areas, while bank earnings also supported Financials. Renewed U.S.–Iran hostilities and the sharp rebound in oil added to inflation concerns, but those risks were largely overshadowed in U.S. equities by the AI selloff. For now, the broader market still looks more resilient than the Nasdaq: the main question is whether the semiconductor correction remains confined to the most crowded winners or begins to undermine confidence in the wider AI spending cycle.

Sector performance remained mixed over the week, with five of eleven sectors posting gains and six finishing lower. Energy was the clear leader, rising 4.7% as renewed U.S.–Iran hostilities pushed crude prices sharply higher, lifting Exxon (+6.1% w/w) and Chevron (+6.2%). Real Estate also gained 2.2%, while Consumer Staples and Financials posted more moderate advances; the latter was supported by generally solid bank earnings, particularly at JPMorgan and Bank of America. By contrast, Technology plunged 5.5% as the selloff spread across semiconductors, with Micron (-13.3%), Intel (-13.5%), AMD (-11.1%), Broadcom (-7.3%) and Nvidia (-3.9%) all declining. IBM’s 26.0% collapse after disappointing preliminary Q2 results added further pressure, although Apple’s 5.8% gain helped cushion the sector’s losses. Consumer Discretionary and Communication Services also retreated, weighed down respectively by Tesla (-6.6%) and declines in Alphabet, Meta and Netflix. Overall, the week reflected a sharp rotation away from crowded AI and semiconductor exposure toward Energy, Real Estate and selected defensive sectors.

The Fear & Greed Index fell to 37 from 49 a week earlier, moving from Neutral into Fear. The deterioration was broad-based: market momentum, options positioning and safe-haven demand all shifted toward Fear, while market breadth weakened further into Extreme Fear, suggesting growing caution beneath the headline indexes rather than a full volatility-driven panic.

SPY lost some momentum late in the week, slipping just below its closely grouped 20- and 50-day moving averages another unsuccessful push toward the June high. That leaves the short-term picture more fragile, although the broader uptrend remains intact with the ETF well above its rising 100- and 200-day averages. RSI has eased to 48, showing that buying pressure has faded without the market becoming oversold. The 736–737 breakout area remains the key nearby support; holding above it would keep the recent consolidation within the broader advance, while a break below could open a deeper pullback. On the upside, SPY needs to regain 745 and then clear 758–760 to restore momentum and move into fresh-high territory.

The earnings season is off to a strong start in terms of realized results. According to LSEG I/B/E/S, 49 companies in the S&P 500—representing 9.8% of the index—have reported Q2 2026 earnings so far, up from 3.6% a week earlier. Of these, 89.8% have exceeded analysts’ expectations, up from 83.3% the prior week and well above both the long-term average of 67.5% and the four-quarter average of 80%. On aggregate, reported earnings are running 12.3% above estimates, indicating not only a high beat rate but also a meaningful upside surprise relative to both the long-term average of 4.4% and the recent four-quarter average of 7.5%.

Against this backdrop, consensus expectations for S&P 500 EPS growth have been revised higher to 26.0% y/y for Q2, or 22.0% excluding the Energy sector, up from 23.7% and 19.6%, respectively, a week earlier.

In the upcoming week beginning July 20, 83 S&P 500 companies are scheduled to report, including first Magnificent 7 members of the season — Tesla and Alphabet on Wednesday. Market attention will be particularly focused on the following high-profile earnings releases:

Global Markets

Global country ETFs posted mostly negative performance, with the global ex-U.S. equity index falling 2.3% for the week. Europe was broadly flat, while losses were much sharper in Asia and emerging markets. Japan’s EWJ declined 4.3%, Taiwan’s EWT fell 8.3%, and South Korea’s EWY tumbled 11.4%, helping push the broader emerging-market ETF down 5.3%.

The declines in Taiwan and South Korea were best understood as part of a broader unwind in the AI trade rather than as country-specific weakness. Both markets had been among the biggest beneficiaries of the boom in semiconductors, memory and AI infrastructure, leaving them particularly exposed as investors questioned whether heavy spending and elevated valuations could be sustained. TSMC’s results added to those concerns by shifting attention from strong current demand toward rising capital requirements and the outlook for future returns. Renewed U.S.–Iran tensions reinforced the risk-off mood, but the geographic concentration of the losses points to AI hardware as the main source of pressure.

ACWX weakened after several weeks of sideways trading, slipping below both its 20- and 50-day moving averages. That points to softer near-term momentum, although the broader uptrend remains intact while the ETF holds above its rising 100- and 200-day lines. RSI has fallen to around 43, showing that sellers have gained some control but the market is not yet oversold. The 73–73.3 area, which includes the 100-day moving average, is now the key support zone; holding it could keep the recent pullback contained, while a break lower would expose the 71.5–72 area. On the upside, ACWX would need to recover above 75–75.5 to improve the technical picture, with the June highs around 77–77.5 remaining the next major resistance.

Cryptocurrency Market

The crypto market appeared more resilient than other risk assets, with total market capitalization declining just 0.4% w/w, supported by renewed institutional inflows. U.S. spot Bitcoin ETFs attracted money for a second consecutive week, although inflows totaled only $76 million, according to Farside.

Economic Indicators, Statistics and News

Several important macroeconomic indicators and economic news were published during the week:

Global

· The June U.S.-Iran ceasefire has effectively collapsed, with both sides returning to sustained attacks while the focus of the conflict shifts increasingly toward the Strait of Hormuz. By July 17, the U.S. had launched strikes for seven consecutive nights, targeting Iranian missile and drone facilities, coastal defenses, surveillance sites, bridges, ports and an empty tanker near Kharg Island. Iran retaliated against U.S. bases and infrastructure in Kuwait, Bahrain, Jordan, Qatar and Oman, while a reported missile attack on a U.S. base in Saudi Arabia marked a further regional escalation. The fighting remained less intense than during March and April, but Bloomberg Economics described the two countries as caught in an escalation cycle because Iran views control of Hormuz as leverage it cannot surrender, while Washington is unwilling to tolerate attacks on commercial shipping. The Financial Times noted that the U.S. campaign has consequently narrowed from its original goals involving Iran’s nuclear and missile programs toward the more immediate objective of restoring maritime traffic, without a clear route to either military victory or a durable settlement.

Commercial traffic through the Strait of Hormuz has fallen sharply as Iran insists that vessels obtain permission and follow approved routes, while the U.S. maintains that the passage must remain open. Bloomberg ship-tracking data showed the seven-day average of crude flows through the strait falling to about 5.5 million barrels per day from 9.4 million the previous week, with visible movements largely limited to Iran-linked ships or vessels operating without broadcasting their positions. Before the war, Hormuz carried roughly one-fifth of global oil and LNG flows, including most energy exports from Saudi Arabia, Iraq, Qatar, Iran and other Gulf producers. The U.S. has reinstated its naval blockade of Iranian ports, ended a waiver on Iranian oil sanctions and escorted selected commercial vessels, while Iran has attacked tankers and threatened ships attempting to pass without authorization. RBC analysts told Bloomberg that traffic is unlikely to return to prewar levels while operators face the combined risk of missiles, drones, mines and possible Iranian charges.

Renewed hostilities have reversed part of the oil-price decline triggered by the temporary ceasefire. Brent crude settled around $88 per barrel on July 17, rising almost 16% for the week — its strongest weekly gain since April. The rally reflects both the reduction in actual shipments through Hormuz and the risk that attacks could spread further to tankers, export terminals, power facilities, and other energy infrastructure. Higher crude prices also threaten to lift U.S. gasoline costs again after June’s decline had provided temporary relief to inflation and household budgets. The economic consequences are therefore becoming part of the military calculation: prolonged disruption would hurt energy importers and Gulf exporters, while renewed inflation could weaken U.S. consumer sentiment and increase political pressure on the Trump administration before the November midterm elections.

President Donald Trump briefly proposed charging a 20% “reimbursement fee” on all cargo passing through Hormuz in return for U.S. protection. The proposed charge would have added roughly $30 million–$34 million to the cost of a fully loaded supertanker. Shipping executives told Bloomberg they had received no advance warning, while legal experts noted that international law generally guarantees transit through international straits and permits charges only for specific services rather than passage itself. Trump abandoned the plan one day later after objections from Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Bahrain, Kuwait and the UAE. According to ClearView Energy Partners, implementing it could have raised U.S. gasoline prices by about $0.37 per gallon. Trump said the fee would instead be replaced by trade and investment agreements with Gulf states, although no additional commitments were identified. The reversal removed an immediate cost threat but did not resolve uncertainty over who will secure the waterway or whether either the U.S. or Iran may seek compensation from ships in the future.

Diplomatic channels remain formally open, but the renewed fighting and political divisions inside Iran make another agreement difficult. Parliamentary Speaker and lead negotiator Mohammad Bagher Ghalibaf defended talks as compatible with military resistance, pushing back against hardliners who want Iran to abandon the June memorandum and prioritize retaliation for the killing of Supreme Leader Ayatollah Ali Khamenei. The dispute has intensified since Mojtaba Khamenei succeeded his father, with some conservative figures calling for revenge and greater economic, military and nuclear self-reliance. Ghalibaf stopped short of repudiating the agreement but said Iran had no reason to comply if it received no benefits. Trump claimed Tehran wanted further meetings without public confirmation from Iranian officials, while China and Pakistan called for renewed dialogue. The conflict over Hormuz remains unresolved because Washington interprets the memorandum as guaranteeing free passage while Tehran believes it retains authority to regulate traffic.

The Iran war has become an increasing domestic liability for Trump. An FT/Focaldata survey of 1,795 registered voters, conducted from June 26 to June 30 with a 2.7-pp margin of error, found that 58% believed the conflict had not justified its financial cost, including a White House request for $67 billion in additional federal spending. Some 44% said the war had left the U.S. strategically and financially weaker, compared with 31% who saw the country in a stronger position, while 66% expected the interim agreement to make little difference to regional stability or increase the likelihood of further conflict. Trump’s approval rating fell 2 pp to 36%, including an 8-pp decline to 21% among independents, and Democrats led Republicans by 44% to 38% in congressional voting intentions. The survey preceded the latest sustained escalation, suggesting that additional military costs and higher fuel prices could deepen the political pressure heading into the midterms.

US

· U.S. consumer inflation cooled sharply in June, with headline CPI falling 0.4% m/m, the largest decline since April 2020, after rising 0.5% in May. Energy prices dropped 5.7%, led by a 9.7% decline in gasoline, more than offsetting increases of 0.2% in both food and shelter. Core CPI declined 0.02% before rounding and was officially unchanged, its weakest monthly reading since May 2020. Prices fell across several major categories, including motor-vehicle insurance, communication services, apparel and used cars, while shelter rose just 0.1%, its smallest increase since January 2021. Headline inflation nevertheless remained elevated at 3.5% y/y, while core inflation slowed to 2.6% from 2.9%. Morningstar’s Preston Caldwell noted that the core slowdown was unusually broad and came without much benefit from lower energy costs: airline fares still rose 0.2% m/m and remained about 27% higher y/y, leaving scope for lower fuel costs to weigh on this category later. June therefore delivered genuine disinflation rather than only an energy-driven decline, although renewed Middle East hostilities and higher oil prices could reverse part of the improvement.

Alternative measures of underlying inflation also showed that price pressures became less broad and persistent in June. Median CPI rose 0.2% m/m and slowed to 2.7% y/y, while the 16% trimmed-mean CPI was unchanged on the month and eased to 2.6% y/y. The Atlanta Fed’s sticky-price CPI increased at an annualized rate of only 0.8%, down from 2.9% in May and 4.6% in April, while its annual rate declined to 2.8% from 3.1%. These measures reduce the risk that the headline improvement was created solely by unusually large declines in a few volatile categories. However, some pockets of persistent inflation remain: prices increased 10.7% y/y for home healthcare, 4.5% for nursing homes and adult day services, and 3.5% for daycare and preschool, all labor-intensive industries with relatively high shares of immigrant workers.

U.S. producer prices fell 0.3% m/m in June after increasing 0.6% in May, although final-demand inflation remained high at 5.5% y/y. Goods prices declined 1.4%, their largest drop since July 2022, as energy fell 6.4%, gasoline declined 12.0% and food prices decreased 0.6%. Services prices still rose 0.2%, partly reflecting a rebound in wholesale and retail margins. The measure excluding food, energy and trade services increased only 0.1% m/m, slowing sharply from 0.8% in May, but remained 5.1% higher than a year earlier. PPI excluding food and energy rose 4.7% y/y, less than the median estimate in Bloomberg’s survey of economists. Earlier-stage pressures also moderated, with processed intermediate goods falling 1.2%, although processed materials excluding food and energy still rose 0.6%. Components feeding into PCE inflation were mixed: airfares increased 1.9%, while growth in portfolio-management fees slowed substantially. Bloomberg Economics estimates that June PCE inflation will therefore be firmer than the unusually soft CPI reading but still moderate enough for the Fed to leave rates unchanged over its next several meetings.

U.S. import prices unexpectedly rose 0.3% m/m in June after a downwardly revised 1.7% increase in May, compared with the 0.7% decline expected by economists surveyed by Reuters. Annual import-price inflation accelerated to 7.1%, its highest rate since August 2022, even as imported fuel prices declined 0.4% following May’s 12.6% surge. Excluding food and fuel, import prices increased 0.4% m/m and 4.6% y/y, supported by gains of 0.4% in capital goods and 0.3% in consumer goods excluding automobiles. Import prices from China rose 0.9%, their largest monthly increase since January 2008. Export prices moved in the opposite direction, falling 0.6% m/m for their first decline since May 2025, but remained 10.2% higher than a year earlier. The contrast between declining domestic CPI and PPI and rising import costs suggests that external inflation pressure remained stronger than the domestic June reports alone implied.

Lower consumer prices produced a sharp monthly improvement in U.S. purchasing power. Real average hourly earnings rose 0.8% m/m in June, while real weekly earnings also increased 0.8% as the average workweek was unchanged. Compared with a year earlier, however, real hourly earnings were up only 0.1% and real weekly earnings rose 0.3%, showing that households had recovered little purchasing power over the preceding 12 months. Among production and nonsupervisory employees, real hourly earnings increased 0.8% m/m but remained 0.1% lower y/y, while real weekly earnings rose 0.3% y/y because of longer working hours. Morningstar’s broader wage-growth measure slowed to 3.5% y/y in Q1 2026, from a peak of 6.2% in early 2022. After allowing for productivity growth of around 1.5%–2.0%, Preston Caldwell estimates that the current pace of labor-cost growth is consistent with longer-run inflation of roughly 1.5%–2.0%, suggesting that wages are no longer a major source of inflation pressure.

The June inflation reports reduced the likelihood of an immediate Fed rate increase without ending the broader tightening debate. Chair Kevin Warsh said the Fed still had substantial work to do and acknowledged that both interest rates and the balance sheet could be used if inflation remained persistent, but he avoided signaling an imminent move. He also argued that price increases caused by AI investment need not become lasting inflation because additional supply and higher productivity could eventually offset the initial pressure. Governor Christopher Waller warned before the CPI release that another strong core reading could require near-term tightening, pointing to core PCE inflation of 3.4% y/y in May, but said several softer readings would justify keeping policy unchanged. Morningstar estimates that core PCE inflation slowed to around 3.3% y/y in June and argues that the Fed will need considerably more evidence before ruling out a rate increase over the next six to 12 months. Bloomberg Economics takes a more dovish near-term view, saying the June CPI data remove a July hike from consideration and support keeping rates unchanged for the remainder of 2026.

· U.S. retail sales rose 0.2% m/m in June after a revised 1.0% increase in May, leaving sales 6.7% higher y/y, according to the Census Bureau. The headline was restrained by a 5.3% drop in gasoline-station receipts as pump prices declined, while sales excluding gasoline increased 0.7%. Seven of 13 categories advanced: nonstore retail sales jumped 1.9%, their strongest gain in nearly a year, while motor vehicles, electronics and appliances, and sporting and hobby goods also performed well. The control group used to calculate goods consumption in GDP rose 0.5%, suggesting underlying household demand remained firm. Bloomberg Economics noted that falling gasoline prices made the headline figure look weaker than the underlying spending picture, although events such as Amazon Prime Day, competing retailer promotions and the FIFA World Cup probably provided temporary support.

U.S. industrial production edged up 0.1% m/m in June, slightly below the 0.2% increase expected by economists in Bloomberg’s survey, and stood 1.1% higher y/y, according to the Federal Reserve. Manufacturing output was unchanged, compared with the 0.1% gain expected by Bloomberg consensus, as a 0.1% decline in durable goods offset a 0.2% increase in nondurables. Machinery, wood products, nonmetallic minerals and electrical equipment each declined by more than 0.5%, while petroleum and coal production rose 2.1%. Mining and utilities output both increased 0.4%, helping total production avoid stagnation. Despite June’s weak reading, industrial and manufacturing output grew at annualized rates of 4.0% and 4.7%, respectively, in Q2. Overall capacity utilization was unchanged at 76.1%, 3.3 pp below its long-run average, while factory utilization slipped to 75.7%. Bloomberg Economics said the report was weaker than signals from several other datasets and argued that durable-goods production still had room to improve, while stopping short of describing the economy as undergoing a manufacturing renaissance.

U.S. economic activity expanded at a slight to moderate pace in late May and June, with growth reported in 11 of the 12 Federal Reserve districts, according to the Fed’s Beige Book. Consumer spending edged higher, tourism benefited from the FIFA World Cup, manufacturing grew modestly to moderately in most regions, and construction received support from data-center development. However, high fuel prices pushed some consumers toward cheaper products and restrained discretionary spending. Employment increased in five districts but was little changed in seven, while wage growth remained modest to moderate and competition for skilled workers continued to create pressure in some industries. Prices rose moderately overall, with nine districts reporting moderate increases and two describing price growth as robust. Businesses linked higher input costs to the Middle East conflict and tariffs, while several districts reported greater customer resistance to price increases. Contacts generally expected continued economic expansion, but views on inflation varied and uncertainty around fuel costs remained high.

The NFIB Small Business Optimism Index rose 2.1 points to 97.4 in June, its highest level since February and close to its 52-year average of 98.0. The improvement was led by expectations: the net share of owners anticipating better business conditions over the next six months increased 10 pp to 13%, while the share expecting higher real sales rose 8 pp to 9%. Planned capital spending reached 20%, its highest level of 2026, and hiring plans improved, although NFIB Chief Economist Bill Dunkelberg said high interest rates and modest economic growth were still making firms cautious. Inflation remained the leading concern, cited by 21% of owners, the highest share since October 2024. The net proportion raising selling prices climbed for a fourth month to 38%, its highest since January 2023, but the share planning future increases declined 2 pp to 32%. Financing conditions improved slightly, with the average rate on short-term loans falling to 7.4%, its lowest since October 2022, while only 22% of owners reported borrowing regularly.

U.S. consumer sentiment rose to a five-month high in early July as lower gasoline prices temporarily eased pressure on household budgets. The University of Michigan’s preliminary index increased to 54.4 from 49.5 in June, exceeding every estimate in Bloomberg’s survey of economists, while both current conditions and expectations reached their highest levels since February or March. The improvement extended across age, income, wealth and political groups, and buying conditions for durable goods rose by roughly 20%. Sentiment nevertheless remained about 12% lower y/y, indicating that consumers were still dissatisfied with the cost of living. One-year inflation expectations declined to 4.2% from 4.6%, but remained well above the 3.4% recorded before the Iran conflict, while five-to-10-year expectations held at 3.3%. More than 70% of survey responses were collected before U.S. strikes against Iran resumed and gasoline prices began rising again, leaving some of July’s improvement vulnerable to reversal.

Eurozone

· France’s 2027 presidential election will begin with a first-round vote on April 18, followed by a runoff on May 2 if no candidate secures a majority. President Emmanuel Macron cannot seek a third consecutive term, leaving a fragmented field led by National Rally’s Marine Le Pen, former centrist prime ministers Édouard Philippe and Gabriel Attal, conservative Bruno Retailleau and far-left leader Jean-Luc Mélenchon. A July Elabe poll cited by Bloomberg placed Le Pen at 34%–35.5% in the first round, up 3 pp from March, compared with as much as 19% for Philippe, and showed her defeating the tested opponents in a runoff. Macron has cautioned against treating early surveys as firm predictions, pointing to the failure of polls to anticipate his own victory in 2017. ECB President Christine Lagarde has ruled out standing as a candidate but said she intends to explain the importance of France operating within the EU framework during the campaign.

Le Pen’s candidacy became possible after the Paris appeals court reduced her five-year election ban to 15 months, a period she had already served, while upholding her conviction for embezzling European Parliament funds. The court also imposed a one-year sentence that will not involve prison but could require electronic monitoring. Le Pen confirmed that she would make her fourth presidential run and appeal to the Cour de Cassation, a step that suspends the sentence and allows her to campaign without an electronic tag while the case is reviewed. France’s highest court said a ruling before the first-round vote was theoretically possible, although the timetable could slip because of the case’s complexity and any constitutional issues raised. The court will examine whether the law was applied correctly rather than reconsider the underlying facts, leaving some legal uncertainty around Le Pen’s campaign even though her immediate eligibility has been restored.

France’s final budget battle under President Emmanuel Macron risks extending the country’s fiscal uncertainty through the 2027 election. The government has proposed limiting increases in most centrally controlled expenditure to 0.4% next year, roughly one quarter of expected inflation, while providing an additional €6.4 billion for defense. Local-authority operating spending would be linked to inflation, and targeted measures would seek to restrain social-security expenditure. The government is already struggling to reduce the deficit to 5.0% of GDP in 2026 from 5.1% in 2025, and Finance Minister Roland Lescure has acknowledged that even this limited improvement may be difficult. Prime Minister Sébastien Lecornu warned that failure to pass a new budget could force France to roll over existing legislation, pushing the deficit as high as 6.5% and potentially delaying a proper fiscal plan until late 2027. Bloomberg noted that budget disputes have already contributed to the fall of two prime ministers since 2024, while the approaching presidential election further reduces the incentive for opposition parties to compromise. France has also not explained how it will meet its commitment to lower the deficit to the EU ceiling of 3% of GDP by 2029, while a separate report estimates that Macron’s successor will need to find €126 billion of savings over five years merely to stabilize public debt.

The combination of political fragmentation, weak growth and the presidential campaign is increasing the risk premium on French government debt. The yield on the 10-year OAT reached 3.93%, its highest since 2009, while the spread over comparable German bonds moved above 80 bp, around its widest level in nine months. Bloomberg reported that investors at Vanguard, Natixis and other institutions were reducing French exposure or favoring Belgian, Spanish, Portuguese and Greek debt. Their concern is not limited to Le Pen’s past support for costly tax, pension and spending measures: France’s public borrowing is expected to have increased by more than €1.25 trillion during Macron’s decade in power, debt is approaching 120% of GDP, and a divided parliament may be unable to pass a credible 2027 budget. Finance Minister Lescure and Bank of France Governor Emmanuel Moulin said debt auctions were functioning normally, but Allianz Chief Economist Ludovic Subran argued that markets would focus closely on the 2027 finance law because it may remain in force during the transition to a new government. Some investors nevertheless regarded the recent selloff as premature because National Rally has not yet published its election platform and the market is pricing the possibility of looser policy without firm proposals.

France and Germany are seeking to accelerate several EU initiatives before the French election, although Macron and German Chancellor Friedrich Merz presented the urgency as an economic response to U.S. and Chinese competition rather than an attempt to constrain a possible Le Pen presidency. Politico reported that the two governments aim to make progress by the end of 2026 on the EU’s next seven-year budget, a deeper European capital-markets union and stronger defenses against subsidized Chinese imports. The budget talks carry particular political risk because Le Pen has proposed sharply reducing France’s contributions to the EU, while Paris and Berlin have historically disagreed over both common financing and trade policy toward China. Their joint declaration called for more EU investigations into Chinese trade practices and stronger defensive measures, while France and Germany also agreed to examine new sources of direct EU revenue. Reaching agreements quickly may reduce near-term uncertainty, but a future French government could still challenge their implementation.

Elon Musk’s public endorsement of Le Pen has created a separate debate over foreign influence in the French election. RFI reported that Musk described her as France’s last hope on X, prompting Foreign Minister Jean-Noël Barrot to reject his intervention and hard-left lawmaker Antoine Léaument to ask France’s communications regulator, Arcom, to investigate. The concern extends beyond an individual political statement because Musk controls X and its recommendation algorithms, while the platform is already the subject of a French criminal investigation following complaints that its algorithm was used for foreign interference. Musk has previously supported nationalist or populist candidates elsewhere in Europe, but his explicit backing of Le Pen turns the governance and political use of a major social-media platform into an emerging issue for the 2027 campaign.

UK

· Andy Burnham is set to replace Keir Starmer as UK prime minister after securing nominations from 322 of Labour’s 403 MPs, leaving no rival able to reach the 81 nominations required to force a leadership contest. He is expected to become Labour leader unopposed and formally take office on July 20. Burnham has promised a government representing Labour’s “broad church,” but reports that he plans to appoint Home Secretary Shabana Mahmood as chancellor have unsettled parts of the party’s left, which had favored Energy Secretary Ed Miliband. Bloomberg reported that investors regarded Mahmood, who is associated with the more socially conservative Blue Labour tradition, as a relatively pragmatic choice that may preserve fiscal restraint. Her appointment had not been formally confirmed, but speculation helped reduce concern that the new government would move sharply toward higher spending, with the 30-year gilt yield closing 4 bp lower at 5.64%.

The incoming government faces a weak growth outlook complicated by renewed inflation and interest-rate risks. Internal Treasury forecasts cited by Bloomberg reportedly put Q4 inflation at 3.2% and warn that oil could reach $150 per barrel if the U.S.-Iran ceasefire is not restored quickly. Markets have fully priced a 25-bp BOE rate increase by September and another by year-end, while higher borrowing costs have already reduced the government’s £23.6 billion buffer against its main fiscal rule by at least £5.5 billion, according to Deutsche Bank. BOE Governor Andrew Bailey said the UK must raise both actual and potential growth while maintaining credible monetary and fiscal frameworks. He noted that potential growth has fallen from 2.8% in the 15 years before the global financial crisis to 1.3% since then, and argued that inflation would already have returned to the BOE’s 2% target without the energy shock caused by the Iran war.

Burnham is considering a larger autumn budget that could combine tax measures with departmental spending plans, although civil servants told Bloomberg that completing a full spending review within three months would be impractical. The Office for Budget Responsibility requires 10 weeks to prepare its forecasts, making October 21 the earliest feasible date after the party-conference season and IMF meetings. Burnham has committed to retaining Labour’s fiscal rules and its promises not to increase the main rates of income tax, national insurance or VAT, but he has also acknowledged that the government may eventually need to raise additional revenue. The IMF warned against his earlier proposal to lift the top income-tax rate from 45% to 50%, arguing that the UK already imposes the highest burden on high earners in the G7 and that a broad 5-pp rate increase could reduce receipts from the top tenth of earners by 0.5%. With the overall tax burden heading toward its highest level since World War II, the IMF said consolidation through taxation alone could weaken growth and instead suggested options including broader VAT coverage, property-tax reform and closer alignment of capital-gains and income-tax rates.

A land-value tax has emerged as a possible longer-term reform, but analysts warned that it cannot provide a rapid solution to the UK’s fiscal pressures. Burnham has previously supported replacing council tax and stamp duty with a levy on land, while tax specialist Dan Neidle proposed extending the reform to business rates through a tax of around 1.3% of land value. Replacing all three existing taxes would need to generate approximately £100 billion–£110 billion annually. Supporters argue that land is less mobile than labor or capital and can therefore be taxed with fewer economic distortions, but Charles Goodhart and other experts cited by Bloomberg warned that a sudden transition would reduce property values, create large changes in household bills and risk damaging the economy. They argued that implementation would have to be gradual, meaning the reform would be unlikely to generate significant additional revenue before the next general election.

Burnham’s broader domestic agenda centers on devolution, affordability and potentially greater public control of essential services. His advisers have called for reforms covering housing, energy, water and transport, along with additional support for small and medium-sized businesses. A proposal from former shadow chancellor Ed Balls and other researchers would create a Regional Growth Delivery Unit chaired by the prime minister and establish a joint growth and productivity strategy between national ministers and regional mayors by the end of 2026. Burnham has also discussed shifting more authority and investment outside Westminster, creating a second Downing Street operation in northern England and increasing defense spending toward 3.5% of GDP. However, detailed proposals on utility ownership and their fiscal cost have not yet been presented, leaving uncertainty over how quickly the new government could translate its devolution and affordability agenda into policy.

High industrial energy costs are creating a direct threat to UK manufacturing investment and capacity. A Make UK survey found that 9% of manufacturers had already transferred some production abroad because of rising business costs and around 15% were considering doing so. The Confederation of British Industry and Energy UK estimated that industrial electricity prices were 45% above the G7 median, affecting about 2.7 million businesses responsible for roughly 90% of non-household electricity use. The groups said moving legacy renewable-energy subsidies from electricity bills to general taxation could reduce business energy costs by as much as 20%, although it would shift the expense onto the public budget. Industry representatives also want the British Industrial Competitiveness Scheme, due to begin in April 2027, expanded from 10,000 to 130,000 companies and applied retroactively. These proposals could support domestic production, but they would add to the fiscal demands facing Burnham’s new government.

Burnham has signaled that he will seek a direct but pragmatic relationship with U.S. President Donald Trump. He said he would respect the UK-U.S. partnership while expressing disagreements openly, an approach that will be tested by stalled trade negotiations and the blanket 10% U.S. tariff on British imports. Relations weakened after Starmer declined to provide initial UK military support for U.S. and Israeli action against Iran, and British officials expect Trump may again request assistance if the conflict escalates. Burnham will also be advised to preserve U.S. support for Ukraine, maintain sanctions on Russia and decide whether to proceed with UK-French plans for a demining mission in the Strait of Hormuz after any lasting peace agreement. The combination of trade, Ukraine and Middle East security therefore makes relations with Washington an immediate economic as well as diplomatic priority.

· The UK economy expanded 0.1% m/m in May after contracting 0.1% in April, exceeding the unchanged reading expected by economists surveyed by Bloomberg. Growth came entirely from services, where output rose 0.3%, supported by medical research, retail activity and warm-weather spending; consumer-facing services increased 0.5%, while retail sales advanced 1.2%. By contrast, construction output fell 0.8% and production declined 0.5%, as lower energy and utilities output outweighed a small manufacturing gain. The broader trend was firmer than the monthly headline: GDP grew 0.7% in the three months to May, marking a sixth consecutive three-month expansion, and stood 1.3% above its year-earlier level in May. Bloomberg Economics said the result showed resilience to high energy prices, tighter financial conditions and political uncertainty, but expects growth to weaken in the second half as renewed U.S.-Iran hostilities create additional downside risk. The mixed outlook complicates the BOE’s July decision because subdued activity argues for caution while the renewed energy shock may keep inflation above the 2% target. Pantheon Macroeconomics expects an extended period of unchanged rates but considers a hike more likely than a cut because growth has been stronger than the BOE anticipated.

Asia

· China’s economic growth slowed to 4.3% y/y in Q2 from 5.0% in Q1, falling below both the government’s 4.5%–5.0% annual target range and the 4.5% median estimate in Bloomberg’s survey of economists. GDP expanded 0.9% q/q, its weakest quarterly pace in more than two years, while first-half growth reached 4.7%. Services remained the main support, rising 5.1% y/y in Q2, led by double-digit growth in information technology and business services, while secondary-industry growth slowed to 3.0% and construction contracted 4.1%. Morgan Stanley, Goldman Sachs and ANZ subsequently lowered their 2026 growth forecasts to 4.5%–4.6%. Standard Chartered’s Ding Shuang expects the government to accelerate spending already authorized in the budget rather than immediately introduce a large new package, while Bloomberg Economics argues that the weaker performance strengthens the case for faster fiscal implementation and additional monetary easing.

China’s GDP deflator rose an estimated 1.6% y/y in Q2, according to Bloomberg calculations, ending roughly three years of economy-wide price declines. The improvement was driven mainly by higher imported energy costs rather than stronger domestic demand. ANZ’s Raymond Yeung described the shift as cost-driven inflation, while Macquarie’s Larry Hu said rising oil prices had lifted producer costs but simultaneously weakened production and fuel consumption. Bloomberg Economics argued that China’s lower oil dependence, stable currency, excess manufacturing capacity and underemployment make a self-sustaining wage-price cycle unlikely, meaning an external energy shock alone will not resolve the economy’s domestic deflation problem. Consumer and core inflation also slowed in June, reinforcing the view that underlying demand remained weak despite the positive deflator.

China’s industrial production rose 5.3% y/y in June, accelerating by 0.8 pp from May and exceeding economists’ forecasts in Bloomberg’s survey. Output increased 0.76% m/m, while first-half industrial growth reached 5.4% y/y. Manufacturing expanded 6.0% and high-technology manufacturing rose 14.1%, led by increases of 15.7% in computers and communications equipment and 18.2% in railway, ship and aerospace equipment. New-energy vehicle output climbed 29.4%, although total vehicle production slipped 0.2% and crude-oil processing fell 17.7%. Mining output declined 2.2%, including a 5.9% fall in coal mining, while electricity, heat, gas and water production increased 7.4%. The sectoral mix shows that industrial strength remained concentrated in advanced manufacturing and utilities, while commodity-related activity and several traditional industries weakened.

China’s retail sales increased 1.0% y/y in June after falling 0.6% in May, surprising economists surveyed by Bloomberg who had expected another small decline. Sales excluding automobiles rose 3.0%, while vehicle purchases fell 16.1%, petroleum-related sales declined 5.1% and household-appliance sales dropped 8.7%. Telecommunications equipment remained strong with growth of 16.5%, while cosmetics and cultural and office products also posted double-digit gains. First-half retail growth was limited to 1.3%, with online goods sales rising 4.8% and catering revenue increasing 2.8%. Rural sales grew faster than urban sales, but the overall pace remained weak and was partly supported by promotions during the “618” online shopping festival. The figures point to selective demand for technology and everyday goods rather than a broad recovery in household consumption.

China’s fixed-asset investment fell 5.7% y/y in the first half of 2026, a sharper contraction than economists expected and a deterioration from the 4.1% decline recorded through May. Investment decreased 0.37% m/m in June, while almost every major category weakened: infrastructure investment fell 2.4%, manufacturing declined 1.2%, services investment dropped 8.4% and private investment contracted 8.5%. Spending on equipment and instruments increased 8.1%, while investment in intellectual-property products rose 9.4%, showing continued expansion in selected modernization projects. China’s fixed-investment data have nevertheless become difficult to reconcile with GDP, because investment represents about 40% of the economy and gross capital formation has continued to support official growth. The National Bureau of Statistics attributes the divergence to differences in coverage and calculation, although economists cited by Bloomberg question whether these methodological factors fully explain the gap.

China’s property contraction deepened in the first half, with real estate development investment falling 18.0% y/y, the steepest decline in data extending back to 1992. Residential investment dropped 17.8%, new construction starts declined 23.4%, completed floor space fell 23.7% and the area under construction decreased 12.5%. New-property sales were down 11.6% by floor area and 13.6% by value, while residential sales revenue declined 13.7%. Funding available to developers contracted 20.2%, including declines of 31.7% in domestic loans and 24.9% in individual mortgage financing. Although the stock of commercial property available for sale edged down 0.9%, the broad weakness in investment, construction, sales and financing shows that the property sector remained a major drag on domestic demand.

China’s merchandise trade strengthened sharply in June, with exports reaching a record $412 billion, up 27% y/y, and imports increasing 36%, their fastest growth in five years. The trade surplus widened to $125.6 billion, its second-largest monthly level on record, while first-half exports rose nearly 18% to more than $2 trillion. AI-related products remained important: semiconductor exports jumped 122% in dollar terms and computer-related shipments increased 53%, although semiconductor volumes declined 0.4%, indicating that higher prices accounted for much of the gain. Export growth also broadened, with vehicle shipments exceeding 1 million units and rising 70% by value, while ships and home appliances increased 42% and 15%, respectively. Bloomberg Economics expects exports to remain the main growth engine without stronger domestic stimulus but warns that the economy is becoming more exposed to the global technology cycle. China’s surplus with the EU reached a record $32.9 billion, up 27% y/y, increasing the risk of a stronger European policy response.

The PBOC retained its “moderately loose” monetary-policy stance but did not signal immediate large-scale easing after the weaker Q2 data. Deputy Governor Zou Lan said the central bank would use policy instruments according to liquidity needs and adjust interest rates in response to economic and inflation conditions. The restrained message suggests that policymakers may initially prioritize faster execution of previously approved fiscal measures, particularly infrastructure spending. Bloomberg Economics nevertheless believes the sharper-than-expected slowdown and continued weakness in investment strengthen the case for further monetary support, while strong exports reduce the immediate pressure for an aggressive response.

Foreign Exchange Markets

The U.S. dollar weakened over the week, with the DXY index down 0.2%.

Commodities and Energy Markets

The commodities complex ended the week mostly higher, led by a surge in oil prices amid renewed escalation in the Middle East.

Debt and Fixed Income Markets

According to CME data, the implied Fed funds rate curve over the next 18 months shifted lower by an average of 4 bp, leaving the implied policy rate for December 2027 around 2 bp below the prior week’s level.

Softer-than-expected inflation data reduced the perceived need for an immediate rate increase. Consequently, the implied probability of a hike at the July meeting fell to 12.8% from 34.2% a week earlier. Looking further ahead, markets continued to price a likely move in September but assigned a lower probability to a second increase. In total, futures now imply around 29 bp of cumulative tightening by year-end 2026, down from 34 bp a week earlier.

The U.S. Treasury yield curve moved slightly lower overall. According to Bloomberg, the 1-year yield fell 6 bp to 3.99%, the 10-year yield slipped 1 bp to 4.55%, and the 30-year yield edged up 1 bp to 5.07%. The pattern suggests that softer inflation mainly reduced near-term policy pressure, while longer-dated yields remained supported by supply and fiscal concerns.

You can find more articles in our Telegram channel at https://t.me/atranicapital_eng

The reaction captures how the AI debate has changed. The question is no longer whether companies are spending or whether demand exists. Both are clearly visible. Investors are now asking whether one of the largest capital-spending cycles in history can generate adequate returns—and whether semiconductor valuations already assume that spending will continue accelerating almost indefinitely.

The Philadelphia Semiconductor Index remains up 67.6% this year, compared with 10.1% for the S&P 500, but its gain has fallen from around 90% in late June. The index is now almost 19% below its peak. The decline is notable because it has occurred while the industry’s operating results remain extremely strong. TSMC expects even higher investment over the next three years, while SK Hynix believes the memory shortage could persist beyond 2030. Fundamentals have not collapsed; the price investors are prepared to pay for them has started to change.

There is also more evidence that AI capex is beginning to produce revenue. As discussed in our recent article, Exponential View estimates that the generative-AI economy has reached about $110 billion in trailing revenue and is running at a $175 billion annualized pace. Microsoft says its AI business has passed a $37 billion annual revenue run rate, while Google Cloud revenue grew 63% and Meta continues to extract substantial gains from AI-supported advertising. This is not a repeat of 1999 in which many companies had little more than a website and a business plan.

However, the investment threshold is rising much faster than the evidence of profitability. The largest U.S. hyperscalers may spend as much as $725 billion this year, mostly on data centers, chips and networking equipment, while Bloomberg consensus estimates put 2027 spending close to $1 trillion. JPMorgan estimates global AI-related investment could reach $5.5 trillion through 2030. The more capacity the industry builds, the more revenue it must eventually produce to cover depreciation, power, labor, financing and continuous hardware replacement.

BlackRock’s Helen Jewell argues that the cycle still has another two or three years to run before the market seriously questions whether end users are earning sufficient returns. Existing commitments are simply too large to unwind quickly, while demand for computing capacity continues to exceed supply. Her argument is not that returns are already proven, but that the financial reckoning is probably further away than the current volatility suggests.

The problem is that the AI race encourages companies to invest before those returns become clear. Microsoft, Alphabet, Amazon and Meta cannot comfortably reduce spending while competitors continue building. Falling behind could weaken their cloud platforms, model capabilities and broader technology ecosystems. Investment is therefore partly defensive: companies are spending not only because current returns are attractive, but because the potential cost of losing the race may be even larger.

A recent Bank for International Settlements study argues that this winner-takes-most structure can produce excessive investment even when every participant is behaving rationally. Industry-wide spending advances the technology, but the eventual profits may accrue to only a few winners. The BIS model estimates current overinvestment at around 1.5 times the economically efficient level, potentially rising to three times if demand proves less responsive than expected. The technology may succeed while many of the companies financing it still earn poor returns.

The financing structure makes the final demand increasingly difficult to measure. Chipmakers and cloud providers invest in AI developers, which commit to buying computing capacity from the same cloud companies, which then purchase more chips. These are real investments and contracts, but the same capital can support several apparently independent indicators of value: a higher private valuation for the AI lab, a larger backlog for the cloud provider and more revenue for the semiconductor supplier.

OpenAI and Anthropic illustrate the scale. Both have raised enormous private rounds at valuations approaching $1 trillion while preparing for potential IPOs. Those valuations assume that frontier-model developers will capture a large share of the eventual AI profit pool, even as competition is becoming more intense. The circularity does not make their revenue fictitious, but it blurs the distinction between demand financed by strategic partners and demand generated by profitable outside customers.

Oracle provides the clearest example of how this structure can migrate into credit risk. The company is undertaking a $250 billion data-center expansion and has burned more than $20 billion after capex over the past four quarters. S&P downgraded it to BBB−, one step above junk, while estimating that its free-cash-flow deficit could widen to $42 billion. Oracle plans to raise about $40 billion through debt and equity this fiscal year after selling $25 billion of bonds in February.

The concentration behind those numbers is equally important. S&P estimates that roughly half of Oracle’s $638 billion in remaining performance obligations is tied to OpenAI. That backlog provides considerable future revenue visibility, but much of it depends on a single customer that must continue raising capital to meet its own enormous computing commitments. Oracle must spend the cash now, while the associated revenue will arrive over many years.

The largest AI infrastructure builders—Alphabet, Amazon, Meta, Microsoft and Oracle—have collectively added around $350 billion of debt obligations over five years, according to Bloomberg. Interest expense remains easily manageable for the strongest hyperscalers, but the balance-sheet differences are widening. Google still generated about $64 billion in free cash flow over the latest year, while Amazon’s quarterly free cash flow turned negative and Oracle is approaching the boundary between investment-grade and high-yield debt.

Some obligations are also moving outside traditional corporate balance sheets. Long-term data-center leases transfer the immediate construction cost to developers and private-credit investors, but the hyperscalers remain responsible for years of payments. The BIS estimates that these arrangements increasingly substitute future operating expenses for current capex without removing the underlying economic commitment. The risk has not disappeared; it has changed owners.

Accounting adds another uncertainty. Several hyperscalers depreciate servers and networking equipment over approximately five or six years, even though AI chips are improving much faster and rental prices for older processors can decline sharply. Longer assumed useful lives reduce annual depreciation and support current earnings, but they may overstate how long the equipment remains commercially competitive. Amazon has already shortened the estimated life of some servers from six years to five, explicitly citing the faster pace of AI and machine-learning development.

This matters because AI revenue has only recently begun to cover estimated depreciation. Reported depreciation may still understate the true economic cost if expensive processors must be replaced earlier than their accounting schedules assume. The current profitability milestone is meaningful, but it does not yet prove that the industry can finance successive generations of hardware without further pressure on cash flow.

At the same time, competition is attacking the revenue side of the equation. OpenAI, Meta and SpaceXAI have recently emphasized the lower cost and greater token efficiency of their latest models as corporate customers become more careful about AI bills. Model-routing services allow businesses to select cheaper systems for individual tasks, while increasingly capable open models make it harder for frontier developers to maintain premium pricing.

China adds another source of pressure. Moonshot says its new Kimi K3 model rivals leading products from OpenAI and Anthropic on some benchmarks, while costing roughly half as much as Claude Opus and GPT-5.5. Those claims still need broader validation, but the announcement helped trigger another sharp decline in global chip stocks. The concern is not necessarily that cheaper models will reduce AI usage. They may greatly expand it. The risk is that usage grows while revenue per task and demand for the most expensive training infrastructure fall.

Hyperscalers are applying the same logic to hardware by developing their own processors. Morgan Stanley’s Lisa Shalett argues that high prices and bottlenecks encourage engineers to find cheaper substitutes, limiting the pricing power of merchant chipmakers and memory suppliers. AI demand may therefore remain strong while more of its economic value shifts from infrastructure suppliers to the companies buying and optimizing that infrastructure.

The macroeconomic payoff is even less certain. Nobel laureate Christopher Pissarides sees little evidence that AI will restore the rapid productivity growth of the 1980s and 1990s, noting that a large share of employment in areas such as nursing and hospitality has limited direct exposure. The most AI-intensive industries would need to generate exceptionally large gains to lift economy-wide productivity by the amounts implied in the most optimistic forecasts.

That skepticism does not mean AI will have no economic impact. General-purpose technologies often take years to appear in productivity data because companies must reorganize workflows, train employees and redesign products before the benefits become visible. The timing mismatch remains uncomfortable: the infrastructure is being built and financed now, while much of the productivity payoff may arrive later—or prove smaller than assumed.

Meanwhile, the spending surge is already affecting the rest of the technology sector. IBM said customers redirected budgets from mainframes and related software toward supply-constrained servers, storage and memory. Corporate IT budgets did not expand enough to accommodate everything, so AI infrastructure received priority while other projects were delayed. As Zacks Investment Management’s Brian Mulberry put it, demand for other services still exists, but “there’s only a finite amount of capex that can be spent.”

The pressure extends beyond IBM. Salesforce and ServiceNow have lost roughly one-third of their value this year, while a broader index of software-as-a-service companies is down 26%. Consensus earnings growth for the software and services sector in 2027 has also declined for seven consecutive weeks, according to Bloomberg Intelligence. Cybersecurity is a notable exception, with the sector gaining 46% as AI raises the threat from automated attacks. The result is a sharper divide within technology: AI is not simply creating winners and losers between sectors, but reallocating budgets within software itself.

The same competition for resources is pushing up prices. JPMorgan estimates that some memory-chip costs could rise by as much as 400% between 2024 and the end of this year. Apple has raised prices on some laptops and iPads by 15–25%, while Microsoft, Sony, Dell and HP have also increased hardware prices. Electricity costs are rising as data centers compete for limited grid capacity, with the IEA expecting U.S. data-center power consumption to increase about 130% from 2024 levels by 2030.

New York Fed President John Williams has warned that persistent AI demand relative to available supply could create an inflationary impulse that monetary policy should not ignore. If those pressures make inflation more persistent, the Fed may need to raise rates. AI could therefore be disinflationary in the long run through higher productivity, but inflationary during the construction phase through stronger demand for chips, power, construction and capital.

That would create a difficult feedback loop. Higher rates would increase financing costs just as hyperscalers and infrastructure developers become more dependent on debt, reducing the returns on projects that were approved when credit was cheaper. Oracle’s bonds are already demonstrating that capital is not free: its ten-year debt has traded much closer to BB-rated securities than to the broader BBB market.

None of this means the AI cycle is about to end. TSMC’s results, memory shortages and continuing capacity constraints suggest the buildout remains powerful. Jewell’s expectation of another two or three years of durable spending is plausible, and past technology booms experienced several corrections before reaching their final peak.

But the investment question is changing from whether AI spending will remain high to whether it can continue growing fast enough to satisfy the expectations embedded in suppliers. UBS expects hyperscaler capex to rise 76% this year, followed by 25% in 2027 and only 6% in 2028. Spending could remain close to record levels while becoming a headwind for semiconductor companies priced for continued acceleration.

Slower capex growth could eventually favor the buyers of AI infrastructure over its suppliers, but it may still be too early for that rotation. A UBS basket of Amazon, Alphabet, Meta, Microsoft and Oracle has rebounded about 7% from its June low as investors reduced expensive semiconductor exposure, yet it remains down 3% this year. Societe Generale strategist Manish Kabra argues that the hyperscalers may not return to positive free cash flow until the second half of 2027 and that their borrowing needs will continue limiting the valuation premium investors are willing to pay.

The longer-term logic nevertheless remains valid. If capex growth slows, chipmakers and equipment suppliers lose part of their strongest earnings driver, while hyperscalers retain more cash and benefit from cheaper infrastructure. The next stage of the cycle could then favor software companies, banks, healthcare providers and other businesses that apply AI rather than build it. But the transition may involve an uncomfortable period in which infrastructure suppliers lose momentum before the largest spenders have repaired their free cash flow.

Positioning makes that transition more important. In the July BofA Global Fund Manager Survey, a record 82% of respondents identified long global semiconductors as the world’s most crowded trade, yet none reported being short. Some 48% viewed hyperscaler capex as the most likely source of a systemic credit event, but 61% did not expect any major spender to announce a capex cut this year. Investors still believe in the cycle; they are increasingly worried about what it will cost.

The strongest technologies do not always produce the strongest investments. Railways, telecommunications networks and the internet transformed the economy, but each attracted more capital than the early economics could support. AI may follow the same pattern: genuine demand, extraordinary innovation and long-term productivity gains alongside excessive capacity, financial stress and large losses for companies that build too much or capture too little of the final value.

The TSMC selloff does not show that the AI boom is over. It shows that excellent results are no longer sufficient when valuations already assume years of exceptional growth. From here, the winners will be determined less by who spends the most and more by who can turn that spending into durable cash flow before the cost of capital, competition and obsolescence catch up.

You can find more articles in our Telegram channel at https://t.me/atranicapital_eng

while average cash holdings fell to 3.6% from 4.1%, the lowest since February and below the 4% threshold that triggers BofA’s contrarian Cash Rule “sell” signal. BofA has recorded only 16 previous instances of cash at 3.6% or lower since 2002. On average, global equities fell 1% over the following two weeks and 0.5% over the following month, while Treasuries outperformed. The historical sample is small, but unusually low cash leaves less liquidity available to buy a setback and may force managers to sell existing holdings if redemptions or volatility increase.

The combination suggests that investors are no longer merely constructive: positioning has become sufficiently bullish to leave markets vulnerable if the increasingly optimistic macro consensus is challenged.

That warning is reinforced by BofA’s broader Bull & Bear Indicator. In Michael Hartnett’s July 10 Flow Show, the gauge stood at an extremely bullish 9.5 out of 10, up from 8.8 a month earlier and its highest level in five years. This was well above the 8.0 threshold that triggers a contrarian “sell” signal. Over the past 24 years, the indicator has generated 17 such signals, after which the MSCI ACWI fell by an average of 2–3% over the following two to three months, although the hit rate was only around 60%. Maximum drawdowns reached 15–20% in the most severe cases. The signal therefore does not imply an immediate or certain decline, but suggests that bullish positioning has left markets more vulnerable to a reversal. BofA’s Global Flow Trading Model reinforced that warning, remaining on a sell signal for an eighth consecutive week, while Hartnett recommended reducing equity and high-beta exposure as crowded positioning could limit further summer gains.

The macro outlook changed sharply. A net 21% of investors now expect the global economy to strengthen over the next 12 months, compared with a net 1% expecting weaker growth in June and a net 14% in May. This was the strongest reading since February and a five-month high, bringing economic expectations closer to the strength already reflected in U.S. equities.

A record 54% now expect a “no landing,” up from 40% in June, while 39% anticipate a soft landing and only 2% see a hard landing, down from 5%. Recession concerns have therefore almost disappeared from portfolio managers’ central scenario. This is supportive for earnings, but it also removes one potential source of upside: with 93% expecting either no landing or a soft landing, economic resilience is now overwhelmingly the consensus rather than a contrarian view.

The nature of that optimism has also changed. Some 41% now describe the likely environment as a “boom,” combining above-trend growth with above-trend inflation, up from 36% in June and the highest since February 2022. Stagflation remains the most popular scenario at 47%, but its share fell sharply from 58%, while expectations for either Goldilocks or outright stagnation remain very low. Investors are therefore not embracing a conventional low-inflation expansion. Instead, they increasingly expect strong nominal growth to continue even as inflation remains above its long-term norm.

At the same time, near-term inflation concerns have collapsed. A net 4% now expect global inflation to decline over the next year, a dramatic reversal from June, when a net 45% expected higher inflation, and May, when the figure reached 66%. Expectations for higher short-term interest rates fell alongside them to a net 1% from 34% in June.

The shift was supported by a steep decline in the survey’s average end-2026 oil-price forecast to $71 per barrel from $86. Some 47% expect oil to finish between $70 and $80, while 33% anticipate $60–70; only 11% see a price above $80, compared with 68% in June. However, the survey was conducted after the interim U.S.–Iran ceasefire and largely before hostilities resumed, meaning that some of the abrupt improvement in oil and inflation expectations may already be vulnerable to changing geopolitical conditions.

July’s responses also showed little immediate concern about further Fed tightening. In June, 40% of investors expected at least one rate increase over the following 12 months, while in July 83% said the Fed would not raise rates before the November midterm elections and only 14% expected a hike by then. The questions cover different time horizons and therefore do not represent a precise month-to-month comparison, but the July result still shows that managers see little immediate threat of renewed tightening. This combination of stronger growth, lower near-term inflation and limited Fed tightening is highly supportive for risk assets, but it also creates a narrow consensus: markets may now be particularly sensitive to any renewed rise in inflation, oil prices or bond yields.

The change in sentiment was also visible in managers’ overall risk appetite. A net 6% reported taking more risk than normal relative to their benchmarks, up from 2% in June. Global equity allocation increased to a net 42% overweight from 38%, while bond positioning improved to a still-deep net 34% underweight from 42%. Together with historically low cash, these readings show that managers have moved beyond economic optimism and are expressing it through more aggressive portfolios.

The monthly allocation changes show where that additional risk went. Managers added most heavily to healthcare and eurozone equities, followed by bonds, Japan, the U.S. and industrials. They made the largest reductions in energy, commodities and UK equities, while also cutting emerging markets, communications, consumer staples and technology. The rotation was therefore not a simple move into the highest-beta assets: investors increased overall equity exposure while shifting part of their portfolios away from commodities and crowded technology holdings toward healthcare, industrials and developed markets.

After these changes, managers were most overweight global equities, healthcare and emerging markets, followed by banks, industrials and U.S. equities. They remained most underweight UK equities, bonds and consumer staples, with consumer discretionary, energy and real estate also underweight. U.S. allocation rose to a net 24% overweight from 17%, its highest since December 2024 and third-highest level in five years. Eurozone equities moved to a net 2% overweight from a 15% underweight, while Japan flipped to a net 3% overweight from a 5% underweight. Emerging-market exposure declined to a still-large net 32% overweight from 42%, whereas UK positioning deteriorated to a net 37% underweight from 24%, its weakest since August 2020. This combination suggests that managers still favor equities, but are shifting toward the U.S., eurozone and Japan while reducing emerging-market, UK and commodity exposure.

Consumer exposure has become exceptionally unpopular. Combined positioning in consumer staples and discretionary stocks fell to a net 53% underweight, the lowest allocation since May 2006.

Staples alone reached their largest underweight since February 2014. At the same time, the preference for low-dividend stocks over high-dividend stocks turned positive for the first time since May 2017: a net 3% now expect low-yielding shares to outperform, compared with a net 5% preference for high-dividend stocks in June. Together, the two findings suggest that managers prefer capital appreciation to defensive income, but do not expect consumer-facing companies to lead the expansion.

Style preferences nevertheless show that investors are not chasing every form of market risk equally. A net 56% expect companies with high-quality earnings to outperform those with low-quality earnings, up from 48% in June and the strongest conviction among the surveyed factors. A net 31% favor large caps over small caps, although this is down sharply from 54%, while only 13% expect high-momentum stocks to outperform, compared with 23% in June. A net 6% prefer value to growth, reversing June’s modest preference for growth, while a net 19% expect high-volatility stocks to beat low-volatility shares. July was therefore risk-on without being an indiscriminate momentum chase: managers increased market exposure while placing greater emphasis on earnings quality and becoming less confident that the strongest recent performers would continue to lead.

The AI trade remains the clearest expression of both market optimism and positioning risk. A record 82% of respondents identified long global semiconductors as the world’s most crowded trade, up from the previous record of 80% in June and 73% in May. No other answer came close: long Magnificent Seven stocks fell to 7% from 12%, long the U.S. dollar attracted 4%, short European equities 3% and long oil only 2%. Semiconductors have therefore eclipsed every other recent consensus trade in the survey. Although the question measures perceptions rather than actual portfolio weights, an 82% reading shows that the crowding risk is exceptionally widely recognized. That may create an asymmetric market response: further good news could attract fewer new buyers, while a disappointment in earnings or AI investment could prompt many investors to reduce exposure simultaneously.

The crowding does not mean investors have abandoned the underlying AI thesis. Although some managers trimmed technology exposure during July, none reported being short the sector. Some 61% do not expect any major AI hyperscaler to announce a capital-spending cut in 2026, compared with 28% who expect a reduction. There is also a notable gap between investors’ broader concerns and their assessment of current valuations: 48% said AI stocks are not in a bubble, compared with 43% who believe they are. The difference is narrow, but more managers still see the risks as prospective rather than evidence that a bubble has already formed. Continued data-center construction, demand for accelerators and the associated memory cycle therefore remain central supports for semiconductor earnings. The concern is not that the AI investment cycle has already ended, but that an unusually large share of investors is relying on the same secular story.

That tension is visible in perceptions of market risk. An AI bubble became the leading tail risk, cited by 45% of managers, up from 28% in June. A second inflation wave fell to second place at 26% from 34%, followed by a disorderly rise in bond yields at 14% and geopolitical conflict at 8%.

AI hyperscaler capital spending was also identified by 48% of managers as the most likely source of a systemic credit event, ahead of private credit at 34%. All other potential sources were far behind: consumer credit attracted 5%, an Asian currency crisis 4%, and UK government debt and crypto 2% each.

Investors are therefore simultaneously confident that AI spending will continue and concerned about the financial consequences if the investment cycle becomes too large or fails to generate adequate returns. They see AI as the market’s main potential source of systemic risk without yet concluding that the sector is already in a bubble. The central concern is no longer whether AI demand is genuine, but whether hyperscalers can earn adequate returns on their enormous investments without placing pressure on balance sheets and credit markets.

Gold stands apart from the survey’s crowded risk positions. A net 5% of managers now regard it as undervalued, the most favorable assessment since March 2023 and a sharp reversal from the strong overvaluation readings recorded during 2025 and early 2026. This does not guarantee renewed demand, but suggests that sentiment has reset enough to leave more room for interest to return if inflation, geopolitical risk or market volatility rises.

Overall, the July survey marks a clear transition from June’s selective risk reduction back to aggressive risk-taking. Investors now expect stronger growth, sharply lower inflation pressure, little near-term risk of a Fed hike and continued AI capital spending. They have responded by reducing cash, increasing equities and taking above-normal portfolio risk. Yet the resulting positioning has become increasingly stretched: cash is below BofA’s sell-signal threshold, the Bull & Bear Indicator has reached 9.5, U.S. exposure is the highest since December 2024 and a record 82% identify semiconductors as the market’s most crowded trade. The survey’s message is therefore more cautious than the macro optimism initially suggests. The economic backdrop may remain supportive, but the margin for disappointment has narrowed because investors are already positioned for much of the good news.

You can find more articles in our Telegram channel at https://t.me/atranicapital_eng

Nvidia was the clearest driver. The shares rose after reports that China may allow leading AI companies to buy a limited number of H200 processors. Wells Fargo estimates that shipments of around 200,000 chips could generate $6–8 billion in revenue. The strategic importance is larger: Nvidia once controlled about 95% of China’s advanced-chip market, and Jensen Huang estimates the country’s AI-chip market could be worth $50 billion this year. Still, limited volumes and Beijing’s support for domestic alternatives remain constraints.

Meta’s gain reflected more tangible progress on AI monetization. The company reportedly plans to begin manufacturing its in-house Iris chip in September, double computing capacity next year, and charge developers for access to its Muse Spark 1.1 model at roughly one-quarter of comparable OpenAI and Anthropic pricing. Broadcom advanced after expanding its Apple partnership through 2031, securing more than $30 billion of expected business and strengthening its position in custom chips.

This concentration matters as Q2 earnings season begins. LSEG I/B/E/S expects S&P 500 EPS to rise 23.7% y/y, but Goldman Sachs estimates AI infrastructure companies may contribute nearly 60% of that growth, with Nvidia and Micron alone accounting for more than 40%. With semiconductor positioning already extreme, guidance on AI spending, utilization and monetization may matter more than headline earnings beats.

Global equities were mixed, with the global ex-U.S. index up 0.3%. Emerging markets outperformed, led by China, as investors rotated from crowded semiconductor markets into cheaper Chinese technology shares. The MCHI ETF gained 4.4%, helped by a 12% rise in Alibaba’s Hong Kong shares and optimism around China’s domestic AI supply chain.

Crypto continued to advance modestly. Total market capitalization rose 1.4%, while Bitcoin gained 2.5%. More importantly, U.S. spot Bitcoin ETFs ended a record eight-week redemption streak with $197 million of net inflows, offering tentative evidence that institutional selling pressure is easing.

Global growth improved only slightly in June. The J.P. Morgan Global Composite PMI rose to 52.0 from 51.9, consistent with annualized GDP growth of roughly 2.5%. Manufacturing remained stronger than services, though factory momentum slowed as precautionary stockpiling faded. Employment declined for a second month and business confidence fell to its lowest since October 2022, suggesting the improvement remains fragile.

Rates markets turned more hawkish. The implied Fed funds curve shifted about 7 bp higher as renewed U.S.–Iran tensions lifted oil prices and revived inflation concerns. The probability of a July hike rose to 34.2% from 21.9%, while futures now price about 34 bp of cumulative tightening by year-end 2026. Treasury yields rose across the curve: the 1-year climbed to 4.05%, the 10-year to 4.56%, and the 30-year to 5.06%, according to Bloomberg.

For comprehensive insights and deeper context, please refer to the full article.

US Stock Market

U.S. equities finished higher, but once again the headline indexes overstated the breadth of the advance. The S&P 500 gained 1.2% and the Nasdaq Composite rose 1.7%, while the Dow slipped 0.5%. Large-cap growth led, but mid- and small-cap segments declined across styles. According to our calculations, just three stocks — Nvidia, Meta and Broadcom — accounted for almost all of the S&P 500’s weekly gain, making this another highly concentrated move rather than a broad market rally.

Nvidia was the clearest driver. The shares rose after the ​Information reported that China was preparing to allow leading AI companies, including Alibaba, ByteDance and DeepSeek, to purchase a limited number of H200 processors. Beijing may approve fewer than 200,000 chips in total, less than half the amount requested, so the immediate opportunity is meaningful but not transformative. Wells Fargo estimates that shipments of around 200,000 units could generate $6–8 billion in revenue at average prices of $35,000–$40,000 per chip. The strategic importance is larger than the near-term revenue estimate suggests: before U.S. export restrictions tightened, Nvidia controlled about 95% of China’s advanced-chip market, and the country once generated 13% of its total revenue. Jensen Huang has estimated that China’s AI-chip market alone could be worth $50 billion this year. The approval therefore offers Nvidia a possible route back into a major market where its share had effectively fallen to zero, although limited purchase volumes and Beijing’s push for domestic alternatives remain important constraints.

Meta’s gain reflected more direct evidence that its huge AI spending may be starting to produce both efficiencies and new revenue. According to Reuters, the company plans to begin manufacturing its in-house Iris AI chip in September and to double its computing capacity to 14 gigawatts next year. The chip is designed to supplement, rather than fully replace, Nvidia and AMD processors, while lowering costs and giving Meta more control over its infrastructure. Meta also introduced a paid version of its Muse Spark 1.1 model, its first serious attempt to charge developers for model access, with API pricing set at roughly one-quarter of comparable offerings from OpenAI and Anthropic. Together, the announcements gave investors a more tangible answer to the question of how Meta plans to monetize its AI investment.

Broadcom’s rise had a different catalyst. Its expanded agreement with Apple extends their partnership through 2031, secures more than $30 billion of expected business and includes both wireless components and custom chips for future Apple products. The deal reduces concerns that Apple will quickly replace Broadcom’s technology with in-house designs and strengthens Broadcom’s position in custom AI silicon.

The narrow leadership matters because the Q2 earnings season is about to begin. LSEG I/B/E/S expects S&P 500 EPS to rise 23.7% y/y after a 29.4% increase in Q1, but Goldman Sachs estimates that AI infrastructure companies may contribute nearly 60% of the quarter’s earnings growth, with Nvidia and Micron alone accounting for more than 40%. That leaves the market heavily dependent on a small number of companies meeting already demanding expectations. With semiconductor positioning described by JPMorgan as extreme, guidance on AI spending, utilization and monetization may matter more than the headline earnings beats themselves.

Sector performance was mixed over the week, with five of eleven sectors posting gains and six finishing lower. Technology rose 2.9%, supported by strength in Nvidia and Broadcom, while Communication Services advanced 1.9% as Meta’s rally outweighed weakness elsewhere in the group. Energy was the strongest sector, gaining 3.5% as oil prices moved higher, while Financials and Consumer Discretionary posted only marginal advances. By contrast, Materials fell 2.2% and Health Care declined 1.8% as the previous week’s biopharma rally partly reversed, with AbbVie, Merck, Johnson & Johnson and Eli Lilly all retreating. Industrials, Consumer Staples, Utilities and Real Estate also finished lower. The sector split therefore remained narrow, with gains concentrated in a few large technology and communications names alongside Energy, while most of the market failed to participate.

The Fear & Greed Index surged to 49 from 32 a week earlier.

SPY’s recovery gathered more momentum this week, with the ETF climbing back toward its June high and holding comfortably above the 20- and 50-day moving averages. That keeps buyers in control and suggests the late-June weakness was a pause rather than a deeper reversal, while the 100- and 200-day averages remain far below and continue to support the broader uptrend. Momentum has improved without becoming stretched, with RSI near 59, pointing to steady demand rather than an overheated chase. In the near term, the 758–760 area remains the key ceiling; a clean move above it would mark a fresh breakout, while initial support sits around 741–744 near the short-term averages, followed by the 736–737 breakout zone if the market loses some traction.

The Q2 2026 earnings season is about to officially begin. According to LSEG I/B/E/S, aggregate S&P 500 EPS is projected to rise 23.7% y/y, or 19.6% excluding the Energy sector, following exceptionally strong 29.4% growth in Q1.

The season will be an important test for a market whose rally has been supported by rapid profit growth. Goldman Sachs estimates that AI infrastructure companies could contribute nearly 60% of the S&P 500’s quarterly EPS growth, with Micron and Nvidia alone accounting for more than 40%. Investors will therefore focus not only on results from the hyperscalers, but also on whether AI spending is spreading through the wider economy and beginning to generate measurable returns for companies outside Big Tech.

The hurdle is high after the wave of AI-related earnings surprises in the previous quarter. Goldman’s Christian Mueller-Glissmann expects companies to continue beating forecasts, but argues that another large surprise cycle may be harder to repeat. With the largest U.S. technology companies expected to spend as much as $725 billion this year on data centers, chips and networking equipment, guidance on efficiency, utilization and AI monetization may matter more than the headline numbers themselves. The structural AI trend remains intact, but investors are likely to become more selective about which companies can turn heavy investment into durable earnings.

In the upcoming week beginning July 13, 32 S&P 500 companies are scheduled to report, including several major financial institutions. Market attention will be particularly focused on the following high-profile earnings releases:

Global Markets

Global country ETFs once again posted mixed performance, with the global ex-U.S. equity index edging up 0.3% for the week. In contrast to the previous week, developed markets were broadly flat, while emerging markets moved higher, led by China. The MCHI ETF gained 4.4% as investors rotated out of crowded semiconductor markets in South Korea and Taiwan and into cheaper Chinese technology stocks that had lagged badly this year.

Alibaba was a major driver of the move. Its Hong Kong shares jumped 12% after reports that losses in its instant-commerce business had narrowed faster than expected while overall profitability remained stable, raising hopes that investors could refocus on the company’s cloud and AI businesses. Sentiment was also helped by news that DeepSeek is developing its own inference chip, a step that could reduce its dependence on Nvidia and Huawei and deepen China’s domestic AI supply chain.

ACWX remains in a holding pattern near the top of its recent range, with neither buyers nor sellers taking clear control. The ETF finished almost exactly on its 20-day moving average and remains above the 50-, 100-, and 200-day lines, so the broader uptrend is still intact even as the short-term advance has stalled. Momentum is neutral, with RSI near 51, matching a market that is consolidating rather than building fresh upside pressure. In the near term, a sustained move above 76 would improve the tone and bring the June highs around 77–78 back into focus, while a break below 75 would shift attention to the 73–73.5 area near the 100-day moving average as the next important support zone.

Cryptocurrency Market

The crypto market continued to rise, with total market capitalization increasing 1.4% w/w. Performance across major tokens was uneven, however: Bitcoin gained 2.5%, while the combined market value of other cryptocurrencies edged slightly lower. This week provided some confirmation that institutional selling pressure may be fading. The record eight-week streak of redemptions from U.S. spot Bitcoin ETFs came to an end, with the funds recording net inflows of $197 million over the week, according to Farside. From a technical perspective, Bitcoin successfully held support around its 20-day moving average. A break above the nearby 50-day moving average would strengthen the recovery and could open the way toward the $70,000 area.

Economic Indicators, Statistics and News

Several important macroeconomic indicators and economic news were published during the week:

Global

· Global economic growth improved slightly in June, but the expansion remained weaker than at the start of the year and depended increasingly on services rather than manufacturing. The J.P. Morgan Global Composite PMI rose to 52.0 from 51.9 in May, its highest since February and the 41st consecutive month above the 50.0 expansion threshold. The 2Q average was consistent with global GDP growth of roughly 2.5% annualized, below about 3% at the beginning of the year and slightly under the long-run average of 2.9%. Manufacturing still grew more quickly than services, with the respective indices at 52.2 and 51.7, but factory momentum slowed to a three-month low as precautionary inventory building began to fade, while services recorded their strongest expansion since February as lower energy prices reduced pressure on customers.

Sector data showed the strongest June improvement in tourism and recreation, helping consumer services return to growth for the first time since the Middle East war began, while financial services remained the weakest industry because real estate continued to suffer from higher interest-rate expectations. Technology and consumer goods stayed relatively strong, supported respectively by AI investment and easing inflation, whereas healthcare and basic materials lost momentum as earlier stockpiling subsided.

Regional performance remained uneven: emerging markets expanded faster than developed economies, with their output index at 53.0 compared with 51.2 for advanced economies. India remained the fastest-growing major economy, mainland China completed its strongest quarter in three years, Japan led developed markets, and the US maintained a modest expansion consistent with about 1.2% annualized growth. The eurozone and UK PMIs pointed to broadly flat 2Q GDP, while Canada and Russia remained in contraction.

Global inflation pressures eased in June as oil prices fell and supply disruptions became less severe, although firms were still raising prices at a historically elevated rate. The J.P. Morgan Global PMI Prices Charged Index declined to 55.7 from 56.2 in May, its second consecutive fall, suggesting that worldwide selling-price inflation may have peaked in April. Comparisons with official data indicate that the June reading was consistent with global CPI inflation of approximately 4.5% y/y, while 2Q as a whole still recorded the fastest price growth since late 2022. Both manufacturing and services output-price inflation slowed to three-month lows, and input-cost growth eased to its weakest pace since February as lower energy prices were joined by softer increases in labor and non-energy raw-material costs.

Supply delays also moderated, although they remained widespread because trade through the Strait of Hormuz had not fully normalized. The improvement was not yet broad enough to remove inflation risk for consumers: prices charged by consumer-goods and consumer-services companies remained stubbornly high, suggesting that earlier increases in transport, materials and labor costs could still pass through to official inflation data. Price growth slowed across most major economies, including the US, eurozone, UK, Japan, Canada, Brazil and India, but remained high relative to the past four years. Mainland China moved in the opposite direction, with selling-price inflation rising to its fastest pace since February 2022, though still modest by global standards. The PMI evidence therefore suggests that inflation may rise further in some economies before easing later, provided energy prices do not surge again.

Global employment weakened despite faster output and new-order growth, showing that companies remain reluctant to translate better demand into additional hiring. PMI surveys recorded a second consecutive monthly decline in worldwide staffing in June, leaving the 2Q employment trend at its weakest since 2020. This occurred even as new business accelerated and backlogs increased, a combination that would normally encourage firms to expand capacity. S&P Global found that the share of companies hiring in response to stronger demand had fallen to its lowest level since the global financial crisis outside the pandemic, while labor shortages had returned close to their long-run norm and therefore did not explain the weakness. Instead, firms cited high operating costs and weak confidence in future demand. The Global Business Output Expectations Index improved only slightly to 59.2, well below its long-run average of 62.8 and below the level of about 60 that has historically been associated with sustained hiring. Employment fell in both manufacturing and services and declined in the US, Germany, UK, France, Brazil, Russia and Kazakhstan. The UK recorded the sharpest job losses among major developed economies, while Japan maintained the strongest hiring trend and eurozone employment stabilized. Mainland China was a notable exception among emerging markets, recording its second-largest increase in employment in nearly two years as backlogs rose. AI was also identified as a small net drag on employment expectations for 2026, but the surveys suggest that high costs and uncertainty over the durability of demand remain the more important reasons for restrained hiring.

The longer-term business outlook deteriorated more than the June activity data, indicating that companies see the recent improvement as fragile. S&P Global’s Business Outlook survey showed that the net share of firms expecting activity to rise over the next 12 months fell to +23% in June from +25% in February, the weakest result since October 2022. Confidence declined in most of the economies covered, with the US and Spain the only exceptions; US optimism reached a two-year high, while sentiment weakened sharply in the eurozone, UK, Japan and emerging markets. Manufacturing confidence fell much more than services, with the net balance dropping to +20% from +28%, compared with a small decline to +23% from +24% in services. Almost one-third of global respondents identified inflation as a threat, the highest proportion in four years, even though expected non-staff costs and selling prices eased slightly at the global level. The employment outlook was particularly weak: the net balance for expected hiring slipped to +6% from +7%, the lowest since the survey began in 2009 apart from June 2020. Eurozone companies expected employment to fall for the first time in six years, with negative plans in Germany and France, while the UK also anticipated a small decline; the US and Japan were more positive. Investment plans were firmer than hiring intentions, with the global balances for capex and R&D at +8% and +3%, respectively. US capex optimism reached its strongest level in more than four years, while the UK, Germany and France remained pessimistic. The contrast between weak hiring and firmer investment suggests that companies are still willing to spend on technology and capacity, but are less confident about expanding payrolls until demand, inflation and geopolitical conditions become more predictable.

US

· US services remained in expansion in June, but the two main surveys differed on the strength of growth. The ISM Services PMI eased to 54.0 from 54.5, marking a 24th consecutive month of expansion and implying roughly 1.9% annualized real GDP growth based on ISM’s historical relationship. Business activity slowed to 55.4 from 57.7 and new orders to 55.1 from 57.3, while employment returned to growth at 51.2 after three months of contraction. S&P Global showed a weaker pace, with its Services PMI rising to only 51.2 from 50.7 and the Composite PMI to 51.9 from 51.5, consistent with economic growth of about 1.2% annualized in 2Q. Both surveys nevertheless pointed to firmer demand than in May. S&P Global said new business increased at the fastest pace since February, helped by new projects and FIFA World Cup activity, while ISM also cited World Cup-related activity and hiring in areas such as arts and entertainment, accommodation and food services, transportation, and retail. The improvement was still largely domestic: S&P Global reported a seventh consecutive fall in export business, while ISM’s new export orders were only marginally above neutral at 50.4. Capacity pressure also remained visible, with ISM’s backlog index rising to 54.9, its second-highest level in almost four years, and S&P Global reporting a sixteenth consecutive monthly increase in outstanding work.

Services inflation eased but remained high enough to limit demand and keep the policy outlook uncomfortable. ISM’s Prices Index fell to 67.7 from 71.3, its lowest since February but still above 60 for a nineteenth straight month, while S&P Global said input costs rose at the slowest pace since February and selling-price inflation was little changed from May. Lower oil prices and better shipping conditions through the Strait of Hormuz reduced some pressure, but tariffs, fuel, labor, software, insurance, construction materials and data-center equipment continued to raise costs. The divergence within the services economy was important: S&P Global noted that customer resistance to high prices remained strongest in consumer-facing businesses, while ISM respondents in accommodation and food services warned that some war-related cost increases would be felt more fully in 3Q. Supply chains were stabilizing overall, with ISM’s supplier-deliveries index easing to 54.4, but shortages persisted in memory components, electronic equipment, transformers, switchgear, wire and cable, and other products needed for data-center construction. The sharp drop in ISM inventories to 51.2 from 62.5 also suggests that the earlier buy-ahead cycle is fading, which may reduce a temporary source of activity even as lower energy prices support household demand.

The sector data showed broader growth in June, but leadership remained concentrated in areas tied to materials, consumer goods and investment spending. All seven sectors covered by S&P Global reported higher activity, up from four in May and the widest breadth since November 2025. Basic materials led with an output index of 57.0, its strongest expansion since April 2022, while consumer goods also grew at a robust pace. Healthcare remained solid but slowed sharply from May’s four-and-a-half-year high, and industrials recorded their weakest expansion since October 2025. Technology, financials and consumer services returned to growth, although all three remained modest; consumer services was the weakest sector at 50.6, despite support from the World Cup and lower energy prices. The ISM industry breakdown told a similar story, with 14 services industries expanding, led by arts, entertainment and recreation, mining, wholesale trade, transportation and warehousing, finance and insurance, and accommodation and food services. The combination suggests that June’s improvement was broad enough to avoid a narrow rebound, but the strongest momentum was still linked to commodity production, AI and data-center investment, infrastructure demand, and event-related spending rather than a fully convincing recovery in discretionary consumer services.

US business expectations improved more clearly than current activity, with firms becoming more confident about demand and investment over the next year. S&P Global’s Business Outlook survey showed the net balance of companies expecting higher activity rising to +37% from +32% in February, the strongest reading since June 2024 and the highest among the 12 countries with comparable data. Manufacturers were more optimistic than service providers, with net balances of +45% and +36%, respectively, although the largest improvement came from services. Firms cited AI adoption, new product launches, efficiency gains, reshoring, stronger investment and lower interest rates as potential supports. Capex expectations rose to +16% from +10%, the strongest in more than four years and second only to India, while employment intentions edged up to +13% from +12%. The optimism was not unconditional. Expected non-staff cost inflation eased to +25% from +32%, but labor-cost expectations remained high at +39%, and manufacturers expected the sharpest selling-price increases since June 2022. Tariff uncertainty, elevated raw-material prices and geopolitical risks therefore remain important constraints. The outlook suggests that US companies are increasingly willing to invest, particularly in technology and capacity, but are still more cautious about hiring and remain dependent on inflation continuing to ease.

Asia

· China’s consumer inflation softened in June, showing that the recent move away from deflation has not yet developed into a broad-based rise in household prices. CPI increased 1.0% y/y, down from 1.2% in May and below the 1.1% Bloomberg survey median, while prices fell 0.3% m/m. Core CPI excluding food and energy also eased to 1.0% y/y and declined 0.1% m/m, suggesting that weak domestic demand remains a more important influence than higher global commodity costs. Food prices fell 1.6% y/y, led by a 15.9% drop in pork, which helped offset a 16.0% increase in egg prices. Non-food inflation was stronger at 1.5%, but several earlier drivers lost momentum: transport energy prices rose 15.3% y/y after a larger increase in May and fell 4.5% m/m, while miscellaneous goods and services declined 2.7% m/m as the earlier support from gold prices faded. Communications equipment remained a notable exception, rising 7.6% y/y, consistent with higher chip costs. The category breakdown in the NBS release reinforces the uneven picture: services inflation was only 0.8%, residence prices fell 0.3%, and automobiles declined 1.1%, while medical services rose 3.4% and travel-related services increased 4.5%. Overall, China has moved from outright deflation toward low positive inflation, but the slowdown in both headline and core CPI shows that household pricing power remains weak.

Producer inflation remained strong on a y/y basis in June, but the monthly decline suggests the oil-driven reflation impulse may already be losing force. PPI rose 4.1% y/y, the fastest pace in almost four years. However, PPI fell 0.3% m/m, its first monthly decline since July 2025, pointing to a reversal in some upstream commodity pressures after oil prices retreated. The annual rise was concentrated in means of production, which increased 5.5%, including gains of 16.5% in mining, 8.6% in raw materials and 3.0% in processing. By contrast, producer prices for consumer goods fell 0.9%, including declines of 2.1% for food and 1.0% for clothing and daily-use products, showing that factories still have limited ability to pass higher input costs into consumer-facing prices. The industry breakdown shows the same split: nonferrous metal input prices rose 21.6% y/y, fuel and power 11.8%, and raw chemical materials 11.5%, while building materials fell 4.8% and agricultural inputs declined 1.3%. Petroleum and natural-gas extraction prices were still 16.8% higher than a year earlier but fell 11.8% m/m, while chemical-product prices dropped 2.0% m/m despite remaining 11.3% higher y/y. This combination supports the view that the y/y PPI peak was heavily influenced by earlier energy and metals shocks and may fade as those costs normalize.

The inflation data leave the PBOC with room to support the economy because higher producer costs have not translated into persistent consumer inflation. Bloomberg Economics continues to expect a 10 bp policy-rate cut over the rest of the year, while other analysts cited by Bloomberg argue that inflation near 1% is not restrictive enough to prevent additional easing if growth weakens. The policy case is reinforced by the widening gap between strong export- and AI-related activity and softer household demand, as well as estimates from some economists that 2Q GDP growth may have slipped below the lower bound of the official 4.5%–5.0% target range. At the same time, the outlook is not one-directional: renewed US-Iran tensions could lift oil prices and temporarily push up selected energy-related categories, but the article’s analysts expect that pressure to remain narrow and PPI inflation to ease toward 2%–3% as supply conditions normalize. The late-July Politburo meeting therefore becomes the next important policy window, particularly because slower government spending has also weighed on growth.

Foreign Exchange Markets

The U.S. dollar slightly strengthened over the week, with the DXY index up 0.1%.

Commodities and Energy Markets

The commodities complex ended the week mostly higher.

Debt and Fixed Income Markets

According to CME data, the implied Fed funds rate curve over the next 18 months shifted higher by an average of 7 bp, leaving the implied policy rate for December 2027 around 9 bp above the prior week’s level.

The repricing was driven mainly by renewed tensions between the U.S. and Iran, which pushed oil prices higher and revived concerns that energy costs could keep inflation elevated. The June FOMC minutes added to the pressure, showing that several officials saw a case for raising rates, while the Fed’s stronger emphasis on price stability reinforced the view that policymakers may be willing to tighten even if the labor market remains resilient. Ed Yardeni argued that the renewed Iran crisis had put both inflation and the Fed “back in play,” warning that the central bank may now have to follow through with actual rate increases rather than merely signal a tightening bias. Consequently, the implied probability of a rate hike at the July meeting rose to 34.2% from 21.9% a week earlier. Looking further ahead, markets continued to price a likely move in September and began assigning a meaningful probability to a second hike next spring. In total, futures now price around 34 bp of cumulative tightening by year-end 2026, up from 28 bp a week earlier.

The U.S. Treasury yield curve also moved higher across maturities. According to Bloomberg, the 1-year yield rose 13 bp to 4.05%, the 10-year yield increased 12 bp to 4.56%, and the 30-year yield climbed 7 bp to 5.06%. The return of the 30-year yield above 5% has also revived debate over what counts as an attractive entry point for long-duration bonds. PGIM’s Gregory Peters expects that pressure on the long end may persist as Treasury supply and AI-related corporate borrowing continue to rise, and said yields closer to 5.5% could become more compelling. He therefore sees better risk-reward in the front and middle of the curve, where investors can earn higher yields without taking as much duration risk.

You can find more articles in our Telegram channel at https://t.me/atranicapital_eng

U.S. equities finished higher, but the gains were concentrated in the final two trading days of June. The S&P 500 rose 1.8%, the Nasdaq Composite gained 2.1%, and the Dow added 2.0%. The Magnificent 7 rebounded 5.1% after losing 6.0% the previous week and, according to our calculations, accounted for more than 90% of the S&P 500’s weekly gain. That makes the move look more like quarter-end support for a lagging group: even after the rebound, the Magnificent 7 was up only 0.1% in the first half, versus 15.4% for the rest of the S&P 500.

That fits the broader rotation story. Invesco argued that recent market behavior looks less like a technology bubble and more like a healthy shift within the AI trade, with leadership moving away from hyperscalers spending heavily on AI infrastructure and toward the hardware and equipment suppliers that help build it.

July then brought a sharper test. Major indexes were broadly stable, but semiconductor shares sold off heavily after a strong first half. MarketWatch, citing Jefferies, noted that almost all of the Nasdaq-100’s first-half gain came from just 10 stocks, with Micron alone contributing 26% of the index’s return. The early-July drop therefore looked more like profit taking in the year’s biggest winners than a broad equity selloff. Over two sessions, Micron fell 15%, AMD 11%, Intel 14%, Applied Materials 17%, Lam Research 19%, KLA 22%, Marvell 18% and Teradyne 24%, while the S&P 500 itself only drifted slightly lower.

For now, the broader tape still looks reasonably healthy, but more selective. End-of-quarter support for lagging mega-cap technology was followed by heavy selling in the semiconductor and equipment stocks that had carried much of the first-half rally. Friday’s rebound in Korean chipmakers suggests the correction may already be losing force, although the U.S. holiday means the next real test comes when American investors return. If the chip pullback stays contained, it fits the rotation narrative; if it spreads deeper into AI infrastructure, it becomes a bigger risk for indexes still reliant on that theme.

Global equities were mixed, with the global ex-U.S. index edging up 0.3%. Developed markets broadly followed Wall Street higher, while emerging markets were uneven. South Korea’s EWY fell 8.7% as the semiconductor selloff hit one of the most chip-heavy country ETFs. Still, the ETF move likely overstated the latest pressure because the U.S. market was closed Friday. In local trading, the KOSPI rebounded 5.8%, cutting its weekly loss to 3.8% from 9.1% on Thursday.

Global manufacturing stayed in expansion, but momentum softened. The J.P. Morgan Global Manufacturing PMI fell to 52.2 in June from May’s 50-month high of 52.7, while output and new orders slowed for a second month. The sector still completed its strongest quarter for factory production since 2021, supported by North America and East Asia. The concern is that part of the recent strength came from precautionary stockpiling after the Middle East shock, and that support began to fade in June. Business optimism fell to an eight-month low, employment declined at the fastest pace in 11 months, and export demand remained soft.

Crypto bounced back, with total market capitalization rising 4.7% on the week. Bitcoin gained 4.2%, while several major altcoins rose around 10%–20%. Still, BTC remained under pressure from persistent institutional selling, with U.S. spot Bitcoin ETFs recording an eighth consecutive week of outflows. Thursday offered a tentative sign of exhaustion, as daily inflows reached their highest level since early May.

Rates were mixed beneath the surface. CME data show the implied Fed funds curve was little changed at the front end but shifted higher further out, mostly in 2027 contracts. The probability of a July rate hike declined to 21.9% from 29.9%, while markets still expect one hike, most likely in September. Treasury yields rose, especially at longer maturities: the 1-year increased 1 bp to 3.92%, the 10-year climbed 11 bp to 4.48%, and the 30-year rose 13 bp to 4.99%, according to Bloomberg.

For comprehensive insights and deeper context, please refer to the full article.

US Stock Market

U.S. equities finished higher, but most of the weekly gain came in the final two trading days of June rather than through a steady rally. The S&P 500 rose 1.8%, the Nasdaq Composite gained 2.1%, and the Dow added 2.0%. The Magnificent 7 rebounded 5.1% after losing 6.0% the previous week, and according to our calculations, the group accounted for more than 90% of the S&P 500’s weekly gain. That makes the move look less like a broad breakout and more like end-of-quarter buying in a group that had badly lagged: even after the rebound, the Magnificent 7 was up only 0.1% in the first half, compared with a 15.4% gain for the rest of the S&P 500.

That fits the broader rotation story. Invesco argued that recent market behavior looks more like a healthy rotation than a tech bubble: within technology, leadership has shifted away from hyperscalers such as Alphabet, Amazon, Meta and Microsoft, which are spending heavily on AI infrastructure, toward the hardware and equipment suppliers that help build it.

July then brought a different tone. The major indexes were mostly stable, but semiconductor shares came under heavy selling after a very strong first half. That matters because the chip rally had become extremely concentrated. MarketWatch, citing Jefferies, noted that almost all of the Nasdaq-100’s first-half gain came from just 10 stocks, with Micron alone contributing 26% of the index’s return, while AMD, Intel and Applied Materials were also major contributors. So the early July drop looked more like profit taking in the year’s biggest winners than a broad selloff: over two sessions, Micron fell 15%, AMD 11%, Intel 14%, Applied Materials 17%, Lam Research 19%, KLA 22%, Marvell 18% and Teradyne 24%, while the S&P 500 itself only drifted slightly lower. In short, end-of-quarter support for lagging mega-cap technology was followed by heavy selling in the same semiconductor and equipment stocks that had carried much of the first-half rally.

For now, the broader equity tape still looks reasonably healthy, but more selective. Friday’s rebound in Korean chipmakers suggests the semiconductor selloff may already be losing some force, although the U.S. market holiday means the next real test will come when American investors return. If the chip correction stays contained, it would fit the rotation story. If it spreads more deeply into the AI infrastructure trade, it would become a more serious problem for indexes that still rely heavily on that theme.

Sector performance was broadly constructive over the shortened four-day week, with seven of eleven sectors posting gains and four finishing lower. Financials led the market, rising 3.8%, helped by strong gains in payment and market-data names such as Visa (+7.7%), Mastercard (+8.1%), S&P Global (+13.9%), Robinhood (+14.2%) and Charles Schwab (+7.0%). Communication Services rose 3.2%, supported by Alphabet (+6.4%), Meta (+5.9%) and Netflix (+5.2%), despite notable weakness in telecom names such as AT&T and Verizon. Consumer Discretionary also gained 2.4%, helped by Amazon (+4.3%), Tesla (+3.6%), Nike (+8.2%) and Carvana (+10.0%). Health Care continued to recover, rising 2.1%, with broad support from Johnson & Johnson, AbbVie, Vertex, Amgen and Moderna. The main weakness was in areas linked to the prior AI-infrastructure rally: Technology slipped 0.3% despite strong gains in Apple (+8.8%), Microsoft (+4.7%) and Palantir (+14.5%), as sharp losses in Micron (-13.8%), Sandisk (-16.5%), Intel (-6.2%), Lam Research (-7.3%), Seagate (-8.9%) and Western Digital (-8.1%) weighed on the sector. Real Estate also fell, dragged down by data-center and tower-related names such as Equinix, Digital Realty, Iron Mountain and American Tower, while Energy declined as midstream and services names weakened even though Exxon was slightly positive.

The Fear & Greed Index rose to 32 from 25 a week earlier.

SPY repaired part of last week’s technical damage, rebounding back above the 736–737 breakout area and reclaiming both the 20-day and 50-day moving averages. That puts the ETF back on firmer short-term footing and suggests buyers are trying to reassert control after the late-June wobble, even if the move is still more of a stabilization than a fresh breakout. Momentum has improved, with RSI back in the low-50s, pointing to a balanced market where demand has returned but is not yet aggressive. In the near term, the 750–760 zone remains the key resistance area; a move through it would put the recent highs back in focus, while a drop back below 736–737 would weaken the recovery tone and shift attention first to the 50-day area near 734, then to deeper support around the 100-day and 200-day averages near 704 and 692.

Global Markets

Global country ETFs posted mixed performance, with the global ex-U.S. equity index edging up 0.3% for the week. Developed markets broadly followed Wall Street higher, led by Germany, the UK, Switzerland and France, while emerging markets were more uneven. The sharpest decline came from South Korea’s EWY, which fell 8.7% as the global semiconductor selloff hit one of the most chip-heavy country ETFs: SK Hynix and Samsung Electronics together account for almost half of the fund.

Still, the ETF move likely overstates the latest pressure in Korea because the U.S. market was closed on Friday for Independence Day. In local trading, the KOSPI rebounded 5.8% on Friday, cutting its weekly loss to 3.8% from 9.1% on Thursday. The recovery was led by the same semiconductor giants that had driven the earlier decline: SK Hynix trimmed its weekly loss to 9.3% from 18.2%, while Samsung Electronics improved to -8.8% from -15.8%. In other words, the global ex-U.S. picture was broadly constructive, but Korea remained the clearest example of how semiconductor volatility can dominate country-level ETF performance.

ACWX stabilized this week rather than fully regaining momentum. The ETF held the former breakout area around 75 and remains above its 50-, 100-, and 200-day moving averages, so the broader uptrend is still intact, but it is still struggling to reclaim the 20-day average with conviction. That leaves the short-term picture somewhat mixed: buyers are defending important support, but they have not yet pushed the market back toward the 77–78 highs where the rally stalled in June. Momentum remains subdued, with RSI just below 50, pointing to a cautious, two-way market rather than a clear return to strong demand. In the near term, a clean move back above the 20-day average would improve the tone and bring 77–78 back into focus, while a break below 75 would shift attention to the 72–73 zone around the 50- and 100-day averages as the next key support area.

Cryptocurrency Market

The crypto market bounced back, with total market capitalization rising 4.7% w/w. Bitcoin gained 4.2%, while other major altcoins advanced more sharply, with some rising around 10–20%. BTC still remained under pressure from persistent institutional selling: the latest week marked the eighth consecutive week of outflows from U.S. spot Bitcoin ETFs. However, Thursday may have offered the first sign of exhaustion in the selling pressure, as daily inflows reached their highest level since early May.

Economic Indicators, Statistics and News

Several important macroeconomic indicators and economic news were published during the week:

Global

· Global manufacturing remained in expansion in June, but momentum softened from its early-summer peak. The J.P. Morgan Global Manufacturing PMI fell to 52.2 from May’s 50-month high of 52.7, staying above the 50 expansion threshold for an eleventh consecutive month and marking the weakest reading since March. Output continued to grow solidly, with June completing the strongest quarter for global factory production since 2021, but both output and new orders slowed for a second month. New business expanded for a sixth straight month, with investment goods the strongest segment and consumer goods the weakest. The forward-looking details were softer than the headline: business optimism fell to an eight-month low, employment declined for the third time in four months and at the fastest pace in 11 months, and new export orders continued to weigh on demand. Price pressures eased as lower energy prices pushed input-cost and output-price inflation to three-month lows, though both remained above pre-conflict levels. Supplier delivery times also continued to lengthen by one of the largest margins of the past four years.

The regional picture became more uneven after the Middle East war began, with North America and parts of East Asia pulling ahead while ASEAN lost momentum. S&P Global’s worldwide PMI analysis shows the largest post-war improvement in output in North America, led by the US, where June helped complete the strongest quarterly expansion since Q3 2021. Canada also recorded its best quarter since late 2024, while Mexico’s tariff-related downturn came close to stabilizing.

East Asia was another bright spot: Japan posted its strongest quarterly output growth since Q1 2014, helped by a weak exchange rate, while South Korea and Taiwan recorded their best quarters in five years and mainland China its best quarter in two years. Europe improved more modestly, with the UK ending its strongest quarter in nearly two years and the eurozone its best since early 2022, although Ireland and the Netherlands were stronger than France and Spain, and Germany showed only modest growth. ASEAN moved in the opposite direction: Thailand remained strong, but Indonesia, the Philippines and Vietnam showed some of the sharpest deteriorations versus the opening months of the year, leaving regional growth close to a standstill.

The main risk in the global manufacturing data is that part of the recent strength may have been borrowed from future demand. S&P Global’s commentary suggests that precautionary inventory building after the Middle East shock lifted orders, output and purchasing earlier in the quarter, but this support started to fade in June, with customer stockpiling falling to its lowest incidence since January and manufacturers’ own safety-stock building to the lowest since February.

At the same time, supply constraints did not disappear: even after some easing in June, supply delays and producer price inflation remained the third-highest since 2022, and reports of raw-material shortages limiting output stayed near a four-year high. The larger demand problem was price resistance, as firms continued to report lost sales because customers pushed back against higher selling prices, with that measure still near its highest since late 2022. The result is a less comfortable manufacturing mix: recession fears and general uncertainty eased as oil prices fell, but companies still cut jobs and became less confident because the inventory boost may fade, supply shortages remain disruptive, and high prices are limiting demand.

US

· US labor demand looked steadier in May than the later payroll data would suggest, but some of that strength may have been temporary. JOLTS job openings were essentially unchanged at 7.6 million, above the 7.3 million Bloomberg survey median, while hires held at 5.2 million and total separations changed little at 5.1 million. The quits rate stayed at 1.9%, pointing to limited worker confidence in switching jobs, and layoffs were broadly stable at 1.7 million, with the layoff rate near 1.1%. The vacancy-to-unemployed ratio also remained close to 1-to-1, far below the 2-to-1 peak seen in 2022, suggesting that labor demand and labor supply are now much more balanced. Sector details were mixed: leisure and hospitality and construction posted notable increases in openings, while financial activities continued to soften and health care vacancies declined from April. Bloomberg Economics argued that the surge in leisure and hospitality vacancies may partly reflect temporary World Cup-related demand, so the report should not be read as a clean acceleration in hiring appetite. Overall, the May JOLTS data point to a labor market that is stable rather than hot, with employers still posting openings but workers showing little sign of renewed job-hopping power.

ADP pointed to the same “low-hire, low-fire” environment. Private employers added 98,000 jobs in June, down from 122,000 in May, with almost all gains coming from services. Education and health services again dominated, adding 48,000 jobs, while trade, transportation and utilities added 15,000, financial activities 14,000, and information 7,000. Goods-producing industries were nearly flat, with only 2,000 jobs added. Hiring was broad by firm size, led by small establishments at 53,000, followed by medium firms at 29,000 and large firms at 25,000. Wage growth remained moderate rather than alarming: pay for job-stayers rose 4.4% year over year, while pay for job-changers accelerated to 6.6%, showing that switching jobs still brings a premium even as overall job creation slows.

The nonfarm payrolls report was weaker on the headline number but still mixed under the surface. Payrolls rose by only 57,000 in June, below most Bloomberg survey estimates, while April and May were revised down by a combined 74,000, cutting the three-month average to 111,000 from 164,000 in May. The unemployment rate fell to 4.2%, but that improvement was less convincing because the labor force participation rate dropped to 61.5%, the lowest level in more than five years, and the employment-population ratio slipped to 59.0%. Sector leadership remained narrow: professional and business services added 36,000, social assistance 25,000, and health care 22,000, while leisure and hospitality lost 61,000 jobs after weaker-than-usual seasonal hiring. Wages were not sending a fresh inflation warning, with average hourly earnings up 0.3% on the month and 3.5% from a year earlier, while the average workweek stayed at 34.3 hours.

The Challenger report added a different angle: layoffs eased in June, but the composition of cuts still looks important. U.S. employers announced 45,849 job cuts, down 53% from May and 4% below June 2025, marking the lowest monthly total since December 2025. Still, year-to-date cuts reached 443,604, the second-highest first-half total since 2020. Technology remained the center of pressure, with 15,503 cuts in June and 139,156 so far in 2026, up 83% from the same period last year. AI was cited as the leading reason for cuts for a fourth straight month, accounting for 14,029 layoffs in June, or 31% of the monthly total, and 101,743 cuts year to date. Hiring plans were modest: employers announced 10,933 planned hires in June, down 44% from May, though year-to-date hiring plans were still 10% above the first half of 2025.

Business surveys showed that the labor market signal is weaker than the output signal, especially in manufacturing. ISM’s Employment Index remained below the neutral line at 49.7%, despite improving from 48.6% in May. ISM noted that 36% of respondents were still managing headcount, while 64% were hiring, a better balance than at the start of the year but not yet a clear employment boom. S&P Global’s manufacturing survey was more cautious on jobs: even as factories reported strong output and new-order growth, employment fell at the sharpest pace since the early pandemic months of 2020. The survey suggested that companies were using higher productivity, cost control and technology — including AI — to protect margins against higher energy and raw-material costs, rather than adding workers. At the same time, the weakness was not only about deliberate layoffs: around one in five firms reporting lower employment cited a lack of suitable candidates, pointing to a labor market where demand has cooled but supply constraints have not fully disappeared.

The Conference Board’s consumer survey confirmed that households are starting to feel fewer job opportunities. The labor-market differential — the share saying jobs are plentiful minus the share saying jobs are hard to get — fell by 2.6 percentage points to only +2.4%. The most important detail was that 22.5% of consumers said jobs were “hard to get,” up from 19.8% in May and the highest since January 2021. Looking ahead, consumers did not expect a major improvement: 15.2% expected more jobs to be available in six months, down from 16.6%, while 25.6% expected fewer jobs, down only slightly from 27.0%.

· ISM’s June manufacturing report showed that factory activity was still expanding, but the momentum looked less clean than the headline suggested. The Manufacturing PMI slipped to 53.3% from 54.0%, marking a sixth straight month of expansion and staying close to a four-year high. New orders remained solid at 56.0%, but eased from May, while production slowed more visibly to 52.2%, the weakest reading in six months. The strongest support came from domestic demand, low customer inventories and pockets of capital spending tied to AI, defense and semiconductor-related activity. At the same time, the report still carried a cautious tone: 66% of respondent comments were negative, with the Iran war, tariffs and pricing volatility repeatedly cited. Price pressure cooled sharply, with the Prices Index falling 9.1 points to 73.0%, the largest monthly drop since July 2022, but raw-material costs were still rising at a historically elevated pace.

S&P Global’s manufacturing survey was more cautious on jobs and confidence, even though it also showed a still-solid expansion in output and orders. Its headline US Manufacturing PMI fell to 53.9 in June from 55.1 in May, remaining above 50 for an eleventh consecutive month, while output growth closed the strongest calendar quarter in nearly five years. But part of that strength appears to have been pulled forward: S&P estimated that safety-stock building added around 2–3 index points to the output, new-orders and input-buying gauges, as companies tried to protect themselves against supply disruption and further price increases. That makes the demand signal less durable than the headline PMI alone implies. The employment picture was notably weaker than in the ISM survey: S&P reported the steepest fall in factory jobs since May 2020 and, excluding the pandemic, the fastest since October 2009. The combination of rising output and falling headcount implied unusually strong productivity gains, partly linked to cost cutting and AI adoption, but also partly to hiring constraints. Business expectations also deteriorated to the weakest level since October 2025, as firms worried that the end of war-related inventory building could turn from a temporary support into a drag on future sales.

The Conference Board’s consumer survey added a similar message from the household side: sentiment improved slightly, but consumers were becoming more worried about jobs. The Consumer Confidence Index rose only 0.6 point to 91.2 in June, below Bloomberg survey consensus of 94.4 and helped by lower oil and gasoline prices after the extension of the US-Iran ceasefire. The details were mixed. The Present Situation Index fell 3.0 points to 116.4, while the Expectations Index rose 3.0 points to 74.4, reflecting better views on future business conditions and income rather than a stronger labor-market outlook. Consumers’ inflation expectations eased somewhat, but 61.5% still expected higher interest rates over the next 12 months. Big-ticket buying plans improved modestly, while travel intentions weakened, leaving the consumer picture less recessionary than fragile: lower fuel prices helped confidence, but the job market no longer looks as comfortable to households as it did earlier in the cycle.

Eurozone

· Euro-area inflation cooled more than expected in June as lower energy prices quickly reversed part of the Middle East-driven price spike. Headline HICP inflation fell to 2.8% y/y from 3.2% in May, below the 3.0% Bloomberg survey consensus, while the monthly rate was slightly negative at -0.1%. Eurostat’s flash estimate showed energy still as the fastest-rising component at 8.7%, but down from 10.8% in May, while services inflation eased to 3.2% from 3.5%, food, alcohol and tobacco slowed to 1.6% from 1.9%, and non-energy industrial goods held at 0.9%. Core inflation also softened, with HICP excluding energy, food, alcohol and tobacco falling to 2.4% from 2.6%.

Country data confirmed that disinflation was broad but uneven: Germany slowed to 2.4% from 2.7%, France dropped sharply to 2.0% from 2.8%, and Italy edged down to 3.1% from 3.2%, while Spain stayed elevated at 3.6%, reflecting continued pressure from electricity and natural gas even as gasoline helped restrain the headline rate. The data suggest that the energy shock may have peaked earlier than feared, but the mix is not yet fully comfortable for the ECB because energy inflation remains high and services inflation, while lower, is still above the 2% target-consistent pace.

ECB communication stayed cautious despite the downside inflation surprise, with policymakers emphasizing that lower oil prices do not remove the risk of delayed second-round effects. President Christine Lagarde said upside inflation risks and downside growth risks had become more balanced than a few weeks earlier, but stressed that the ECB would take the steps needed to preserve price stability. Chief Economist Philip Lane focused on the lagged pass-through from four months of higher energy costs into food and services prices, saying officials should avoid locking themselves into a fixed rate path. Bundesbank President Joachim Nagel also kept the door open for both the July and September meetings, arguing that the Middle East-related energy-price shock is still working through the economy. Bloomberg Economics said the weaker inflation print and lower oil prices have reduced the case for another hike, even if Lagarde’s recent tone still points to a possible September move that would likely end the short tightening cycle. Market pricing also became less aggressive, as the cooling in energy markets reduced the probability of more extreme ECB tightening scenarios, even though investors still saw further action as possible.

· The final Eurozone Composite PMI was revised up to 50.0 from the flash reading of 49.5, improving from 48.5 in May and reaching a 3-month high. That revision matters because it moved the index out of contraction territory, showing that private-sector output stabilized at the end of the second quarter after two months of decline. The improvement was still uneven: manufacturing expanded, while services continued to shrink, although at a slower pace. Italy, Spain and Ireland showed stronger growth, while Germany and France remained in contraction, with Germany’s decline described as only marginal. Demand was still the weak spot, as new business fell for a fourth straight month and export orders also declined, though both contractions eased. Employment was broadly unchanged after May’s sharper job losses, business confidence rose to a 4-month high, and inflation pressure cooled, with input costs rising at the softest pace in four months and output prices increasing at the slowest rate since March.

The final Eurozone Manufacturing PMI came in at 51.4, slightly above the flash estimate of 51.3 but still below May’s 51.6, leaving the index at a 4-month low. Even so, the sector remained in expansion for a fifth consecutive month, and the details were firmer than the small headline decline suggests. Manufacturing output rose for a sixth straight month, with the output index increasing to 51.7 from 51.3, a 2-month high, and June completed the strongest quarter for eurozone factory production since early 2022. New orders returned to slight growth after stagnating in May, but export demand fell for a second month, keeping the recovery dependent on domestic demand. Country differences remained clear: Spain and France were the only covered economies not to record production growth, while the manufacturing PMI chart showed the Netherlands and Ireland among the stronger performers and Spain at the bottom. Firms cut purchases and drew down inventories, suggesting earlier stockpiling was fading. Factory employment still declined, but less sharply than in May, while input costs and output charges rose at the slowest rates since March. Business confidence improved again from April’s 17-month low, though it remained slightly below its long-run trend.

The final Eurozone Services PMI was revised up to 49.4 from the flash reading of 48.9 and improved from 47.7 in May, also marking a 3-month high. Services therefore remained below the 50.0 line for a third month, but the contraction became only marginal and less of a drag on the wider economy than the preliminary estimate suggested. New business continued to fall, and the decline was slightly deeper than the drop in activity, so firms kept working through backlogs at a solid pace. Unlike manufacturing, employment in services expanded after a small fall in May, with job creation the fastest since January, although still modest. Confidence about the coming 12 months strengthened to the highest level since February, helped by easier cost conditions and some recovery in areas hit by the earlier demand shock, including leisure and tourism. The most important inflation detail was the sharp cooling in service-sector input costs, which eased for the first time since October and fell to a 4-month low; selling-price increases also became less aggressive, a development relevant for the ECB because services inflation is usually one of the stickier parts of the price cycle.

UK

· The final UK Composite PMI slipped to 49.3 in June from 49.7 in May, slightly weaker than the flash reading of 49.4 and the lowest level since April 2025. The index stayed below the 50.0 no-change line for a second month, pointing to a marginal but faster fall in private-sector output. The split was clear: stronger manufacturing production was not enough to offset a deeper decline in services, which remain the much larger part of the UK economy. New orders and employment across the private sector both fell at sharper rates, showing that demand weakness was starting to affect hiring decisions. Business expectations improved slightly from May’s 13-month low, helped by hopes around a US-Iran ceasefire and AI-related investment, but confidence remained well below its long-run average. Price pressure cooled again, with both input costs and output charges rising at the slowest rates since March, though inflation was still historically high.

The final UK Manufacturing PMI was revised down to 52.5 from the flash estimate of 53.1 and fell from May’s four-year high of 53.9, making the slowdown more pronounced than the preliminary data suggested. Even after the revision, manufacturing remained in expansion for an eighth consecutive month, and output was the strongest part of the report: production grew for a third straight month and at the fastest pace since September 2024. The sector was still benefiting from client stockpiling linked to supply-chain worries and expected price increases, but the demand impulse looked less durable. New orders rose for a seventh month, yet at the slowest pace since December 2025, while export orders increased only mildly despite support from mainland China, the EU and the US. Employment rose for a third month, but only modestly, as some firms froze or reduced headcount in parts of their businesses. Input-cost inflation remained elevated because of supply disruption, material shortages and geopolitical tensions, but eased to the weakest rate since March; factory selling prices also rose more slowly, though still close to May’s near four-year high. Business confidence was cautious: 48% of firms expected output to rise, while 44% expected stagnation and 9% expected contraction.

The final UK Services PMI came in at 48.8, slightly above the flash reading of 48.7 but down from 49.3 in May, confirming the weakest service-sector performance since January 2023. Activity fell for a second month, and the decline was the steepest for nearly three-and-a-half years, even if still modest in absolute terms. Service providers pointed to weak domestic conditions, Middle East-related uncertainty, risk aversion among clients and squeezed consumer budgets, while the late-June heatwave hurt footfall for some consumer-facing firms; hospitality was one partial exception, helped by demand linked to the FIFA World Cup. New business fell for a fourth month and at the fastest pace since November 2022, while export orders also declined solidly, mainly because of softer demand from European clients despite stronger US sales. Backlogs fell again, and employment declined at the sharpest rate since February as firms responded to lower workloads and margin pressure. Input-cost inflation slowed to the lowest level since March after peaking in April, but 42% of firms still reported higher costs and only 3% reported lower costs, with wages, transport and technology items among the main pressures. Output prices rose sharply but at the slowest pace since February, as competition and weak demand limited the ability to pass on costs.

Asia

· The final Japan Composite PMI was revised up to 52.8 from the flash reading of 52.5 and rose from 51.1 in May, showing the quickest overall expansion in three months. Growth improved because manufacturing output accelerated and services activity returned to expansion after May’s neutral reading. New business across the private sector rose at the fastest pace since February, mainly supported by domestic demand, while foreign demand increased only marginally as services exports fell sharply despite continued growth in manufacturing exports. Backlogs rose at the fastest rate in four months, and employment increased slightly faster, though still only modestly. Cost pressure became more intense, with input prices rising at the sharpest pace in four years, while output-price inflation eased from May’s record high but stayed rapid. Business confidence improved only slightly, as stronger demand was balanced by concerns about the Middle East war, rising costs and labor shortages.

The final Japan Manufacturing PMI was 54.8 in June, a little below the flash estimate of 54.9 but above May’s 54.5, leaving factory conditions in expansion for a sixth straight month. The reading marked the second-strongest improvement since January 2022, after April 2026, and completed the sector’s best quarterly performance since Q1 2014. Output growth was solid and the second-fastest since January 2022, while new orders rose at the strongest pace in nearly four-and-a-half years. Demand improved across domestic markets and exports, with foreign orders still rising at a solid pace, although more slowly than before. The expansion covered all three monitored market groups and was led by intermediate goods producers. Some of the strength came from clients building inventories because of supply disruption and higher prices linked to the Middle East war. Supplier delivery times worsened sharply, with shortages and shipping delays still among the most severe in the survey’s history. Employment growth was also strong by recent standards, matching the fastest pace since April 2018, but backlogs still rose quickly. Input-cost inflation held at May’s 44-month high, and selling prices increased at one of the fastest rates in the survey’s history despite easing from May. Confidence remained positive, helped by AI, semiconductor demand and capital investment, but stayed below its historical trend.

The final Japan Services PMI was 52.2, stronger than the flash reading of 51.8 and up from 50.0 in May, confirming that services moved back into growth at the end of the second quarter. Activity has now expanded in 14 of the past 15 months, although June’s pace was still modest and slightly below the average of the past year. New orders were the main support, rising at one of the fastest rates in two years, helped by new product launches, events and stronger transport demand. This came despite another marked decline in new export business, with firms reporting lower tourist numbers. Service providers added staff again, and job creation improved from May, but remained softer than the recent average. Unfinished work rose at the fastest pace since March, pointing to some pressure on capacity. Inflation was the main negative detail: input costs rose at the fastest pace since June 2022, driven by oil, energy, food and wages, and selling prices increased strongly even though the rate eased from May’s near-record high. Business confidence remained subdued, as firms expected activity to rise over the next year but worried about the Middle East war, rising expenses and labour shortages.

· The China Composite PMI eased to 53.6 in June from 54.0 in May, but it remained well above the 50.0 no-change line and still showed one of the strongest expansions in business activity in three years. Growth was broad-based across manufacturing and services, with services still stronger at 54.1 and manufacturing also expanding at 51.7. New business increased for a thirteenth consecutive month and was little changed from May, while employment rose for a second month, marking the first back-to-back increase since mid-2023. Cost pressure became less intense, as composite input-price inflation slowed to a five-month low, but firms’ selling prices for goods and services rose at the fastest pace since March 2022, showing that pricing power improved even as cost growth cooled.

The China General Manufacturing PMI slipped only slightly to 51.7 in June from 51.8 in May, a three-month low but still the seventh straight month above 50.0 and above the long-run survey average of 50.8. The second-quarter average of 51.9 was the strongest since Q4 2020, helped by positive contributions from all five PMI components. Output rose for a seventh month, although the pace slowed to a three-month low, while new orders increased for a thirteenth month, matching the longest growth sequence since 2018. External demand was softer, with new export orders falling for a second month, though only marginally. Employment improved more clearly: manufacturers added jobs for the first time in three months and at the fastest rate since August 2023. Backlogs still rose for a fifth month, but at a below-trend pace, and firms continued to lift inventories. Input-cost inflation slowed to the weakest level since January, down from April’s four-year high, while output prices rose for a sixth month and at a slightly faster rate than in May. Business confidence stayed positive, supported by expected new orders, product development and capacity improvements, but fell to the lowest level since January.

The China General Services PMI declined modestly to 54.1 in June from 54.4 in May, but it remained comfortably in expansion and marked the third-strongest rise in services activity in almost three years. Services growth was supported by higher new business, stronger client demand, new customer wins and project development. New work expanded again, continuing the growth sequence that began in January 2023, and export demand strengthened notably, with services exports rising for a second month and at the fastest rate since October 2024. Outstanding business increased for an eighth month and at the second-fastest pace in a year, while employment rose for a second month and at the fastest rate since July 2024. Business confidence was broadly similar to May and in line with the past two-year trend, helped by expansion plans, improving market conditions and new product launches. Price data were mixed but generally stronger on the revenue side: input-cost inflation eased from May’s 19-month high, while service providers raised charges for the first time in four months and at the fastest rate since May 2024.

· The final HSBC India Composite PMI was revised down to 57.1 from the flash reading of 57.4 and fell from 59.3 in May, showing that India’s private-sector economy still grew at a strong pace in June but lost momentum. The slowdown was broad-based, with both manufacturing and services expanding more slowly, and the composite index reached its weakest level since March. Aggregate sales rose at the slowest pace in three months, while employment growth softened to the weakest level in 2026 so far. External orders still increased, but at the slowest pace in almost two years, despite stronger services exports. Price pressure also cooled: input-cost inflation fell to a five-month low and output-charge inflation eased to a seven-month low. Business confidence weakened, with the composite measure of future output expectations dropping to a five-month low.

The final HSBC India Manufacturing PMI was revised down to 54.2 from the flash estimate of 54.5 and declined from 55.0 in May. The sector remained clearly above the 50.0 line and continued to expand, but the final reading showed a softer picture than the preliminary data and marked the second-weakest improvement in manufacturing conditions since mid-2022, except for March. Output and new orders both grew, but with the exception of March their rates of increase were the weakest in four years. The slowdown was concentrated in capital goods, while consumer and intermediate goods producers saw faster growth. Export orders continued to rise, but only modestly and at the slowest pace since March 2023, partly because of weaker sales to some European markets. Employment still increased, but at the slowest rate so far this year, while backlogs were broadly unchanged, suggesting limited capacity pressure. Inflation also moderated: input prices rose at the weakest pace since February, and output prices increased at the slowest rate in three months. Business optimism fell to a five-month low as the share of firms expecting output growth over the next year halved from May.

The final HSBC India Services PMI came in at 57.4, slightly above the flash reading of 57.3 but down sharply from 59.8 in May. Services therefore remained firmly in expansion and above the long-run average, but the pace of growth was the weakest in 17 months. Softer domestic demand was the main reason: total new orders rose at the slowest rate in more than two-and-a-half years, as some firms reported weaker client interest and challenging market conditions. There were still pockets of strength, including ecommerce, local tourism, customer bookings and competitive pricing, while new export orders rose at the fastest pace in three months, supported by demand from markets including Australia, Germany, Singapore, the UAE and the US. Hiring was broadly paused after solid job creation in April and May, and backlogs were almost unchanged. Input costs continued to rise because of electricity, food, fuel and transportation, but inflation eased to a five-month low; service selling-price inflation was slight, below its long-run average and the weakest since November 2025. Confidence remained positive but fell to a five-month low and stayed below its historical trend.

Foreign Exchange Markets

The U.S. dollar weakened over the week, with the DXY index down 0.5%.

Commodities and Energy Markets

The commodities complex ended the week mostly higher.

Debt and Fixed Income Markets

According to CME data, the implied Fed funds rate curve over the next 18 months was little changed at the front end but shifted higher further out, with most of the move concentrated in 2027 contracts.

The implied probability of a rate hike at the July meeting declined to 21.9% from 29.9% a week earlier. Looking ahead, markets still expect only one rate hike, most likely in September. In total, futures now price around 28 bp of cumulative tightening by year-end 2026, slightly down from 29 bp a week earlier.

The U.S. Treasury yield curve moved higher across maturities. According to Bloomberg, the 1-year yield nudged higher by 1 bp to 3.92%, the 10-year yield increased 11 bp to 4.48%, and the 30-year yield rose 13 bp to 4.99%.

You can find more articles in our Telegram channel at https://t.me/atranicapital_eng

U.S. equities were mixed at the headline level, but the internal picture was more constructive than the large-cap indexes suggest. The S&P 500 fell 2.0% and the Nasdaq Composite dropped 4.6%, while the Dow rose 0.6%. Beneath the surface, weakness was concentrated in large-cap growth and AI-linked technology. The Magnificent 7 lost 6.0% in market value and, according to our calculations, its weekly decline alone exceeded the S&P 500’s total market-cap loss.

The selloff was not limited to semiconductors, even though chips were the most visible pressure point. Investors appeared to be reassessing the AI trade more broadly — from infrastructure suppliers such as Nvidia (-8.6% w/w) and Broadcom (-11.3%) to hyperscalers including Microsoft (-1.7%), Alphabet (-8.3%), Amazon (-4.8%) and Meta (-4.7%). The key question is no longer whether AI demand exists, but whether the current capex boom can generate durable returns. Exponential View estimates that the generative AI economy has reached about $110 billion in trailing 12-month revenue and is running at a $175 billion annualized pace. That growth explains why investors are not abandoning AI, but thin headroom over current depreciation costs explains why scrutiny is rising.

That distinction matters for the broader market. Bloomberg cited Nationwide’s Mark Hackett as saying that beneath the technology selloff, the economy still looked resilient, with consumers spending, businesses investing and earnings expectations moving higher. UBS remained constructive but emphasized diversification, while Goldman’s Christian Mueller-Glissmann argued that investors may want to shift within AI, away from the most volatile semiconductor beneficiaries and toward hyperscalers if the broader theme remains intact.

In that sense, the selloff looks less like a rejection of AI and more like a repricing of expectations after a powerful run. For the broader market, the message remains relatively constructive: technology leadership is under pressure, but rotation into value, mid-caps and small caps suggests investors are not abandoning equities. They are becoming more selective.

Global equities were weaker, with the global ex-U.S. index falling 2.7% on the week.

Flash PMI data showed a modest improvement in G4 business activity in June. The average G4 flash Composite PMI rose to 50.9 from 50.2, suggesting that the growth shock from the Middle East conflict is stabilizing but not reversing cleanly. The U.S. remained the strongest performer, Japan improved, while Europe stayed weak: the eurozone remained in contraction and the UK slipped to a 14-month low. Across the G4, manufacturing continued to look better than services, but much of the strength still reflected stockpiling and front-loaded demand rather than sustainable final demand.

Crypto came under heavy pressure as the technology selloff spilled into broader risk assets. Total market capitalization fell 4.7%, with Bitcoin again the main source of weakness. ETF flows offered the clearest sign of stress: redemptions from U.S. spot Bitcoin ETFs intensified to almost $1.8 billion, the second-largest weekly outflow on record, suggesting institutional demand has not yet stabilized.

Rates markets moved in the opposite direction. CME data show the implied Fed funds curve shifted lower by about 11 bp over the next 18 months, driven mainly by falling oil prices after Persian Gulf exports began to recover. Inflation expectations also eased: the University of Michigan’s longer-run inflation expectation fell to 3.3% from 3.9%, while the 5-year breakeven declined to its lowest level since October 2024. The implied probability of a July rate hike fell to 29.9% from 38.5%, although markets still expect one hike, most likely in September.

Treasury yields declined across the curve, with the 1-year down 6 bp to 3.91%, the 10-year down 8 bp to 4.37%, and the 30-year down 4 bp to 4.86%, according to Bloomberg.

For comprehensive insights and deeper context, please refer to the full article.

US Stock Market

U.S. equities were mixed at the headline level, but the internal picture was more constructive than the large-cap indexes suggest. The S&P 500 fell 2.0% and the Nasdaq Composite dropped 4.6%, while the Dow rose 0.6%. Beneath the surface, weakness was concentrated in large-cap growth and the AI-linked technology complex: the Magnificent 7 lost 6.0% in market value and, according to our calculations, its weekly decline alone exceeded the S&P 500’s total market-cap loss.

The pressure was not limited to semiconductors, even though chips were the most visible part of the selloff. The broader pattern suggests investors were reassessing the AI trade itself — especially AI infrastructure suppliers and hyperscalers, from Nvidia (-8.6% w/w) and Broadcom (-11.3%) to Microsoft (-1.7%), Alphabet (-8.3%), Amazon (-4.8%) and Meta (-4.7%) — and the question of whether the current capex boom can generate durable returns. This does not mean the AI story is broken. Exponential View estimates that the generative AI economy has already reached about $110 billion in trailing 12-month revenue and is now running at a $175 billion annualized pace, with quarterly revenue almost tripling over the past year. That growth rate helps explain why investors are not abandoning the AI story, but the same report also shows why scrutiny is rising: AI infrastructure revenue has only recently begun covering current depreciation costs, with thin headroom, so the market is increasingly asking whether future demand can justify the scale of capex.

That distinction matters for the broader market. Bloomberg cited Mark Hackett of Nationwide saying the market beneath the technology selloff was telling a different story, with consumers still spending, businesses still investing and earnings expectations still moving higher. UBS remained constructive but emphasized diversification, while Goldman’s Christian Mueller-Glissmann argued that investors may want to diversify within AI away from the most volatile semiconductor beneficiaries and toward hyperscalers if the broader AI momentum remains intact.

That makes the current selloff look less like a rejection of AI itself and more like a repricing of expectations after a very strong run. For the broader market, the message remains constructive: technology leadership is under pressure, but the rotation into value, mid-caps and small caps suggests investors are not abandoning equities — they are becoming more selective.

Sector performance improved beneath the surface, with seven of eleven sectors posting gains, even though weakness in mega-cap growth weighed on the headline market. Health Care was the clear leader, surging 7.8%, as investor appetite returned to large biopharma stocks. AbbVie, Eli Lilly and Johnson & Johnson all closed at record highs, supported by company-specific catalysts and a broader shift away from technology and semiconductors. AbbVie (+17.0%) rallied after announcing a $10.9 billion acquisition of Apogee Therapeutics, strengthening its immunology pipeline; Lilly (+10.0%) gained on expectations for wider access to its weight-loss drugs; and J&J (+11.5%) benefited from confidence in its strategic shift toward pharmaceuticals and oncology. Real Estate and Utilities also advanced strongly, consistent with demand for defensive and rate-sensitive groups. By contrast, weakness was concentrated in mega-cap growth: Technology fell 5.3% as Nvidia, Broadcom, Oracle (-16.2%), Apple (-4.8%) and several chip names sold off, while Communication Services declined 2.7% on weakness in Alphabet and Meta, and Consumer Discretionary fell 2.2% as Amazon and Tesla (-5.2%) dropped. Overall, the week looked less like a broad market breakdown and more like a rotation away from crowded AI and mega-cap growth exposure toward Health Care, Real Estate, Utilities and selected defensive sectors.

The Fear & Greed Index fell to 25 from 37 a week earlier, entering the “extreme fear” zone.

SPY’s short-term picture weakened this week, with the ETF falling back below both the 20-day and 50-day moving averages and slipping under the 736–737 breakout area that had been acting as a key line of support. That does not fully break the broader recovery—price remains above the 100-day and 200-day averages—but it shows buyers have lost some near-term control after the strong May advance. Momentum has also faded, with RSI dropping to the low-40s, suggesting the market has moved from recovery mode into a more cautious, two-way phase. In the near term, reclaiming 736–737 would be the first sign of stabilization, while failure to do so would keep attention on the 720–723 zone as the next support area; below that, the 100-day average near 704 and the 200-day average near 690 become the deeper cushions to watch.

Global Markets

Global equities shifted into risk-off mode, with the global ex-U.S. equity index falling 2.7% on the week.

ACWX lost some momentum this week, slipping back below the 20-day moving average and testing the former breakout area around 75. The broader trend has not broken down—price remains above the 50-, 100-, and 200-day moving averages—but the short-term tone has clearly softened, with buyers no longer defending every dip as confidently as they did earlier in June. Momentum has cooled as well, with RSI falling to the high-40s, suggesting the market has moved from steady demand into a more cautious, two-way phase. In the near term, reclaiming the 20-day average near 76 would help stabilize the picture and put the 77–78 resistance zone back in focus; if ACWX fails to hold the 75 area, attention would shift to the 72–73 zone around the 50- and 100-day averages as the next important support.

Cryptocurrency Market

The crypto market came under heavy pressure as the selloff in technology stocks spilled over into broader risk assets, with total market capitalization falling 4.7% w/w. Bitcoin remained the main source of weakness, pressured by both deteriorating risk appetite and renewed institutional selling.

ETF flows were the clearest sign of stress. Redemptions from U.S. spot Bitcoin ETFs intensified sharply, reaching almost $1.8 billion over the week — the second-largest weekly outflow on record. That suggests the market is not yet seeing a clean stabilization in institutional demand; instead, forced selling and risk reduction remain active.

At the same time, some bottoming indicators are starting to move into historically important ranges. Bitcoin briefly fell below $60,000 and is now trading only about 10% above its realized price, estimated by CryptoQuant at around $53,400. Realized price — the average cost basis of Bitcoin investors — has often acted as a major bottoming zone in previous bear markets. Glassnode’s MVRV Z-Score has also moved close to levels that historically marked the late stage of crypto drawdowns, while sentiment indicators are already deep in “extreme fear” territory.

Still, these are early bottoming signals, not proof that the low is already in. Several crypto analysts argue that durable bottoms tend to take months to form, as forced sellers are gradually exhausted and long-term capital replaces speculative money. Some estimates place the broader potential bottoming range between roughly $37,000 and $60,000, with the realized-price area near $53,000 acting as an important reference point. In other words, Bitcoin may be entering a valuation zone where risk-reward starts to improve, but ETF outflows, weak momentum and fragile sentiment suggest that a final leg lower remains possible before a more durable recovery begins.

Economic Indicators, Statistics and News

Several important macroeconomic indicators and economic news were published during the week:

Global

· Business activity across the G4 economies improved modestly in June, with the simple average of flash composite PMIs rising to 50.9 from 50.2 in May, a two-month high. The rebound suggests that the developed-world growth shock from the Middle East war may be stabilizing, but the recovery remains uneven and fragile. At the aggregate level, S&P Global noted that business growth across the G4 expanded at the fastest pace since the outbreak of the conflict, with the United States and Japan gaining momentum while the eurozone and the United Kingdom remained in contraction. Manufacturing continued to outperform services, helped by precautionary stockpiling and front-loaded demand amid supply concerns, while services remained the main weak spot, especially in Europe.

The United States was the strongest performer, with the Composite PMI rising to 52.2 from 51.5, a five-month high. Growth improved for a third consecutive month, led by the fastest manufacturing output expansion since July 2021, although services remained sluggish and employment fell again. Japan also strengthened, with its Composite PMI rising to 52.5 from 51.1, a three-month high, as manufacturing stayed robust and services returned to growth after stagnating in May. Still, both economies showed signs that part of the manufacturing strength was temporary, driven by inventory building rather than purely organic final demand.

Europe remained the main drag. The eurozone Composite PMI rose to 49.5 from 48.5, a three-month high, but stayed below the 50 threshold for a third consecutive month, pointing to only a marginal contraction and a broadly flat second-quarter GDP picture. The UK Composite PMI slipped to 49.4 from 49.7, a 14-month low, as a sharper decline in services outweighed the strongest manufacturing output growth since September 2024. In both regions, services weakness reflected high prices, fragile consumer demand, political uncertainty and the aftershocks of the Middle East conflict, while manufacturing resilience continued to rely partly on stockpiling.

Taken together, the June PMI data point to a partial easing of the stagflation shock rather than a clean recovery. Lower energy prices helped cool input-cost inflation in Europe and, to a lesser extent, the US, suggesting that the recent price spike may be peaking. However, cost pressures remain historically elevated, supply-chain delays are still widespread, and Japan saw input-cost inflation accelerate to one of the highest levels in the survey’s history. S&P Global’s Chris Williamson noted that the data now imply policy divergence: stronger output growth in the US points to higher-for-longer rates, Europe’s weak output and employment reduce second-round inflation risks, and Japan’s policy path will depend on whether growth can absorb another inflation-driven tightening cycle. In short, the G4 picture improved in June, but the recovery still rests on fragile foundations: temporary manufacturing support, subdued services demand, elevated prices and continued uncertainty around the Middle East conflict.

US

· US GDP was revised higher in the third estimate, but the upgrade was less impressive than the headline suggested because it came mainly from a smaller drag from imports rather than stronger domestic demand. Real GDP grew at a 2.1% annualized rate in 1Q26, up from the prior 1.6% estimate and well above the 0.5% pace in 4Q25. The BEA said the upward revision primarily reflected lower imports, especially consumer goods, capital goods and transport services, while consumer spending was revised down sharply. Personal consumption rose only 0.5% annualized, compared with the previous estimate of 1.4%, marking the weakest quarterly advance in about four years. Business investment remained the strongest part of the economy: equipment spending rose 15.8%, while intellectual property products increased 13.8%, consistent with AI-related capital spending. However, final sales to private domestic purchasers, a cleaner measure of domestic demand, were revised down to 1.7% from 2.4%, showing softer underlying momentum. Gross domestic income was revised up to 1.2%, and the average of GDP and GDI rose 1.7%, while corporate profits increased by $74.4 billion, stronger than the earlier $40.4 billion estimate but far below the $246.9 billion gain in 4Q25. The broader message is that the economy grew faster than previously reported, but the underlying mix was uneven: AI-linked investment and trade revisions helped the headline, while household demand looked much weaker.

US personal income and spending data for May showed that consumers regained some momentum despite the inflation shock. Personal income rose 0.7% m/m, disposable personal income also increased 0.7%, and current-dollar PCE rose 0.7%, supported by higher compensation and a jump in farm proprietors’ income linked to disaster-relief payments. After adjusting for inflation, real disposable income rose 0.3%, its first increase since the start of the year, while real consumer spending also advanced 0.3% after stalling in April. The spending gain was broad enough to matter: current-dollar spending on services rose by $94.3 billion, while goods spending increased by $61.8 billion. Still, the household cushion remains thin: personal saving was $704.2 billion, and the saving rate stayed at 3.0%, the lowest since 2022. This suggests that consumers are still spending, helped by tax refunds, income growth, jobs and stock-market gains, but some of that resilience is coming at the cost of lower saving.

PCE inflation accelerated further in May, keeping pressure on the Fed even though lower oil prices may reduce headline inflation later. The PCE price index rose 0.4% m/m and 4.1% y/y, the fastest annual pace since April 2023, while core PCE increased 0.3% m/m and 3.4% y/y. The BEA’s GDP release also revised 1Q inflation slightly higher, with the PCE price index up 4.6% annualized and core PCE up 4.4%. Energy remained an important driver after the Iran-war shock, but Bloomberg noted that price increases were visible beyond fuel, including financial services, transportation services, health care, and computer software and accessories, where prices rose a record 14.5% y/y amid demand tied to the data-center buildout. Joe Brusuelas of RSM said headline inflation may have peaked in May after the recent drop in oil prices, but underlying inflation may be slower to ease because pipeline price pressures remain. The data therefore point to a difficult inflation mix: gasoline relief could help consumers in the short term, but core inflation is still running well above the Fed’s target.

The June flash PMI showed faster business activity, but also confirmed that the expansion remains uneven and partly temporary. The S&P Global US Composite PMI rose to 52.2 from 51.5, a five-month high, while the Services PMI improved to 51.3 from 50.7 and the Manufacturing PMI rose to 55.7, its highest level since May 2022. Manufacturing was the clear source of strength: the manufacturing output index reached 57.7, a 59-month high, and new orders rose at the fastest pace in more than four years. However, S&P Global warned that part of the factory strength reflected precautionary inventory building ahead of possible supply disruptions and price increases linked to the Middle East war. Input buying surged, input inventories rose at the second-fastest pace on record, and supplier delivery times lengthened the most since August 2022. Services improved only modestly, helped in some cases by the World Cup, but companies continued to report pressure from high prices, interest rates and weak confidence. Employment was the weakest part of the report: headcount fell for a second straight month, with manufacturing job cuts running at the fastest pace since the early-2020 lockdowns. Chris Williamson of S&P Global said the survey points to an economy struggling to grow much faster than a 1% annualized pace in 2Q, despite the better headline PMI.